JP2023101825A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To create a game machine having high convenience to a manager of a game house or a player.SOLUTION: In a game machine including a frame bottom part, a prescribed substrate, and a substrate case for covering the prescribed substrate, the substrate case has a prescribed heat radiation port, and is constituted such that the frame bottom part is not positioned on the vertical lower side of the prescribed heat radiation port.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 88

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

Among game machines, there are game machines having operable operation members, frame bottoms, ball trays, and the like.

JP 2010-046387 A JP 2012-210475 A

Even with the operable operating member, the bottom of the frame, and the ball tray, there is still room for improvement in terms of convenience for the manager of the game arcade and the players.

a frame bottom;
a predetermined substrate;
a substrate case covering the predetermined substrate;
with
The board case has a predetermined heat dissipation port,
A gaming machine, wherein the frame bottom portion is not positioned vertically below the predetermined heat radiation port.

The game machine can be highly convenient for the manager of the game hall and the players.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a perspective view in the front direction of the pachinko game machine with the frame member opened. It is the perspective view of the back direction of the state which opened the frame member of the said pachinko game machine. It is a perspective view showing a game board attached to the pachinko game machine assumed. It is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the transition of the game state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the game stop state setting process during the said power-on process. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the success-or-failure lottery table of the pachinko game machine which is assumed. It is a diagram showing a winning symbol lottery table of the premise pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the low base state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the high base state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a special variation pattern lottery table that is referred to during a limited period of the pachinko gaming machine that is assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a game effect of symbol variation display (decorative symbol stop display) during normal game (low probability/low base) of the premised pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing the game production|presentation of the situation where the ready-to-win production|presentation with high expectation which becomes a big hit of the premise pachinko game machine is performed. It is a diagram showing a game effect in a state in which a jackpot game is being executed in the pachinko gaming machine as a premise. It is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function, which is a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base) of the premised pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the housing|casing exterior perspective view of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the back surface of a front panel. It is a figure which shows a housing|casing inner surface. It is a figure which shows a functional block. 4 is a flowchart showing program start processing; 4 is a flowchart showing power-off processing; 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing; 7 is a flowchart showing power-off recovery processing; It is a flowchart which shows game progress main. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence in 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the combination lottery in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the combination lottery in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the combination lottery in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations forming a winning combination in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations forming a winning combination in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations forming a winning combination in the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing numbers set for each winning combination in the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the RT transition diagram in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing determination of an L mode number in the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transmission of the light emitted from the reel sheet and the LED attached to the structural house lamp in the house lamp in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a comparison when a pattern area is provided on the reel sheet in the second embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing scenario numbers, scenario selection ratios for each set value, and production scenarios corresponding to each scenario in one advantageous section in the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the symbol combination which can be displayed by the result of the role lottery in 4th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations forming a winning combination in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing numbers set for each winning combination in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the RT transition diagram in 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart diagram showing the end timing of the MB-A game in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the medal|token insertion timing and reel control in this example. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the relationship between the reel unit and the reel unit upper screw in this example. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening on the rear surface of the reel unit and the upper screw of the reel unit in this example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening on the rear surface of the reel unit, the central display board protection cover, and the upper screw of the reel unit in this example. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a reel unit having upper and lower reel unit openings in this example. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a reel unit having a reel unit full-surface opening in this example. FIG. 11 is an operation explanatory cross-sectional view part 1 for explaining the operation principle of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is an operation explanatory cross-sectional view part 2 for explaining the principle of operation of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a first diagram illustrating a problem with the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a second diagram for explaining a defect of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a first explanatory diagram of countermeasures for preventing the light source destruction defect of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; It is a figure explaining arrangement|positioning of the light source of the production|presentation input button in 5th Embodiment, and a screw. There is a countermeasure explanatory diagram No. 2 for preventing the light source destruction defect of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the mechanism which reduces the malfunction (eccentric movement) of the production|presentation input button in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the irradiation range of the light source of the production|presentation input button in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram of light source destruction caused by a failure in the depression mechanism of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission displacement from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining vibration transmission from effect buttons of the slot machine in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining vibration transmission from effect buttons of the slot machine in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining vibration transmission from effect buttons of the slot machine in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining vibration transmission from effect buttons of the slot machine in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining vibration transmission from effect buttons of the slot machine in the seventh embodiment; It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission displacement from the production|presentation button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows sectional drawing (a) (b) which shows sensor detection piece operation|movement in 8th Embodiment, and the memory area of RAM. FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining chattering when high active determination is employed in the eighth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining chattering when low active determination is employed in the eighth embodiment; It is a bottom view regarding a lower ball plate. It is an image figure about a lower ball plate. It is an image figure about a lower ball plate. It is a rear view of the gaming machine. FIG. 10 is an image diagram of a RAM clear button and an error cancel button; FIG. 10 is an image diagram of a RAM clear button and an error cancel button; It is a side view of the frame bottom of the gaming machine. It is an image figure regarding the thermal radiation port of a payment|withdrawal control board case. It is an image figure regarding the thermal radiation port of a payment|withdrawal control board case. FIG. 2 is an image diagram of a plurality of speakers; FIG.

(Prerequisite technology)
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "prerequisite technology") on which the present invention is based will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 and 3 show a pachinko game machine as a representative example of the pachinko game machine according to the base technology, and FIG. 4 shows a game board provided in this pachinko game machine. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to these figures. In the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 are referred to as the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction.

[Machine configuration of pachinko machine]
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine P is configured in a rectangular outer shape, and is attached to the front of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the game facility so that the front frame P2, which is square in size to match the opening of the outer frame P1, is horizontally opened, opened, and detachable by means of upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20) arranged on the left side edges of the front of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are detachably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a rectangular shape, and is mounted and held on the front side of the front frame P2 so as to be able to open and close and be detachably opened laterally using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20). The game board P5 is detachably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and the player can visually recognize the game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 which is closed and held. Further, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are rotated in either the left or right direction by inserting a key into a keyhole of a locking part P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko game machine P, thereby unlocking the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 or unlocking the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 depending on the direction of rotation. As a specific example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and turned rightward, the locking of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 is unlocked, and when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and turned leftward, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

Under the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball trays P340 (upper ball tray P341 and lower ball tray P342) for storing game balls are provided. Further, the glass frame P3 is provided with an effect lamp P350 that emits light according to the development of the game, and an upper speaker P370 capable of outputting sounds such as sound effects according to the development of the game. At the center of the lower part of the glass frame P3, an effect operation means P380 for performing a predetermined effect operation is attached, and the effect operation means P380 possessed by the pachinko game machine shown as the underlying technology comprises a push input type button P381 and a tilting operation type lever P382. When the operating means itself is displaced to a state of protruding upward (input permitting state), the operation input is enabled (a plurality of operations are possible with one performance operating means).

A handle P204 is provided at the lower right portion of the front frame P2 for controlling the shooting operation of the game ball and the shooting intensity. A shooting device unit P240 is further provided at the lower part of the front frame P2. Although not shown, a ball feeding mechanism P241 (sometimes referred to as a ball feeding unit) that feeds out the game balls stored in the upper ball tray P341 one by one, a shooting device P242 that has a firing mechanism (a ball-striking hammer driven by a rotary solenoid) that shoots out the game balls fed from the ball feeding mechanism toward the game area P501, the ball feeding mechanism P241 and the shooting device P24. 2, and a firing control board P243 for synchronously controlling the operation of the two.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is configured with a base material formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using transparent synthetic resin or wood. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine P including the game board P5, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board unit P5. FIG. 4 shows a state in which the production accessory P560 (also called "movable production device", "movable production body", "movable production accessory", etc.) provided in the game board unit is in operation. The front face of the game board P5 is provided with an arc-shaped outer rail P502 arranged from the lower left part to the upper right part, an arc-shaped inner rail P503 arranged from the vicinity of the lower center of the game board to the inner side of the outer rail P502 from the lower left part to the upper left part, and a rail decoration P504 formed in a curved shape opened to the left and arranged between the end of the outer rail P502 at the upper right part and the lower part of the board surface. 2, an inner rail P503, and a rail decoration P504, a substantially circular game area P501 is defined inside. This game area P501 has a left area P501L (left-handed area) that is an area on the left side of the center role P540 and a right area P501R (right-handed area) that is an area on the right side of the center role P540. Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and a windmill P511 (not shown), there are a first start winning port P711 (first starting port), a second starting winning port P721 (second starting port), a general winning port P731, a general drawing operation port P741 (universal drawing operation gate device), a large winning prize port P751 (attacker), etc. ) are provided. It should be noted that the number of the big prize winning opening may be one, or it may be configured to have a plurality of openings. Further, in this specification, regarding the structure of the ball-entering device, the game ball is discharged after entering the ball-entering device, or further flows down the game area P501 after entering the ball-entering device (gate type), and the detection of the game ball by the internal detection switch is referred to as "entering ball" or "winning (especially, the one where winning balls are generated)". have a case. Also, the ball entry device is sometimes referred to as a ball entry port, and the prize winning device is sometimes referred to as a prize winning port.

In addition, at the lower right of the game area P501, the main control display device P50, such as the first special symbol display device P51, the second special symbol display device P52, the normal symbol display device P53, etc., whose lighting is controlled by the main control board described later, is arranged intensively. A center accessory P540 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is provided so as to be visible through the opening of the center accessory P540. Above the center accessory P540, etc., there is provided a production accessory P560 (movable accessory device) that performs a production operation according to the development of the game. At the lower end of the game area P501, there is provided an out port P790 through which game balls that have flowed down without entering the winning ports of various ball entry devices can pass. Game balls that have entered the prize-winning openings of various prize-winning devices or have flowed into the outlet P790 flow down to the rear side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed through the game board P5, are collected in a collection passage (played ball passage) at the bottom of the front frame P2, and pass through an out-ball sensor P792 (shot ball number sensor) provided at the bottom of the front frame for detecting the total number of shot game balls. discharged to the outside.

The first starting winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. This first start winning device P710 is provided with a first start winning opening P711 into which a game ball can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first start prize winning port P711 is a trigger for acquisition of the random number used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and the lottery related to the first special symbol is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start prize winning port P711 at the timing immediately after the ball enters or after the holding period has elapsed.

The second starting winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. This second starting prize winning device P720 is provided with a second starting prize winning port P721 into which a game ball can enter, and an ordinary electric accessory P770 which is a movable body which switches to a state in which the ball enters the second starting prize winning port P721 easily when winning a normal symbol lottery to be described later. The entry of the game ball into the second starting prize winning port P721 triggers the random number used for the lottery related to the second special symbol, and the lottery related to the second special symbol is executed after the timing immediately after the ball entering the second starting winning prize port P721 or after the holding period elapses. The second start winning device P721 changes into an open state in which a game ball can or easily enters the second start winning port P721 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the second start winning port P721 by the action of the normal electric accessory P770. In other words, the second start winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning port unless it is displaced to the open state, and when it is opened at a predetermined opportunity (a chance to win the normal symbol lottery) to be described later, the ease of entry of the game ball increases. Various forms of the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 are known, and there are cases where the structure does not change the ease of entering a ball by opening the movable body P771. Therefore, the "open state" and "closed state" are sometimes referred to as "easy-entering state (easy-entering state)" and "difficult-entering state (difficult-entering state)", respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left general winning device P730L arranged in the left hitting area P501L and a right general winning device P730R arranged in the right hitting area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P according to the present base technology, the left general prize winning device P730L is configured as one unit with three general prize winning ports P731La to P731Lc, while the right general prize winning device P730R is configured as part of the big prize winning device P750 to be described later. Entry of a game ball into the general winning hole P731 triggers the payout of prize balls as with other winning devices. It should be noted that the number and positions of the general winning openings P731 of the pachinko game machine, which are assumed, are merely an example, and may be configured to be arranged only in the right-handed area P501R.

The normal pattern operation gate device P740 (normal pattern operation port) is provided as a starting entrance ball corresponding to the normal pattern game. This normal figure operation gate device P740 is provided with an operation gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entered game ball is configured to be able to further flow downstream of the game area of the game board. Passage of the game ball to the operation gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting prize winning device P720, that is, whether or not to operate the normal electric accessory P770. As a modification, it is also possible to configure the above-described general winning port P731 to have the function that triggers the normal symbol lottery.

The big winning device P750 has a big winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery results in a big win or a small win, and is sometimes called an "attacker (device)". The big winning device P750 changes into an open state in which a game ball can or easily enters the big winning opening P751 (for example, a state in which a special electric accessory is activated P755) and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the big winning opening P751 (for example, a state in which the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the jackpot game, a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by opening and closing operations of the jackpot P751 are performed. Even when the special electric accessory P755 is activated, the movable body P756 that constitutes the big winning opening P751 may be closed due to a series of activation patterns (also referred to as "open pattern").

In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the big winning device P750 may be provided with a specific area P760 (called "V zone", "V area", and depending on the function, called "probability change function operating area", "continuous area", etc.) through which game balls can pass. Functions related to this "specific area" include (a) activating a probability variation function (described later) after a big win game when passing through a specific area during a big win game, (b) activating a role product continuous operation device (a flag for continuously operating a special electric role product) when passing a specific area during a big win game, and granting the right to execute a big win game, and (c) determining whether or not a specific area has been passed in a specific round during a big win game. Based on this, execution of subsequent rounds may be deterministic or non-executable. An opening/closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided for the "specific area", and the flow path may be divided by the action of the opening/closing member P761 to pass through the specific area P760 or other non-specific areas. Also, during the big hit game or the small hit game, it may have a period during which the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 is valid and a period during which it is invalid.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine P as a premise, the big winning device P750 is provided in the right area P501R (right hitting area) in the game area P501. Therefore, in the big-hit game or the small-hit game, when the game ball is shot toward the game area P501, the ball can be easily entered into the big winning hole P751 by hitting the right side area P501R, i.e. hitting the right side.

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, will be described. On the rear side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 having a front-to-rear communicating window is mounted for mounting the game board unit P5 in the center. The back set unit P4 includes a storage tank P401 for storing a large number of game balls supplied from the gaming facility, a gutter member P402 for letting the game balls flow down from the storage tank P401, a prize ball payout unit P410 for putting out the game balls guided by the gutter member, and a back side passage member P403 for letting the game balls put out from the prize ball payout unit P410 flow down to the upper ball tray P341 or the lower ball tray P342. etc. are provided. In addition, on the game ball flow-down path from the storage tank P401 to the ball tray P340, there is provided a ball removal mechanism (a ball removal operation lever P405, a valve member P406 that forms a flow path for removing the game ball from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever).

On the back side of the game board P5, a main control board P40 for comprehensively controlling the game progress of the pachinko game machine P, a performance control board P41 for controlling the overall performance in accordance with the game progress accompanying the control of the main control board P40, an image control board P42 for controlling the image display according to the game development, etc. are attached. Note that, in the pachinko game machine P of the underlying technology, the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 form an effect display unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device P80 (liquid crystal display device). On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, a payout control board P43 for controlling the payout of game balls, a power board P44 (not shown) that receives power from the game facility side and supplies power to various control boards and electric/electronic parts, etc. are attached. In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are arranged at predetermined positions on the back of the game board P5 or the back of the back set unit P4 in an assembly state housed in a board case made of transparent resin having a caulking structure and a sealing structure. These control boards and the electric/electronic parts of each part of the pachinko game machine are connected to each other via harnesses (connector cables), so that the pachinko game machine P is configured to allow the progress of games and the execution of effects.

[Function block]
FIG. 5 shows functional blocks of a pachinko game machine as a premise.

The pachinko game machine has a power supply board P44 that generates power to be used in the game machine based on AC power supplied from the outside of the game machine, a main control board P40 (main control CPU) that controls the basic game operations and progress of the game, a payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device that controls the payout of prize balls and the shooting of game balls, and a performance control board P41 that controls performance operations and processes. morphology. In addition, the arrows shown in the figure indicate upper transmission/reception relationships by solid-line arrows and electrical connection relationships by broken-line arrows.

By operating a power switch P47 provided on the board, the power board P44 generates and supplies power necessary for operation to a main control board P40, a performance control board P41, a payout control board P43, and various game devices electrically connected thereto, which will be described later. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the settings of the gaming machine, the power switch is protected by being covered with an open/close cover to prevent unauthorized operation.

The main control board P40 includes the first start winning port P711 (special 1 starting port switch P712), the second starting winning port P721 (special 2 starting port switch P722), the large winning port P751 (large winning port switch P752), the general winning port P741 (universal drawing operating port switch P742), and other detection switches, the general winning port P731 (left general winning port, right general winning port). , Out port P790 and other detection switches related to game progress, setting key switch P49, vibration detection sensor P72, magnet sensor P73, and other switches and sensors used for management and fraud monitoring of various games. The main control board obtains input of information related to the occurrence of various game states from these switches, determines control details related to the progress of the game, and is composed of solenoids, etc., and is driven to expand the big winning opening P751 at the time of a big win or a small win. Outputs information related to

A sensor or the like connected to the main control board P40 is connected to a terminal called an input port on the main control board, and notifies the main control board P40 of the occurrence of various game states based on sensor detection as information, and receives information output from a terminal called an output port, such as a special electric accessory drive means P70, a normal electric accessory drive means P71, and a launch permission signal for the launcher P242, to control each device.

In addition, the main control board P40 includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 that perform variable display of the first special symbol and second special symbol, round indicator light P54 that notifies the type (number of rounds) of big hits and small wins, main control display device P50 that performs various displays such as status indicator light P55 that notifies the game state, and performance display device P that displays the performance of the game machine (for example, the base value during the normal game, that is, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of shots). 59 and so on. Regarding the "base value", there are various other accounting methods such as data that excludes the winning of the start winning opening P711, etc., but will be explained separately when necessary in the present invention, and the details will be omitted in the explanation of the pachinko gaming machine that is the premise.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to devices outside the gaming machine through an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, etc., and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the effect control board P41 and the payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the gaming machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on signals indicating the payout of prize balls and the control state of the main control board transmitted from the main control board P40, and also controls the shooting of game balls by the launcher unit P240 in response to the player's operation of the handle P204. The payout device P410 has, for example, a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by the rotation of the payout motor P411. A shooting device (shooting device unit) P240 is configured to move the game balls staying in the ball tray P340 (upper ball tray P341) one by one to a shooting position by a ball feeding unit P241, and then hit the game balls with a hitting mallet to shoot the game balls. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48 mainly used for initializing the game machine and canceling errors that occur during the game, and operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via a harness or connector used for connecting the payout control board P43 and the main control board P40.

The production control board P41 includes a production display device P80, a drive source and position detection sensors for production movable accessories P560 (for example, a drive motor, an initial position detection sensor, a production position detection sensor), a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, a lower speaker 141), a production input device unit P380 (for example, production operation means P81, production button P381, production lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), production lamp P82 ("decorative lamp", "board lamp"). (P550)” and “frame lamp (P350)”), and various control signals are transmitted and received between them. Also, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 may be connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) or the like that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays an image such as a liquid crystal display device). In addition, in the pachinko game machine, which is the premise, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the performance control board P41, but a voice control board having an IC for voice control or the like is separately provided to control the speaker P83.

Transmission and reception of data between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 is performed by unidirectional data transmission/reception so as to be in one direction from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the performance control board P41 is maintained, the data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the performance control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40, nor can the data transmission be requested. Therefore, the effect control board P41 cannot refer to the information unless the information generated by the main control board P40 is transmitted. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P assumed here, data transmission and reception are performed bidirectionally between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as in the case between the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41, it may be configured to transmit and receive data in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progression]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko game machine P as the underlying technology configured as described above will be described for each game state. The "game state" is roughly divided into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which game balls are easier to obtain than in the normal game state. The ``normal game state'' is a state in which the aim is to acquire the right to transition to the ``special game state''. Among the normal game states, there are multiple game states that differ in the degree of advantage for the player in acquiring the right to transition to the special game state. . The ``special game state'' corresponds to the so-called ``big win game'' and ``small win game'', and means a state in which the main control board P40 drives the special electric accessory driving means P70 to open the big winning hole P751, thereby facilitating acquisition of game balls.

[Normal game state (low probability / low base state)]
First, the game method and the progress of the game in the normal game state will be explained. It should be noted that the normal game state described here refers to the "normal game state (low probability/low base state)" (see FIG. 6) excluding the specific game state, and generally describes the game state in which the player starts the game. The game method, the progress of the game, and the terms "low (high) probability" and "low (high) base" in the specific game state will be described later.

As a game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), first, the player operates the handle P204 to shoot a game ball toward the game area P501 provided on the game board P5. In the premise pachinko game machine P, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player operates the operation amount of the handle P204 so that the game ball is shot toward the left area P501L (left hitting area) of the game area.

When a player shoots a game ball into the left area P501L of the game area, the shot game ball flows down the game area P501, and is displaced in the flowing direction by a game nail P510 (also called an "obstacle nail" or a "nail") or a windmill P511 (not shown). Alternatively, the ball enters (wins) the general winning hole P731L of the left general winning device, or enters the out hole P790 as a played game ball without entering any of the winning holes. When the ball enters the first start winning hole P711 or the general winning hole P731, the main control board P40 outputs information (control command) to the payout control board P43 to release the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole, and the player wins new game balls by paying out the prize balls.

Here, a special figure 1 start opening switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning opening P711, and the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40 when the ball enters the first start winning opening P711 as a game state (game result) that can occur when the player shoots the game ball to the left side area P501L in the game area.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information from the special figure 1 starter switch P712, it pays out a predetermined number of game balls, and also acquires a random value for performing a lottery related to the control of the first special symbol. There are several methods for acquiring random numbers, such as acquiring random numbers generated by a random number generating circuit on an electric circuit based on the detection of game balls (hard latch), executing processing to acquire random numbers from the random number generating circuit when the control device of the main control board P40 confirms information on the detection of game balls in software processing, or acquiring random numbers updated by software (soft latch). is also possible. It should be noted that when the ball enters the general winning slot, the random number related to the special symbol is not acquired, and only the prize ball is paid out.

A lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win/fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "fluctuation pattern lottery". The "win/fail lottery" is a process of determining whether the lottery result using the acquired random number is a "big hit" or a "loss" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result may include a "minor win"). The ``hit symbol lottery'' (sometimes simply referred to as ``symbol lottery'') is a process of determining the display pattern of the stop display symbol indicating the result of the lottery on the special symbol display device P51 (P52) of the main control display device P50. It is possible to make the execution mode of the game different. "Variation pattern lottery" is a process of determining at what timing the stop display pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery is to be displayed in the special symbol display device P51 (P52), and determines the time (referred to as "variation display time" and "variation pattern") in which the special symbol display device P51 (P52) performs a variation display indicating that the special symbol lottery has been executed. It is common to use different random numbers for ``win-win lottery'', ``win pattern lottery'', and ``fluctuation pattern lottery'', respectively. In addition, the lottery related to the control of the second special symbol, which is performed based on detecting the game ball of the special figure 2 starting port switch P722, is also the same "special symbol lottery". Also, the explanation about the "special symbol lottery" will be described later.

Returning to the description of the game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots the game ball into the left area P501L of the game area, enters the game ball into the first start winning opening P711, executes the lottery related to the first special symbol (special symbol lottery), and the special symbol indicating "big win" ("small win") on the special symbol display device. is displayed, a game aiming to acquire the execution right of the special game is performed.

In the process of receiving the special symbol lottery, the variable display of the special symbols is performed according to the time determined by the variation pattern lottery, but in the premise pachinko game machine P, when there is a new start winning opening (first start winning opening P711, second start winning opening P721) during the variable display period of the special symbols, a random value corresponding to the execution right of the special symbol lottery of a predetermined number of times is temporarily stored. It has a hold function to In the premised pachinko game machine P, as a holding function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start winning hole P711, it is possible to suspend the special symbol lottery up to four times. The holding function can be set for each special pattern, and in the Pachinko game machine P of the underlying technology, apart from the holding of the first special pattern, the holding function of the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is also capable of holding the random number used for the special pattern lottery up to four times.

In this way, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots the game ball to the left area P501L of the game area and causes the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol to be executed. In the special pattern lottery, when the lottery result of the special game state such as ``big hit'' or ``minor win'' is won and acquisition of the right to shift to the special game state is displayed on the special pattern display device, the game state of the pachinko game machine P shifts to the special game state.

[Special game state]
Next, the game method and progress of the game in the special game state will be explained. The special game state includes a "big win (game)" and a "small win (game)", but both are states in which the special electric role product P755 is activated, that is, a drive signal is output from the main control board P40 to the special electric role product driving means P70, and the big winning opening P751 is in an easy-to-enter state. The big difference is that the "small hit" ends with one operation of the special electric role product. Another difference is that in the operation of the special electric role (jackpot) based on the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, it is possible to make the operation of the special electric role P755 more advantageous to the player. Specifically, the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the operating state of the accessory continuous operating device (jackpot) is allowed up to 30 seconds, while the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the small winning is limited to 1.8 seconds. There is a point to be made. In the following description of the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state, the jackpot will be described as an example.

The progress of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the base technology, is performed in chronological order, and includes an effect period called a "special game start demo" (in the case of a big win, it is called a "jackpot start demo" or a "role combination operation start demo", and in the case of a small win, it is called a "minor win start demo") for informing the player that various special games have been won; The operation period of the special electric role P755 of the time and the ``special game end demo'' (referred to as ``jack end demo'', ``role combination operation end demo'', etc. in the case of a big win, and ``small win end demo'' in the case of a small win).

Next, the game method during each special game period described above will be described. First, during the "special game start demo" period, in the pachinko machine P of the underlying technology, the large winning opening P751 is arranged in the right area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area, and even if a game ball is shot into the left area P501L, which is the same as the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the ball entering the large winning opening P751 can hardly be expected. Before the start of the trick, a right-hand hitting notification performance for prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the right-hand side area P501R (right-hand hitting area) of the game area is executed by using a performance display device P80, speakers (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370) and performance lamp P82. The player adjusts the amount of operation of the handle P204 to increase the shooting intensity of the game ball according to the right-handed informing performance, and changes the shooting position so that the game ball flows down to the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area (performs right-handed shooting).

During the "round (game)" period, in the pachinko game machine P of the underlying technology, the drive signal output from the main control board P40 to the special electric accessory drive means P70 puts the big winning hole P751 in an easy-to-enter state or a difficult-to-enter state. Perform a production such as a production that suggests A player shoots a game ball to the right area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the big winning hole P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

One 'round (game)' period ends when the opening pattern (operation mode of the special electric accessory) of the big winning hole determined based on the type of big win (small win) is completed (opening time elapses) or when a predetermined 'prescribed number' (which may be expressed as 'count', 'C', etc.) of game balls enters. Then, according to the type of special game state being executed (type of big win or small win), when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to the state of "special game end demo".

Subsequently, during the “special game end demo” period, the pachinko machine P, which is the underlying technology, performs an effect to notify the number of game balls acquired during the period of the special game state this time, and the cumulative number of acquired game balls acquired in the special game state multiple times continuously performed during the specific game period described later (acquired without transitioning to the normal game state (low probability / low base state)), and notifies the type of normal game state to be shifted after the special game state and the transition destination. An effect of notification related to the game method in the game state (such as the above-described hitting to the right notification effect) is executed. The player operates the steering wheel in preparation for a game corresponding to the type of normal game state to which the game is to be transferred from the effect being executed.

In many of the premised pachinko game machines P, except for some exceptions, when a jackpot game as a special game state is executed, the state shifts to a state called a ``specific game state'' as a normal game state, in which the player can easily acquire the right to shift to the special game state, and the specific game state and the special game state are continuously repeated, so-called ``consecutive games'' to enjoy the game.

[Specific gaming state]
Next, a description of the "specific game state" will be given. As shown in FIG. 6, there are roughly three specific game states in the specific game state. And, there are "probability state" and "base state" as elements for classifying those types, and a specific game state is constituted by a combination thereof.

(probability state)
"Probability state" is a function that changes the probability that the lottery result will be a "big hit" in the special symbol lottery. is expressed as "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state (low probability/low base state) in that the probability of winning a big hit in one special symbol lottery is high.

(base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the "proportion (expected value) of game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired", and generally, a state in which the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is easier (advantageous) than the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is called a "high base (state)" (also referred to as an "electric support (electric support) state"). Depending on the specifications of the game machine, even if the "electric chew support function" is not activated, if the recommended game ball shooting position is switched and the "proportion of game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are shot" increases, it may be expressed as a "high base state". The ``high base (state)'' is a game state advantageous to the player in that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls increases (is easily paid out) during the period until the special game state is obtained, and the player can aim to obtain the special game state while suppressing the consumption of the game balls.

The ``electric chew support function'' is a state in which the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), and is mainly composed of a combination of three functions (at least one). The three functions that make up the “electric chew support function” are “normal symbol probability change”, “normal symbol time saving”, and “open extension (of normal electric accessories)”. "Normal pattern probability variation" refers to a state with a high probability of operating the normal electric accessories in the "normal symbol lottery". "Reduced normal symbol time" refers to a state in which the time from executing a normal symbol lottery to displaying the result of the normal symbol lottery is shortened in the normal symbol display means P53 in the main control display device P50. ``Extension of the opening of the ordinary electric accessory'' refers to changing the type of wins won in the ordinary symbol lottery so as to operate the ordinary electric accessory in a manner in which the game ball easily enters the prize-winning opening related to the ordinary electric role P770.

"Normal symbol lottery" is different in that the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric role P755, whereas the normal symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the normal electric role P770, and the execution timing of the lottery is that the game ball enters the normal figure operation gate device P740. If you want to express the lottery of the normal pattern lottery, the pattern, and the variation pattern, you can say "normal pattern lottery", "normal pattern lottery", and "normal pattern fluctuation pattern lottery".

As the elements that distinguish the types of the "specific game state", "probability state" and "base state" have been explained, but as an element that constitutes the specific game state, there is also a "time saving state" ("variation time reduction state", also called "variation time reduction function" activated state). In general, the 'time-saving state' refers to a state in which the variable display time (variation pattern) per special pattern is shortened and the number of executions of the special pattern lottery per unit time increases, which is an advantageous state for the player in that he/she can receive more special pattern lotteries per unit time. "Time saving state" (fluctuation time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chew support state", and rarely constitutes a specific game state by itself.

[Specific game state 1: low probability / high base state]
Returning to the description of the "specific game state", first, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (1), (8) and (12) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. 6 include (A) winning a jackpot game in each state, and (B) elapse of a predetermined number of games (* (8) only). Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 1 goes back to the specific game state 1 via a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (2), (7), and (11) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (2), (7), and (11) include (C) winning a jackpot game of the type that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 1, and (D) elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(2) only). It should be noted that the "number of games played" refers to, for example, "the number of times a special symbol lottery is executed".

When shifting to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, both the above-described "electric chew support function" and "fluctuation time reduction function" are activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the normal pattern operation gate device P740 and the second start winning opening P721 related to the normal electric accessory are arranged in the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area, and the player can easily perform the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol by performing "right hitting" that shoots the game ball to the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area. can receive a lottery. In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, is also controlled in the above-described "time saving state" in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) is reached, the player shoots the game ball to the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area and enters (passes) the normal pattern operation gate device P740 as the first procedure. A normal pattern lottery in a specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) wins with a high probability (approximately 1/1) due to the operation of the normal pattern probability changing function, so that when one game ball enters (passes) the normal pattern operation gate device P740, the normal electric accessory P770 is operated once. When the normal electric accessory P770 operates, the pachinko game machine P on which the second starting prize winning port P721 triggering the special pattern lottery related to the second special pattern becomes easy to enter, and the player shoots the game ball toward the second starting prize winning port P721 as the following second procedure. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole P721, the detection information is input to the main control board P40, the special symbol lottery relating to the second special symbol is executed, and the lottery related to acquisition of the execution right of the special game (big win, small win) is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low-probability/high-base state) ends when the number of games (the number of special symbol lotteries) predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed in the case of execution of a jackpot, etc.) for shifting to the state (for example, the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the state shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). In the case of winning a small winning game, the specific game state is often not terminated, but depending on the specifications of the game machine, it may be designed to end by winning a small winning game (or winning a plurality of small winning games, or winning a specific type of small winning game). When the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 2: high probability / high base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (3), (7) and (9) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (A) to obtain a big hit game in each state. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 2 is transferred to the specific game state 2 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are satisfied, transitions are made as shown in (4), (8), and (10) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (4), (8), and (10) include (A) obtaining a jackpot game of the type that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 2, and (C) elapse of a predetermined number of games.

When the state shifts to the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state), the premise pachinko game machine P is different from the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) in that it is a 'high probability (state)' in which a 'probability change function' is activated. The progress of the game and the method of playing in the specific game state 2 are the same as those in the specific game state 1, but the difference is that the player can get the big win early in the special symbol lottery because the probability of winning the big win is high.

The specific game state 2 (high-probability/high-base state) ends when the number of games (number of special symbol lotteries) predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed in the case of execution of a jackpot, etc.) for shifting to the state (for example, the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses, or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the state shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 2 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. When the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to a normal game state (low probability/low base state), a specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), or a specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 3: high probability / low base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (5), (10) and (11) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. 6 include (A) winning a jackpot game in each state, and (B) elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(10) only). Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 3 is transferred to the specific game state 3 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (6), (9), and (12) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (6), (9), and (12) include (C) winning a jackpot game of the type that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 3, and (D) elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(6) only).

When it shifts to a specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state), the premised pachinko game machine P becomes a ``high probability (state)'' in which a ``probability variation function'' is activated, and unlike the specific game status 1 and 2, the ``electric chew support function'' and the ``variation time reduction function'' are not activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P assumed, the normal figure operation gate device P740 and the second start winning opening P721 related to the normal electric accessory are arranged in the right side area P501 (right hitting area) of the game area. Even if you do, the probability of winning a hit in the normal symbol lottery is low, and there is no advantage in hitting right.

Therefore, the player advances the game by ``left hitting'' in which the game ball is shot to the left side area P501L (left hitting area) of the game area, and the game method and the game progress are the same as those in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) except that the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is high because of the high probability state, and the big win game can be obtained early.

The specific game state 3 (high-probability/low-base state) ends when the number of games (the number of special symbol lotteries received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (this state may be shifted again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 3 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. When the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

In addition, the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is different from the board arrangement configuration of FIG. also has a game state in which "right-handed" is recommended.

As described above, the premised pachinko gaming machine P progresses through a plurality of game states, but does not necessarily have all the game states described above. Therefore, among game machine specifications constituted by combinations of a plurality of game states, etc., game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified below.

Regarding representative gaming machine specifications (“specs”), as an example of the types of gaming machine specifications related to the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery, “(until the next time) probability variation”, “ST (number of cut probability variation)”, “V probability variation (also called “ball probability”, “attack round system”)”, and “latent probability variation” can be adopted. The difference in gaming machine specifications due to the difference in the probability variation function is sometimes expressed as "this gaming machine is a '○○ machine (eg: ST machine)'". In addition, there is also a game machine specification called "small win V" in which the machine that does not have the probability variation function passes through the specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during the small win game, and then the accessory continuous operation device is activated (that is, the game shifts to the big win game).

[(Until the next time) fixed]
First of all, I will explain “(until the next time) probability change”. ``Variable probability until the next time'' generally indicates a game machine specification of a ``Pachinko game machine to be continued until a specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) acquires the right of the next big win game'' as the most advantageous game state among the plurality of specific game states provided in the pachinko game machine P.例文帳に追加In other words, the ``probability variable until the next time'' game machine is configured so that the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right of the next big win game is obtained, and does not end depending on the number of pattern fluctuations.

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the "Pachinko game machine that continues until the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) acquires the right to the next big hit game", it may be called "probability change until the next time" in the sense that the probability change function will continue until the next big hit. Since it is a definite change until the next time, it is expressed separately as "latent definite change".

[ST (Variable number of cuts)]
Next, "ST (Variable number of cut probability)" will be explained. “ST” is an abbreviation for “Special Time”, and generally indicates a gaming machine specification for “a pachinko gaming machine that continues until the special game state 2 (high probability/high base state) performs a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries (predetermined number of symbol variations are executed) or acquires the right to play a big hit game”.

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Further, in the same way as the above-mentioned "probability change until next time", it is possible to configure to have a state called "latent probability change (latency ST)" when the game state is controlled until the special symbol lottery of a predetermined number of times is performed in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) or the right of the big hit game is acquired.

In addition, even if it is ``ST (variable probability of cutting the number of times)'', if the game machine specification can be said to substantially guarantee a big hit until the next time in a high probability state, such as when the period in which the game state is controlled to ST is set to ``until the lottery of the special symbol lottery is performed 10000 times'', it may be expressed as ``variable probability until the next time''.

As described so far, ``variable probability until the next time'' and ``ST (variable probability of cutting the number of times)'' are different in terms of the end of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery, and distinguish the ``variable probability state'' as a gaming machine specification. On the other hand, like "V probability change ("ball probability" "attack round system") described below, whether or not the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is activated in the specific game state, that is, regarding the start of execution of the probability fluctuation function, there are cases where the gaming machine specification ("spec") is expressed by requiring a special condition.

[V probability change]
Next, a game machine specification called "V probability change" will be explained. "V probability change" is a specific game state ("V winning") is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during execution of a specific jackpot round) against the "specific area P750" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.) provided in the big winning hole P751 during the jackpot game before the game state transitions to the specific game state. It shows the game machine specifications of the pachinko game machine that controls the transition to the specific game state 1 or the specific game state 3). Regarding the “specific region” used for “V probability variation”, it may be particularly referred to as “probability variation function operating region”.

As described above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification that indicates whether or not the probability variation function is activated depends on the game result during the big hit game (depends on whether the game ball passes through the specific area P760). Expressions that indicate specifications are used.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P adopting ``variable V probability'' as the game machine specification, when the V prize is not won during the big win game, the probability variation function does not operate after the big win game, and the game is controlled to a normal game state or a specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not the game state in which the probability variation function is activated after the big win game, depending on whether or not the V prize is won, and at the same time, it is possible to change the operation mode of the electric chew support function. As an example, in a 'V probability variable (V-loop)' machine, when a V prize is won, the probability variation function and the electric chew support function are continued until the next big win is obtained, and when the V prize is not won, the probability variation function does not operate and the electric chew support function is limited until the special pattern lottery is performed 100 times.

[small hit V]
Next, a description will be given of a game machine specification (spec) called "small win V" as a game machine specification capable of providing a game state advantageous to a player in terms of winning a big win without having a probability variation function.

The ``small win V'' is a game machine specification in which, when passing through a ``specific area P760'' (sometimes referred to as ``V zone'', ``V area'', etc.) provided inside the big winning opening P751 during a small winning game executed when the result of the special symbol lottery results in a small winning, that is, the big winning game is started. In other words, it is a game machine specification that allows a big win game to be obtained without obtaining a big win result as a result of a special symbol lottery by passing through the specific area P760 during a small win.

"Small win V" is a "type 1 (pachinko)" game that activates the continuous activation device and special electric accessories as a result of the special symbol lottery, and is a specification that activates the continuous activation device when passing through the specific area P760 while the continuous activation device is not in operation (during the opening of the large winning hole P751). It is sometimes referred to as a “one type and two type mixing machine” because it has playability similar to the game machine specifications of “two types of pachinko”.

In general, a pachinko game machine that adopts "small hit V" as a game machine specification does not have a variable probability function (probability variable function), and changes the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of an electronic chew support function. That is, by forming the prize-winning opening related to the normal electric accessory P770, which is easy to win when the electric chew support function is activated, by forming the starting prize-winning opening which triggers the variation of the special pattern (for example, 1/2 wins the small prize) that is easy to win the small prize, it is possible to easily win the small prize under the condition that the electric chew support function is operating and to aim for the big prize by the V prize during the small prize game. By doing so, it is possible to increase the possibility of obtaining a big win by a small win instead of increasing the random value range of the big win like the variable probability function.

[Other game machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical ones, and since there are several other characteristic game machine specifications known, they will be briefly described below.

(limiter)
The 'limiter' is a function for limiting the operation of the probability variation function or the electric chew support function when a predetermined number of repetitions (the number of consecutive games) is reached in a specific game state in which the probability variation function or the electric chew support function is activated repeatedly, and even when the jackpot game in which the probability variation function or the electric chew support function should operate is executed. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "probability variable limiter", and the function that limits the "electric chew support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "time-saving limiter (electric support limiter)". A game machine having a limiter function is called a "limiter machine".

(Fall)
"Falling" indicates a game machine specification for executing a "falling lottery" for determining whether or not to terminate the probability variation function each time a special pattern lottery is performed during the period when the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery is operating. In a situation where the probability variation function and the electric chew support function are operating, if you win the fall lottery, the operation of the electric chew support function may end when the probability fluctuation function ends, or the probability fluctuation function may end and the electric chew support function may continue to operate.

In addition, it is possible to combine a plurality of gaming machine specifications described above. For example, when "ST" and "Fall" are combined, in the case of specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state), (1) fall lottery is won, (2) special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, (3) special game state 2 (high probability/high base state) is acquired. transition).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 governing the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, will be described. Note that the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise of the explanation of the present embodiment, will be explained assuming that the pachinko game machine adopts "ST (variable number of cuts)" as the above-mentioned game machine specifications (specs). In the description of the embodiment, the notation of "P-s ◯◯" indicating the processing step in the figure is described as "step ◯◯" in the text.

[Main control board power-on processing (main control board main loop processing)]
The main control board P40 of the premised pachinko game machine P first executes a power-on process (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. Here, details of the power-on process will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on processing is started in the main control board P40 of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, the initial setting relating to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the main control board P40, is performed (step 1002). The initial setting is to appropriately perform settings necessary for subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial setting is completed, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power failure information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006) are executed, and in response to these process contents, the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is performed.

More specifically, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) includes a flag indicating whether or not a "setting change process" capable of changing a "set value" for changing the degree of advantage of the special symbol lottery of the pachinko game machine P (in particular, the probability of operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, i.e., the probability of a big hit) is to be performed, and a flag indicating whether or not a "setting confirmation process" for confirming the "set value" is to be performed. This is a process of generating information for determining whether to turn on (whether to turn on or not). In the premise pachinko game machine P, data including data indicating the detection status of the frame opening switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is opened with respect to the outer frame and may be referred to as a door opening switch, door opening sensor, or frame opening sensor), the detection status of whether the ram clear switch P48 is being operated by the player, and the detection status of whether the setting key switch P49 is being rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power-off information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006), when the power was last turned off, the pachinko game machine P normally performed power-off, and the control data related to the game state when the power-off occurred was normally saved and stored in the memory area of the CPU of the main control board P40. turn on) processing.

The "game stop state setting process" (step 1008) is a process of setting a flag to prevent the player from actually playing after the process of the power-on process is completed and the process shifts to the main loop process to start the game. This is the process of setting a flag for shifting to the disallowed state. Details of the "game stop state setting process" are described in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, first, it is determined whether the frame is open based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko game machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1", so the processing of the following step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the pachinko game machine is not open when the power is turned on, it is determined that a part of the essential operation for executing the setting change processing is not satisfied, and the operation information of the setting key switch is calculated from the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 1004) so as to be OFF data. Although not shown, whether the result in step 1102 is YES or NO, calculation is performed so that the frame open bit in the 1-byte data is also OFF data.

In the subsequent step 1104, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that allows determination of "there is a setting change operation". In the premised pachinko game machine P, the situation in which it is determined that "there is a setting change operation" requires three states: (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on), (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON (rotation operation is being performed), and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON. As described above, among the 1-byte data, the information of the frame open switch P131 is set to OFF, and it is determined in this step whether both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, when two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1", and one of the data may be "0"). When it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, that is, when it is determined YES in step 1104, data indicating "setting change in progress" is stored as a game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is terminated (steps 1106 and 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104 , the process proceeds to step 1108 . If the set value information stored in the RAM (RAM=Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (in the case of recovery operation from an unrecoverable error state), the data corresponding to the set value "1" is set as the initial set value in the set value storage area (step 1118).

Next, at step 1108, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error is an error that requires RAM clearing and setting (change) processing of setting values when the game cannot proceed, such as checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality) or setting value abnormality. The judgment of step 1108 judges whether or not to set the game stop state based on the processing result of the power interruption information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored at the time of the previous power interruption processing. When it is determined that an error state should be established (when YES is determined at step 1108), the game stop state setting processing is terminated by setting the game stop state flag to ``unrecoverable error state'' (steps 1110 and 1118), and when it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1112.例文帳に追加

In the subsequent step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated. In the game stop state setting process, as a state when proceeding to the step,
(a) When an operation to shift to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, when the determination of "there is a setting change operation", (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on), (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON, is not satisfied.
(a) when a ram clear operation for clearing data is performed, in other words, when (2) the setting key switch P49 is on is not satisfied, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on is satisfied,
(c) When the power is turned on without performing any operations such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", "ram clear operation",
Either In these states, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is either (a) bit data indicating ON/OFF of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (ON data)", (B) bit data indicating ON/OFF of operation detection state of the ram clear switch P48 is "1 (ON data)", or (C) all 1-byte data is OFF data (for example, all bits are "0").

In step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated, and if there has been a ram clear operation (when YES is determined in step 1112), the pachinko game machine clears the game stop state flag in order to shift to a game ready state after clearing the ram (step 1114). On the other hand, the current 1-byte data is set as it is except when the RAM clear operation is performed. At this time, when the operation to shift the game stop state flag to the "setting confirmation state" is performed (NO in step 1112), the bit data indicating the operation state of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop state flag is stored as data indicating "setting confirmation" (step 1118). In addition, when there is neither a RAM clear operation nor a shift operation to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 1004) is originally data indicating no game stop as a game stop state flag, and is set as game stop information.

When a value indicating some kind of stopped state is stored for the game stopped state flag set in the "game stopped state setting process" (step 1008), the value indicating the stopped state is referred to in the interrupt processing (step 2000) which is the subject of the game progress control executed after the transition to the main loop (steps 1028 to 1036) which is the game permitted state in the power-on processing (step 1000), and the game cannot progress as described as "basic game progress". However, these controls will be described later in the description of interrupt processing.

Returning to the description of the power-on process in FIG. 7, the following process will be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) ends, it is determined whether or not there is a RAM clear operation (step 1010). The ram clear operation is that the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. This processing is executed both when the setting key switch P49 is off and when it is on. If it is determined in step 1010 that the ram clear operation has been performed, a predetermined portion of the memory area of the ram of the main control board P40 is initialized.

In the subsequent processing from step 1014 to step 1020, a processing of setting an effect control command (effect command) for recognizing the state of the game machine from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 when the power is turned on is performed. More specifically, in step 1014, processing is performed to clear from the storage area the effect control commands that have not been transmitted when the power was cut off last time (when the power was cut off). Then, in step 1016, information about the current game state of the main control board P40 restored after power-on is generated as a performance control command, and when it is determined that the game is not in a stopped state in step 1018, in step 1020, the generated performance control command indicating the restored game state is set in an area for storing the transmission data of the performance control command.

When the processing related to the setting of the performance control command at the time of power-on is completed, the necessary data (drive signal) is output from the output port to the special electric role product driving means P70 and the ordinary electric role product driving means P71 in order to return the big winning opening P751 (special electric role product P755) and the ordinary electric role product P770 to the state before the power failure. (Step 1022)

Then, when the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on processing is completed, the CPU of the main control board P40 is processed to set the generation interval of the interrupt processing time (step 1024). In the premise pachinko game machine P, the interval at which interrupt processing ( FIG. 9 , step 2000 ) to be described later is executed is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process ends, the game shifts to a cyclic process called a main loop in which the player is ready to play, and the cyclic process in the main loop is repeated until a power failure occurs.

(Main loop)
In the main loop processing of the main control board, as shown in FIG. 7, the interrupt processing is first prohibited at step 1026, and the execution of the interrupt processing is restricted until the main loop processing is completed (until the interrupt is permitted at step 1036).

When the interrupt is prohibited, in the subsequent step 1028, an area called a watchdog timer, which stores timing information for monitoring the occurrence of runaway of the CPU of the main control board P40 (such as a situation where the process loops and does not proceed), is cleared (initialized).

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether a power interruption has occurred (for example, whether a power interruption signal sent based on a voltage drop from the power supply board P44 is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40), and if a power interruption has occurred, a power interruption process (step 1032) is executed to store the current gaming state, store power interruption information and checksum information, and stop processing as the CPU of the main control board P40. If power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to the next step.

In step 1034, a process of updating the random number used for the special symbol lottery and the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is performed. Some of these random values are updated in interrupt processing, which will be described later, and this is processing to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant due to random numbers being updated only in interrupt processing. If there are processes that are executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is possible to prevent the random number update period from becoming constant by adopting a technique such as updating the random number value according to those processes, so it is not essential to provide the random number update process in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final processing in the main loop, and performs processing for enabling interrupts. Immediately after, the process returns to step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop, to disable interrupts. However, when the process of step 1036 for enabling interrupts is performed, if the CPU of the main control board P40 receives an input indicating an interrupt execution cycle (a state in which 4 ms have passed since the previous interrupt process occurred), the interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (also called "timer interrupt processing") performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIG. In the premised pachinko game machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and sub-module programs provided changeable according to the game machine specifications (specs) are generally read out in a fixed order and controlled. The processing for these submodules is briefly described below.

(clear watchdog timer)
At the beginning of interrupt processing, watchdog timer clear processing is provided. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation processing)
The input port confirmation process is a process of confirming the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40 to generate information that enables identification of whether or not there is input information as information necessary for determination in subsequent processes. (Step 2004)

The information input to the input port includes input signals indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, input signals indicating the operation status (touch or not) of the handle P204, input signals related to artificial operation such as input signals indicating the game result by detecting the game ball such as the special figure 1 start opening switch P712 and the big winning opening switch P752, sensors provided for fraud monitoring such as the magnetic sensor P73, the door opening sensor P131, and the vibration detection sensor P72. There is an input signal that indicates the detection status.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that becomes the same data (same bit) in all readings is stored in the RAM of the main control board P40 as the input data (called "level data") for this interrupt. Of the data read three times, the data determined in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4 ms before) is adopted as the level data for the portion that is not the same data in all the readings.

Then, when the input data (level data) for the current interrupt is determined, a comparison operation is performed with the input data for the previous interrupt to generate "rising data" (data specifying the bit where the input data changed from off to on), and the data specifying the switch whose input was switched to on by the current interrupt is stored.

(random number update process)
The random number update process is a process of updating a so-called soft random number, which is a random number updated by software among various random numbers such as the success/failure random number, symbol random number, variation pattern random number related to the special symbol lottery, and the general symbol lottery random number, general symbol random number, and general symbol variation pattern random number of the normal symbol lottery (step 2006). In the premise pachinko game machine P, the random numbers used for the special pattern lottery and the normal pattern lottery are designed to have a random number generation circuit that updates the random numbers at the update cycle on the circuit and those that are updated at the software cycle, and by combining them, the randomness of various random numbers when acquiring the random numbers is configured to be maintained.

In the random number update process, as described above, the process of updating the soft random numbers is performed.
(a) A random number is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1), and if the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range is exceeded, the lower limit (or upper limit) is set;
(b) Subtracting (or adding) an arbitrary prime number to a random number, and adding (or subtracting) the value of the random number range +1 (or random number range -1) when the random number range is exceeded,
(c) Repeatedly incrementing (or decrementing) a random number set as an initial value, and when updating for one cycle is completed, a separately updated "initial value random number" is set as a new initial value and the same update is repeated (also called an initial value update type random number),
Various update methods can be exemplified. It should be noted that the update method is not limited to the one exemplified in this embodiment, and any method may be adopted as long as the method can maintain the randomness of random numbers.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting changing" or "setting checking". (Step 2008)

In the setting control process, it is first determined whether or not the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated in the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on process is ON data, and if it is not the ON data, that is, if the setting key is not ON-operated when the pachinko game machine is powered on, this process is exited.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated in the game stop flag is ON data, the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the current interrupt processing (generated by the input port confirmation processing described above) is referred to determine whether or not to end the "setting change" and "setting confirmation". , sets a production control command for returning (or starting) the production to the production control board.

In addition, in the power-on process (see FIG. 7), if the game stop flag is "changing settings", during the period until the setting key switch P49 is turned off, the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 (the switch operated to change the setting value) that plays the role of the "setting change switch" at this interrupt timing is confirmed. When the game stop flag is 'changed in setting', in this interruption, when start-up data relating to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated, the 'set value' is changed to the next set value in a predetermined change order. For example, in a pachinko game machine P having set value data such that the setting is sequentially switched from 1 to 6, every time there is start-up data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the setting value is increased by "1" in this setting control process (if the set value before the operation is 6, it is changed to 1 as the next value).

In the premised pachinko game machine P, by providing processing in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 9), the operation of the setting key switch and the setting change switch can be monitored at the interrupt processing cycle, and display data can be output to the display device by the LED output processing described later. During the power-on processing (see FIG. 7), in which the interrupt processing cannot be set separately, it is possible to omit setting a program for periodic monitoring. Note that, during the power-on process, it may be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and setting confirmation, control the display device, and update the set values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
The game stop monitoring process is a process of reading the data of the game stop flag generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) executed by the CPU of the main control board when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, and confirming whether or not the game is stopped. (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the data of the read game stop flag, for example, if the data of the game stop flag is not 0 but any bit is "1", it is determined that the game is in a stopped state (a state where the game needs to be stopped). ) are omitted.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, states such as ``change in settings'', ``confirmation of settings'', and ``unrecoverable error occurring'' can be exemplified as states in which the game must be stopped, that is, states in which the player cannot play the game.

(Timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating the timer data used for time management regarding the progress of the game (step 2014).

Examples of timer data update processing include management of the variable display time set when the variable display of special symbols is started, update processing of timer data triggered by the progress of the game such as the operation time of the special electric role product P755 during the jackpot game (opening time of the big winning opening P751), time measurement processing for error determination such as detecting ball clogging, and switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in the main control display device P50 such as the special symbol display devices P51 and P52. and a process for timing a period for outputting information from the external information output terminal P77 or the like to an external device (such as a hall computer).

The timer data to be updated by the timer update process is divided into the types of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer" in the storage area (ram storage area) of the main control board P40, and stored in continuous storage areas.

In the timer update process, processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" are performed on the storage area storing the types of the individual timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. In the timer update process, the timer data stored in the storage area is decremented (-1). If the stored timer data is already "0", it is processed so that it remains "0" even after the processing (set to "0" when the value becomes negative, do not decrement when "0", etc.).

In the premise pachinko game machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms. Therefore, in the case of 1-byte timer data, it is possible to control only the managed object that ends in a maximum of 255 updates (about 1 second). However, if there is no game information to be managed only within 1 second (if there is little game information), it is possible to configure only 2-byte timer data and not to have 1-byte timer update processing. Also, if it is necessary to manage a time value that cannot be managed with a 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage a longer time than a "3-byte timer".

(Effective period setting process)
The effective period setting process is a process of setting the effective period in the period for controlling the winning opening to the easy-to-enter mode and the valid extension period for the winning opening that can be changed to the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode (mainly applicable to the winning opening related to the large winning opening P751 and the ordinary electric accessory P770), and setting the invalid period for the other period (when the winning opening is in the difficult-to-enter mode and other than the valid extension period). (Step 2016)

In the premised pachinko game machine, the process of setting the winning of the large winning opening P751 as the large winning device and the second starting winning opening P721, which is the second starting winning device P720 provided with the normal electric accessory P770, as the valid period.

In addition, the valid extension period is a control period of a certain time that is appropriately set according to the structure of the electric role product in order to treat the game ball entered at the timing immediately before the large winning aperture P751 or the normal electric role product P770 shifts to the hard-to-enter state as a valid winning prize, even after the control period for executing the opening control for the electric role products such as the large winning aperture P750 (special electric role product P755) and the ordinary electric role product P770.

In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, when the specific area P760 (V area) is provided, a valid extension period for passing the game ball with respect to the specific area P760 may be set. In such a case, the valid period of the specific area is also set in this process.

(Prize monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process is a process of determining whether or not there is a valid winning based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (large winning holes P751, starting holes P711, P721, general winning holes P731) in the pachinko game machine, and generating information that triggers the processing of the special symbol lottery right (occurrence of reservation) for the winning ball or the ball entering the starting hole. (Step 2018)

The contents of the processing are as follows: (a) detect the presence or absence of a winning prize, (b) if the winning port has a valid period, determine whether or not the prize was won during the valid period, (c) set a performance control command indicating the winning information for each winning port to be sent to the performance control board P41, and (d) various winning ports. A counter value (called a "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of action opportunities based on each winning is updated (in other words, the counter value for storing the number of unprocessed actions among the actions based on the detection of various winning openings is updated).

In addition, in the winning monitoring process, not only the occurrence of winnings in various winning holes, but also the out ball detection switch P792 provided for counting out balls, the operation hole switch P742 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and depending on the game machine specifications, it is determined that the game ball enters and passes through a specific area P760 (V area). In this process, presence or absence of detection of game balls necessary for transmitting information indicating that the operation port switch P742 or the specific area P760 has been passed is performed.

(Working opening monitoring process)
In the operation port monitoring process, when the start-up data of the normal pattern operation port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), the processing related to the occurrence of the hold related to the normal symbol lottery is performed. (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal pattern operation port switch P742 is detected, the number of reservations related to the normal pattern lottery is confirmed, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, a random number can be stored as a new reservation. and store it as pending.

(Normal symbol control process)
In the normal symbol control process, normal symbol lottery, normal symbol fluctuation display, and normal electric accessory P770 are processed (step 2022). These processes shift to different submodule processes depending on whether the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol called normal symbol status or the control state of the normal electric accessory is performed, and control is performed according to the state. As the status of the normal pattern, there are ``0: normal pattern standby'', ``1: normal pattern fluctuating'', ``2: normal pattern stopped and displayed'', ``3: normal electric accessory in operation'', and ``4: normal electric accessory finished demonstration'', and processing is performed according to each state.

<<Normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: normal symbol standby".

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal symbol has not occurred, so the normal symbol control process is exited. On the other hand, when the reserved number related to the normal pattern lottery is not '0', it means that the normal pattern variation right is generated, it is judged that the normal symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and the processing related to the normal symbol variation start is executed.

When it is determined to start the variation of the normal pattern, the reservation number information is decremented by 1 from the area for storing the reservation number information related to the normal pattern lottery, then the general pattern success or failure random number, the general pattern random number, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number are called respectively, and the general pattern success or failure lottery, the general pattern lottery, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern lottery are performed respectively, the lottery result is stored in the storage area of the main control board, the random number information used this time is cleared, and the storage area of the reservation number information is shifted so that it is processed in the order of storage. At the same time, the normal symbol status is updated to "1: during normal symbol fluctuation". Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used according to the operating conditions of the above-mentioned "base state" (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time shortening function).

《Processing during normal symbol fluctuation》
The normal design changing process is a sub-module process called from the normal design control process when the normal design status is "1: normal design changing".

In the normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol variation display is executed in the normal symbol display device P53 until the variation display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring control process elapses, that is, until a timer (normal symbol variation display timer) for managing the variation display of the normal symbol becomes 0 in the timer update process.

More specifically, when the normal symbol variation display timer is not 0, the normal symbol display switching counter whose maximum value is ``5'' is updated each time this processing is executed, and at the timing when the normal symbol display switching counter reaches ``5'', information on the next light emission pattern is stored in a storage area for storing data for designating the light emission pattern of the LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device P53. It should be noted that the normal map display switching counter is reset to the initial value of "0" at the timing when it reaches the maximum value of "5". That is, the variable display of the normal design is such that the lighting pattern of the normal design display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interrupts (4ms×5=20ms). In addition, the switching interval can be appropriately set, for example, if the maximum value of the normal pattern display switching counter is set to 25, the display pattern of the normal pattern display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms).

When the variable display time of the normal symbol is finished, that is, when the normal symbol variable display timer is set to "0", in this processing, the data for designating the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the memory area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 so that the display pattern of the stop display symbol of the normal symbol determined by the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device P53 of the main control display device P50. Then, the normal symbol fixed time (time for displaying the stop display symbol) is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: during normal symbol stop display".

<<Normal symbol stop display process>>
The normal symbol stop display process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: normal symbol stop display".

In the normal pattern stop display process, it is confirmed whether the value of a normal pattern stop display timer set with a fixed pattern time at the end of the normal pattern fluctuation process is ``0'', and at the timing when it becomes ``0'', a setting process for moving to the next game operation is performed.

When the normal pattern stop display timer becomes ``0'', if the result of the current normal pattern lottery is ``hit'', the operation pattern of the normal electric role product P770 is called according to the operation state of the winning pattern and the base state (extended function of the normal electric role object), the operation pattern is set, the winning counter related to the normal electric role product P770 is cleared, etc., and the normal pattern status is updated to ``3: normal electric role product in operation''.

On the other hand, when the normal pattern stop display timer becomes ``0'' and the result of this normal pattern lottery is ``loss'', the normal pattern status is updated to ``0: waiting for normal pattern''.

《Processing during operation of ordinary electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operating process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: normal electric auditors product in operation".

In the ordinary electric accessory operating process, based on the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 set in the ordinary symbol stop display processing, the opening operation (change to easy entry mode) and closing operation (change to difficult entry mode) of the ordinary electric accessory are controlled, and the establishment of the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory is monitored. The end of the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is (a) when the specified number of normal electric accessories winning set as the end condition of the normal electric accessory occurs, and (b) when the operation of the preset operation pattern ends (when the opening operation period of the ordinary electric accessory ends).

When the condition for terminating the operation of the ordinary electric accessory is established, the timer area for storing the effective extension period of the ordinary electric accessory is set to the time for counting the extension period of a fixed time previously determined corresponding to the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770. Then, the time value related to the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration is set to the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the normal symbol status is set to "4: Normal electric accessory end demonstration in progress".

《Demonstration process for ending operation of ordinary electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operation end demonstration process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: normal electric auditors product end demonstration".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration process, the system waits until the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation process becomes ``0'', and when the ordinary electric accessory operation end demo timer becomes ``0'', the normal pattern status is updated to ``0: normal pattern waiting''.

(Starting door monitoring process)
In the starting opening monitoring process, when the start-up data of the special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 and the special drawing 2 starting opening switch P722 are generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), the processing related to the occurrence of the hold related to the special symbol lottery is performed. (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special figure 1 starter switch P712 and the special figure 2 starter switch P722 are detected, the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery is checked, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, a random number can be stored as a new reservation. , and store it as pending.

In the premise pachinko game machine P, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special symbol 1) and a second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special symbol 2), are provided as special symbols. Therefore, for each start port provided on the game board P5, the data of the corresponding special symbol hold number and start switch are called, and the hold number addition and random number acquisition processing are performed for each start port.

In addition, when the starting opening to be processed is composed of the starting opening (electric chew) related to the normal electric accessory, it is determined whether or not the starting opening winning related to the normal electric accessory P770 has been performed within the valid period in the valid period setting process described above.

When storing the success/failure random number, the pattern random number, and the variation pattern random number, the obtained random number information is used in advance by using the advance notice determination value table, and when the variation based on the various reserved random numbers is executed, the information that allows the variation content to be presumed is generated and notified to the performance control board P41 as a performance control command (referred to as "pre-determination command", "pre-determination information", and "pre-reading determination command"). A pre-determination command is generated for each of the win/fail random number, the pattern random number, and the variation pattern random number, and when transmitted to the performance control board P41, the performance control board P41 uses it for a lottery related to the execution of "prefetching performance" to be described later.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) is any one of special symbol variation start management (special symbol variation start monitoring control process), special symbol variation process, and special symbol stop symbol display process, depending on state information for managing special symbols called special symbol status (also called "special symbol status") and state information for managing the operating state of the special electric role product called special electric role product status (also called "special electric role game status"). to run.

The special symbol status includes the following states: ``0: waiting for special symbol fluctuation'', ``1: special symbol fluctuating'', ``2: losing symbol is stopped'', ``3: big win symbol is stopped and displayed'', ``4: small winning symbol is stopped and displayed'', and the special electric role product status includes ``0: waiting for winning'', ``1: special electric role is in operation'', ``2: big winning mouth is closed'', ``3: jackpot ending demonstration'', and `` It has states of 4: Small win special electric is in operation", "5: Small win closed", and "6: Small win end demonstration in progress". It should be noted that depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, there may be cases where no small win is provided, and in that case, there is no status data related to the small win. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

The special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority order) when there are a plurality of special symbols. As a predetermined order, the second special symbol is preferentially controlled, and in the situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held, the game machine specification that is processed so that the second special symbol is started first (the second special symbol is preferentially changed) is called "second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control". do.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When the control of the second special symbol is started, the information of the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the special electric accessary product status is referred to first. When the special electric role product status is data indicating that the big winning game or the small winning game is in progress (when the special electric role product status is other than ``0: waiting for winning''), if the first special pattern is fluctuating and the special pattern status of the first special pattern is other than ``0: waiting for special pattern variation'', processing is completed without performing processing.

When the situation is such that the control of the second special symbol is executed, a process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area storing the timer, and if the result of the decrement is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the update of the timer ends, based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2, a sub-module process, which will be described later, is called and executed. It should be noted that, although the timer subtraction process is also performed during the interrupt process, the timer updated by the timer subtraction process does not include the timer data updated by the special symbol control process, and the timer data for the control related to the special symbol is managed in the special symbol control process.

<<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The special symbol variation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "0: waiting for special symbol variation".

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol being processed as a target is reserved, and if there is no reservation, the process is finished, and if there is a reservation, the subsequent process is executed. The subsequent process is a special symbol lottery that is performed when the fluctuation is started. In the special symbol lottery, first, the data stored as set values are read and inspected to determine whether or not the set value information is appropriate. When the set value is appropriate, a lottery table is appropriately selected by referring to the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game state, etc., the winning lottery, the pattern lottery, and the variation pattern lottery are executed, and after the lottery result is stored in the storage area, the special pattern status is updated to '1: special pattern fluctuating'. Contents determined by the special pattern lottery are transmitted to a performance control board P41 as performance control commands (win/fail command, pattern command, variation pattern command), and are used as information for determination processing (lottery processing) of the content of the variable performance executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols. The details of the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Processing during special symbol fluctuation》
The special symbol fluctuating process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "1: special symbol fluctuating".

In the special symbol variation process, the timer that manages the variation display time of the special symbol is monitored until the variation time of the special symbol determined by the variation pattern lottery elapses, and until the remaining variation time reaches "0", the special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24") is updated every 25 interrupts. Performs pattern switching processing.

When the remaining variable display time of the special symbols becomes "0", a process of setting information for outputting an external signal indicating that the variable display of the special symbols has been executed once to an external device (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko game machine P, a process of setting a symbol fixing time for fixed display of the stop display symbols of the special symbols, and a special symbol display device P52 (P51) displaying the stop display symbols determined as a result of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery. ) to set the lighting pattern data to be displayed. Then, the special symbol status is set to any one of ``2: Losing symbols are stopped and displayed'', ``3: Big win symbols are stopped and displayed'', and ``4: Small win symbols are stopped and displayed'' according to the result of the lottery.

<<Process during special symbol missing symbol stop display>>
The special symbol lost symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "2: during lost symbol stop display".

In the special symbol missing symbol stop display process, it is confirmed whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixed time set in the special symbol fluctuation process has become "0", and when it becomes "0", the special symbol status of the special symbol to be processed is updated to "0: special symbol variation waiting", the remaining number of games in the game state (probability variation function, electric chew support function, variation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery is updated, and the termination condition establishment is confirmed, and the game state transition. When the condition is established, control (eg, flag off) relating to the transition of the game state is performed.

<<Processing during special symbol jackpot symbol stop display>>
The special symbol big-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "3: big-hit symbol stop display".

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display process, it is confirmed whether the value of a timer for managing the symbol fixing time set in the special symbol variation process has reached ``0'', and when it becomes ``0'', the special symbol status of the special symbol to be processed is updated to ``0: waiting for special symbol variation'', and the special electric accessory status is updated to ``2: large winning opening closed''. Furthermore, in order to end the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery, the processing of clearing the remaining number of times information storage area and the operation flag storage area is executed. Then, in order to execute the big win game corresponding to the big win pattern, the information of various storage areas used as data during the previous big win game is initialized from the big win pattern information, and the control content data of the special electric accessory P755 during the big win game is set.

In the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process, further, a process of transmitting an effect control command for executing a big win game effect (big hit start demo effect) to the effect control board P41 is executed. In addition, in accordance with these processes, lighting pattern data for lighting a right-handed indicator P56 (an LED that lights up when a right-handed game in which a game ball is shot toward the right side of the game area is recommended), which is one of the constituent elements of the main control display device P50, is also set.

<<Process during special symbol small hit symbol stop display>>
The special symbol small-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "4: during small-hit design stop display".

In the special symbol small-hit symbol stop display processing, similar to the special symbol big-hit design stop display processing, data setting related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 and setting processing related to lighting of the right-handed indicator lamp P56 are performed when the symbol fixing time ends. In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the present underlying technology, unlike when the big winning symbols are stopped, unlike when the big winning symbols are stopped, the pachinko game machine P of the underlying technology does not have processing for ending the game state (high probability state or high base state) related to the special symbol lottery, and controls the game state based on the determination result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state, similar to the processing during special symbol lost symbol stop display processing. In addition, in accordance with these processes, the special electric role product status is updated to "5: Closed for small prizes". Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, as a modified example, it is possible to design a specification having a process for forcibly ending the game state (high-probability state or high-base state) when executing a small-win game in the same way as when the big-win pattern is stopped.

When any one of the sub-module processes described above is selectively executed, the process of the first special symbol is performed following the process of the second special symbol. Regarding the processing of the first special symbol, only information to be referred to is different from the processing of the second special symbol (for example, regarding whether or not it is possible to start fluctuation, it is determined by referring to the special symbol status of the second special symbol instead of the special symbol status of the first special symbol), and the explanation is omitted because almost the same processing is repeated.

《Entrance order digestion control, parallel control》
In addition, in the explanation of the special symbol control process described above, the explanation was based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority digestion control", but in the case of adopting a game machine specification different from that of the pachinko game machine that is the premise, it is possible to proceed with the special symbol control process in a different process. A brief description of typical examples will be given below.

"Entering ball order digestion control" is a game machine specification in which the reservation information corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order of occurrence. This specification is often adopted when it is expected that both the reserved balls corresponding to the first special pattern and the reserved balls corresponding to the second special pattern are expected to be generated in a certain game state without performing the variable display of the other pattern while one pattern is changing.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol priority digestion control" and "entering order digestion", and is a type of gaming machine specification that can simultaneously perform variable display of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time. Since two symbols can be digested at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time. When the special electric accessory P755 is activated with the stop display of one special symbol (when a big win or a small win is executed), the other symbol is forcibly lost and the symbol is stopped or the subtraction of the remaining time of the variable display is temporarily suspended. As an example, when one special pattern becomes a big hit, the other special pattern is forcibly missed and stopped and displayed, and when one special pattern becomes a big hit or a small hit, a specification of temporarily interrupting the variable display of the other special pattern can be adopted.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
The special electric role product control process is a process of executing a submodule process related to the operation of the special electric role product P755 according to the data content (value) of the special electric role product status (sometimes referred to as the special electric role product status), and managing the operation of the special electric role product (step 2028). In other words, when executing the big winning game or the small winning game, each state in the big winning game or the small winning game state is controlled, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening P751 is controlled.

As described above, the special electric role product status has the following states: ``0: waiting for winning'', ``1: special electric role product in operation'', ``2: big winning opening closed'', ``3: big winning end demonstration in progress'', ``4: small winning special electric prize in operation'', ``5: small winning closing in progress'', and ``6: small winning ending demonstration in progress''.

Among these special electric role product statuses, when the status is ``0: waiting for winning'', the special electric role product control processing is terminated without processing because the player has not yet acquired the right to execute the big winning game or the small winning game by playing the game.

Then, when the special electric role product status is other than "0: Waiting for winning", one of the processes described later is executed according to the status.

<<Process during operation of special electric accessories>>
Special electric auditors product in operation process is a process that is executed when the special electric auditors product status is "1: special electric auditors product in operation" or "4: small hit special electric in operation". This process is a process in a state in which a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in a special game (a state in which the opening of the big winning opening P751 can be controlled).

In the special electric accessary product in operation process, first, a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the round game (unit game) is satisfied is performed. As the condition for ending the round game, (a) the specified number (also called "count") corresponding to the activated special electric accessory has been won, or (b) the opening time (opening pattern) set as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed has ended. If these conditions are not satisfied, the special electric accessary product control process in this interrupt process is terminated without performing subsequent processes. In addition, among the operation patterns (opening patterns) of the special electric accessory P755, there is a pattern that opens and closes the large winning opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, while the timer used for the determination of (b) becomes "0" multiple times during one round game, after confirming whether there is next operation data during one round game, Condition (c) When it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in this unit game, the above (a) is performed. shall be deemed to have been satisfied.

On the other hand, when either of the above (a) and (b) of the end conditions of the round game is satisfied, as the subsequent processing, the closing time of the big winning opening is stored in the timer for managing the closing time of the special electric role product, and the special electric role product status is incremented to be "2: Closed big winning hole". Then, the command data for notifying that the round game has ended is set as the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while the big winning mouth is closed》
The large winning opening closing process is a process that is executed when the special electric role product status is "2: large winning opening closed" or "5: small prize closed". In the special game, this process is the process of being controlled during the "between rounds" between the so-called round games, the state of being controlled during the "big hit start demo (period)" or the "small hit start demo (period)" which is the state before the start of the first round at the start of the big win game or the small win game, or the state of being controlled during the waiting period after the round game of the final round ends until the process during the winning end demonstration, which will be described later, is executed. This is the processing related to when

In the big winning opening closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening closing time set in the special electric role product operation process has passed, and if the timer for closing time management is not "0", that is, if the closing time has not passed, the special electric role product control process in this interruption is ended.

When the closing time of the big winning opening has passed, it is determined whether or not the operation (round game) of the special electric accessory P755 whose operation is finished first is the final round game in the current winning game (big winning game, small winning game) or not, and different processing is executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of the round game other than the final round (or at the start of winning demonstration). Whether or not it is the final round game is determined based on whether or not the accumulated data of the number of times of operation of the special electric role product P755 operated during the current winning game exceeds the maximum number of times of operation of the special electric role product P755 in the winning game of this time.

When it is determined that the final round game is finished in the processing during the closing of the big prize winning opening, the execution pattern (mainly winning end demonstration time data) of the winning end demonstration is read out and set according to the kind of winning (the kind of the special pattern for starting the big winning or the small winning). Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to set ``3: big win end demonstration in progress'' or ``small win end demonstration in progress'', and a performance command for executing the winning end demonstration performance is set in the performance control board P41. Furthermore, in order to set the effective extension period of the big winning opening P751, the time value data determined as the effective extending period is stored in the timer that manages the effective extending period of the big winning opening P751, and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end of a game other than the final round (or at the time of a winning start demonstration) in the processing during the closing of the big winning opening, information that enables identification of what round the next round game is (N round start demo command * N is an integer) and information for instructing the recommended firing position during the winning game (right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game board in the premise pachinko game machine) as the effect control command for the effect control board P41 (right hitting command) ).

Then, the special electric role product status is decremented to update to ``1: special electric role product in operation'' or ``4: small prize special electric prize in operation'', and the data in the data area for counting the winning number of game balls to the big winning hole P751 during the round game is initialized. Then, the operation pattern data of the big winning opening P751 (special electric role P755) in the round game is set as the time value related to the first opening of the big winning opening P751 during the round game (or the closing immediately after the start of the round game), and the data in the storage area regarding the total number of times of operation of the special electric role P755 is incremented.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for giving a game ball as a prize ball to the player in response to winning of a game ball in a prize winning hole arranged on the game board P5. The processing contents are configured to execute the following three sub-module processes. (Step 2030)

<<Payment data reception monitoring process>>
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of confirming the presence or absence of a control command related to execution of prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (storing) the transmitted command. The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). A register 1 is called a status register, and stores information for determining whether or not there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether or not the transmitted information is normally transmitted. The other register is called a data register, and stores information on control contents related to payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is abnormal, data in the data register is stored in a storage area as payout control information.

<<Payment command request processing>>
In the payout command requesting process, winning counter data for each winning opening storing data on the number of winnings of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is confirmed to confirm whether or not there is an unpaid winning. In the confirmation process, each winning hole is confirmed in a predetermined order, and when it is determined that the data of the winning counter for one winning hole is not "0", a control command for executing the payout of game balls is transmitted to the payout control board P43 according to the number of winning balls of the corresponding winning hole. By this process, even if the winning counter data for a plurality of winning holes is not "0", the number of payout control commands transmitted to the payout control board P43 in one interrupt is limited to one.

<<Payout command control process>>
In the payout command control process, it is checked whether or not the payout control board P43 normally receives the information on the number of payouts, and it is determined that the command is normally received in this process or that there is some kind of abnormality resulting in a communication error. In the payout command control process, the transmission of the next payout control command in the payout command request process is temporarily interrupted by the flag data set to ON/OFF respectively in the payout command request process and the payout command control process until the reception status of the command is determined (it is determined whether the reception is completed normally or there is an error).

(abnormality detection processing)
The anomaly detection process is a process for confirming whether or not an anomaly has occurred based on information from a sensor provided for fraud detection in the premise pachinko game machine P. FIG. (Step 2032)

More specifically, it is a process for determining whether or not there is an abnormality based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004) regarding inputs from sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, the magnetic sensor P73, the radio wave detection sensor P74, and the frame open sensor P131. In addition to the various sensors, the sensor also detects unplugged harnesses for electrical connection, short circuits on wiring, and the like.

When there is abnormal data for any of the determination information, a command for notifying the error information is set as a performance control command for the performance control board P41 after the corresponding error flag is turned on and stored.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
The sensor detection determination process is a process for determining a period during which sensor or switch detection was continuously performed based on the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and establishing a flag for processing. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection determination process, when the level data of the target sensor and switch detection data information is ON, the data for counting the continuous ON input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, it is determined whether or not the execution start conditions of various processes are satisfied, and when the conditions are satisfied, the process corresponding to the monitored switch is executed. When the monitored switch is no longer ON data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, when it is continuously detected that the winning hole detection switch provided in the winning hole is in the ON state, it is determined that the ball clogging has occurred, and control is performed to an error state, and processing of setting command information for making error notification to the effect control board P41 as a effect control command and generation and output request of signal data for notifying the occurrence of the error to the external device (hall computer etc.) are performed.

Switches to be detected in this process include a touch sensor switch provided on the steering wheel P204, a switch for fraud detection, and the like. Sensors that require ON data input for a certain period of time in order to determine whether it is due to human operation or electrical noise are also targeted.

(Game state display processing)
The game state display process is a process of generating lighting data for displaying information about the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although the name is display processing, output of display contents to the main control display device P50 is performed not by this processing but by LED output processing described later. (Step 2036)

In the premised pachinko game machine P, lighting data (lighting pattern) such as an error indicator lamp (status indicator lamp P55) indicating an error state, a special symbol holding indicator lamp (special figure 1 holding indicator lamp P61, special figure 2 holding indicator lamp P62) that displays the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery, and a normal symbol holding indicator lamp P63 that displays the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery are generated and stored as data output by the LED output process.

In the game state display process, when blinking display is required for the LED indicator lights whose lighting is controlled, the display switching counter for the corresponding LED is updated and the lighting pattern is switched by comparing the counter value with the threshold value. For example, in the premise pachinko gaming machine P, although the number of pending special symbol lotteries can be held up to four, the special symbol holding indicator lamp is configured with two LED indicator lights (special figure 1 holding indicator light P61, special figure 2 holding indicator light P62 has two LEDs each), so when there are 3 or more holding numbers, at least 1 LED is a specification that blinks instead of continuously lit display.

(output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process of setting to transmit a signal related to a game operation to an electric accessory, which is an operation device on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, or to the payout control board P43. (Step 2038)

More specifically, when the operation pattern of the normal electric role product or the special electric role product is set during the normal symbol control process or the special electric role product control process, the signal data for opening (or closing) each electric role product is output to the normal electric role product drive means P71 and the special electric role product drive means P72 (solenoid in the premised pachinko game machine) by the process during the output port output process.

Also, to the payout control board P43, a control signal (shooting permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the shooting of the game ball based on the player's handle operation is generated by the output port output process and output. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the state of communication with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence of an error that requires the game to be stopped.

(Production control command transmission process)
The effect control command transmission process is a process of outputting a effect control command to the effect control board P41, and in the premised pachinko game machine P, the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board P41 only in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040). Regarding the setting of the effect control command to be transmitted, it is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted effect control command during other processing.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, a storage area called a ring buffer, which cyclically refers to a storage destination, is used as an area for storing unsent effect control commands. In a storage area called a ring buffer, the performance control command is written and read using information for calculating the address of the storage area where the command is written and the address of the storage area where the command is read in the next process called "write pointer" and "read pointer".

Further, in the pachinko game machine P, the structure of the effect control command is composed of two data, MODE data indicating the type of the command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

Returning to the description of the specific processing contents of the effect control command transmission processing, the description will be given. In the performance control command transmission process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the information of the write pointer and the read pointer match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no performance control command to be transmitted, and the processing ends. On the other hand, when the data of the write pointer and the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to the next step.

When it is determined that there is a performance control command to be transmitted, the MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, temporarily stored in a register in the CPU of the main control board P40, respectively, and after clearing the performance control command in the ring buffer of the read destination, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value used in the next processing.

As effect control commands, MODE data and EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are transmitted P41 to the effect control board in order. First, the MODE data is set to the effect command output port which is an output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the strobe signal for causing the effect control board P41 to perform the reading operation is output. The main control board P40 will subsequently output the EVENT data, but in order to ensure a sufficient period for the effect control board P41 to receive the MODE data, after performing processing with a waiting time of 26 μs, the EVENT data is set to the output port and the strobe signal is output in the same manner as when the MODE data is transmitted. When the strobe signal is confirmed, the performance control board P41 generates a performance control command reception interrupt and receives the performance control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(external information output processing)
The external information output process is a process of outputting, as a signal, information relating to the game status and information relating to security such as error occurrence from the external information output terminal 77 to the external equipment (data counter or hall computer) connected to the pachinko game machine P (step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is based on the data set to the output port of the main control board P40, and there are those that transmit a pulse signal that is an ON potential for a certain period when a signal output trigger occurs, and those that continue to output an ON potential until the conditions for ending signal output are met.

In the external information output process, first, a signal regarding the game state is generated. In order to make it possible to identify the type of the specific game state as a signal relating to the game state, the pachinko game machine P, which is a premise, refers to information corresponding to the operation state (probability state) of the probability variation function, the operation state (base state) of the electric chew support function, and information indicating that a special game is being played (big win or small win), and updates external output data so that corresponding data is transmitted when each game state is controlled. In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the output signal may be generated based on information indicating whether or not there is a variable time reduction function, or information indicating that a particular type of jackpot is being won.

As an output signal output in the external information output process, not only a signal relating to the game state but also information based on the occurrence of a predetermined game result is output. For example, a signal that is transmitted each time a variable display of a special symbol is executed and is stopped (also referred to as a "fixed symbol signal"), a starter switch (special figure 1 starter switch P712, special figure 2 starter switch 722) or a large winning opening switch P752. is set and is sent to an external device. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and 1 signal is transmitted as a pulse signal with a continuous ON potential of 128 ms. However, when a plurality of game results occur in succession, after outputting one pulse signal, after outputting OFF potential for a certain period, the pulse signal is output again.

In the external signal output process, the data in the storage area storing the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the abnormality detection process (step 2032) is calculated and compared with the comparison data for confirming whether or not an error requiring security notification has occurred. If it is determined that the security signal needs to be output, the output data to be set in the output port is updated so that the bit corresponding to the security signal in the external output data is turned on.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the game progress and game status. (Step 2044)

The LEDs that make up the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol suspension indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), the second special symbol suspension indicator light P62 (2 LEDs), the normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), the normal symbol suspension indicator light P63 (2 LEDs), the round indicator light P54, and the status indicator light P55. , a right-handed indicator light (8 LEDs in total), totaling 32 LED indicators.

In addition, the state indicator light P55 collectively represents indicator lights related to a plurality of game states. Specifically, it refers to indicator lights such as special figure probability variation indicator lights that indicate whether the probability variation function is activated or not, normal pattern probability variation indicator lights that indicate whether the probability variation function is activated (whether or not the electric chew support function is activated), and error indicator lights that indicate error status.

In the LED output process, the lighting data of the display section of the main control display device P50 is set to the output port by 1 byte for each interrupt processing to light the main control display device P50. Based on the value of the digit counter that is updated for each interrupt processing, the LEDs of the main control display device P50 to be lighted by this interruption are selected, the lighting pattern data corresponding to the game situation is selected, and the lighting pattern data is set as display data to control the lighting of each LED.

That is, in the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the main control display device P50 is controlled by a dynamic lighting method in which lighting data is sequentially output to 32 LEDs using at least four interrupt processes.

In addition, in the LED output process, in addition to the LED display to be visually recognized by the player as the main control display device P50, the lighting control of the LED display that is controlled only when the game stop flag is in the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, or the unrecoverable error state is also performed.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, when a flag indicating some kind of game stop state is stored in the game stop flag, the setting of the lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. As a modification, when the game stop flag is set, light emission display may be performed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state, for example, during the period during which the setting is being changed, all the LEDs constituting the main control display device P50 may be lit.

(Outside area control processing)
The out-of-area control processing consists of a test signal output processing for outputting a signal used for testing the pachinko gaming machine (processing for outputting a signal used for testing the pachinko gaming machine) and a processing for controlling the display of the performance display device (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" is that it is a process executed by a program in a storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area stipulated by the pachinko game machine rules.

In the test signal output process, a process of setting information relating to the game result and game state to the output port from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko game machine P to an external test device is performed. In the performance display process, the game state is confirmed, the number of out balls and the ratio (base) of the number of out balls and the number of prize balls are calculated, updated as display data, and displayed on the performance display device P59.

[Special design lottery]
Next, the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. FIG. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of "win/fail lottery", "hit symbol lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery".

(Lottery drawing)
The "win/fail lottery" is a lottery for determining whether or not the special electric accessory P755 will be activated based on the result of the executed special symbol lottery, and more simply, it is a lottery for determining which of "big hit", "minor win", and "lose" as the result of the special symbol lottery. Depending on the specifications of the pachinko game machine P, there are some machines that do not have a "minor win" as a lottery result of the winning lottery. In addition, when it is configured to have the first special pattern and the second special pattern, it may be configured to have a ``small win'' as a lottery result of a win/fail lottery for one special pattern and not have a ``small win'' as a lottery result of the other win/fail lottery.

The lottery is performed by using a random number called a ``hit/fail random number'' out of random numbers obtained and stored when a game ball enters a starting hole (first starting winning hole P711, second starting winning hole P721, etc.). In the premised pachinko game machine P, the range of possible random numbers (random number range) of the success/fail random number is 65536 from "0" to "65535", which is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When the success or failure lottery is performed, the result of the success or failure lottery is determined by comparing the value of the random number with a lottery table (called a success or failure lottery table) used for the success or failure lottery according to the game state or the set value.

FIG. 10 illustrates several lottery tables used for lottery. FIG. 10(A) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a low probability state, and FIG. 10(B) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a high probability state. (C) and (D) of FIG. 10 respectively show win/fail lottery tables in a low probability state and a high probability state when the set value is "6".

For example, in a situation where a win/fail lottery is executed using the win/fail lottery table of FIG. 10(A), the win/fail random number in this special symbol lottery is a random number corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the random number value is assumed to be "1500", and the flow of the win/fail lottery will be explained.

First, it is determined whether or not it belongs to the jackpot random number range ("0" to "327") as the result of the first lottery. Specifically, the process of subtracting the random number value range "328" of the big hit to be determined from the random number value "1500" of the hit/fail random number of this time is performed. At this time, the result of the subtraction is "1172", which is not a negative value. Therefore, it is determined that the hit/fail random number of this time does not belong to the big hit random number range.

As a subsequent process, the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous big hit determination is compared with the random number range ("328" to "65370") as the determination area for the success or failure lottery result of the success or failure lottery table. More specifically, the random value range "65043" to be determined is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the hit/fail random number. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, information corresponding to the result of "lost" is stored as the result of the lottery.

If a special symbol lottery is performed in a high-probability state for this win/loss random number ``1500'', the lottery will be made in the win/fail lottery table shown in FIG. At this time, the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the hit/fail random number and the random value range becomes a negative value, so the result of the hit/fail lottery is determined to be a "big win".

The premised pachinko game machine P adopts a method of determining a lottery result by sequentially comparing the data acquired as random numbers and the random number range according to the lottery result of the lottery table, and the same lottery method is adopted for the winning symbol lottery and the fluctuation pattern lottery to be described later. The lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly judging whether or not the obtained random number matches the random number that will be a big hit may be adopted, or a different lottery method may be adopted for each lottery content.

(Hit design lottery)
The "hit symbol lottery" is a process of determining the stop display symbol of the special symbol as the lottery result necessary for switching the lottery table (see FIGS. 12 to 14) of the fluctuation pattern lottery described later, and the control contents related to the subsequent operation of the special electric role product P755, in response to the success or failure lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

FIG. 11 shows a big-hit symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11A) used in the winning symbol lottery when the lottery result is "big hit", a small-hit symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery when the lottery result is "small hit" (see FIG. 11B), and a losing symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery when the lottery result is "lost" (FIG. 11C). ) are shown.

The ``symbol random number'' used for the winning symbol lottery has a random value range of ``1000'' (from ``0'' to ``999''), and when expressed by 2-byte data, the upper 1 byte is expressed by ``0'' to ``3'' and the lower 1 byte is expressed by ``0'' to ``255''.

To explain the winning symbol lottery with a specific example, for example, when the winning lottery result is a big hit, in the case of the winning symbol lottery for the first special symbol when the symbol random number is "400" (the upper byte is "1" and the lower byte is "144"), "5R (5 rounds) probability variation 2" corresponding to the lower bytes "128" to "191" is used as the lottery result. In the variable display of the special symbols, the "5R probability variable 2" symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device P52) as a stop display symbol.

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, the jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is executed. At this time, when "5R probability change 2" is displayed as a stop display pattern on the first special pattern display device and when "5R probability change 1" is displayed as a stop display pattern, the contents of each round game of 5 rounds of the jackpot game (opening pattern, opening time, etc. of the big winning opening P751) may be changed based on the stop display pattern, and it is also possible to control so that the control contents in the specific game state that shifts after the jackpot game are different. is. These jackpot games and control assignments in the specific game state are appropriately determined in order to realize game performance according to the specifications of each pachinko game machine P, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the premise pachinko game machine P, it is described that the symbols collected for each type of jackpot are displayed by the lottery shown in FIG. 11A. A winning symbol lottery may be executed in stages.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11(A), the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, is configured so that the types of winning patterns that can be determined are different when a big winning pattern is determined by a winning pattern lottery in the special pattern lottery for each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. More specifically, in the premised pachinko game machine P, the possibility of determining ``10R probability variable 5'' or ``10R probability variable 8'' in the jackpot of the second special pattern is increasing, and it can be said that the specification is such that it is easier to win a jackpot with a large number of rounds than the winning pattern lottery of the first special pattern, and to easily win a jackpot that shifts to a high probability/high base state as a specific game state.

FIG. 11B illustrates a small winning symbol lottery table. The small winning symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the winning lottery of the special symbol lottery is "small winning", and the lottery method is the same as that of the big winning symbol lottery table.

In the small winning symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11(B), most of the symbols are "small winning 1" symbols, and "small winning 2" can be determined in some cases when "small winning" is obtained as a result of lottery of the second special symbol. It should be noted that one type of small winning pattern may be used, or three or more types of patterns may be determined.

As an example of the purpose of providing a plurality of small winning patterns as in the premised pachinko gaming machine P, the number of game balls that can be obtained can be changed simply by changing the opening mode of the large winning opening P751 during the small winning game, or, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine P that adopts the small winning V as a gaming machine specification (spec), a small winning game that is easy to win V in a specific area and a small winning game that makes it difficult to win V. For this purpose, the purpose is to execute a mode such as differentiating the small winning patterns or making the small winning patterns different in order to separate the types of the specific games to be shifted after the execution of the big winning game after winning the V prize.

FIG. 11(C) illustrates a lost symbol lottery table. The lost symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the lottery of the special symbol lottery is ``losing'', and the method of lottery is the same as that of the big win symbol lottery table described above with respect to the first special symbol, but has a different method with respect to the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 11(C) shows only the winning symbol lottery table for the first special symbol, and in the premised pachinko game machine P, lottery processing is performed only when the winning symbol lottery table is the first special symbol, and either "losing 1" or "losing 2" is determined as the stop display symbol as the stop display symbol.

The ``losing 2'' pattern is a winning pattern with a probability of about 6.4% when the 1st special pattern is lost, and when the ``losing 2'' is won, the fluctuation pattern lottery is constructed so as to easily determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) by referring to a special lottery table (not shown) that tends to be a reach. For this reason, "losing 2" may be referred to as "reaching loosing pattern" or the like.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is a premise, does not have a winning pattern lottery table for the second special pattern, is designed to determine a winning pattern of 1 even in the case of any pattern random number, omits the comparison processing itself between the random number and the table, and is configured to store the winning pattern of 1.例文帳に追加It should be noted that it is also possible to use a lottery table that always wins one symbol so that a winning symbol is won.

(fluctuation pattern lottery)
The "fluctuation pattern lottery" is a process of randomly determining the fluctuation display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed. In the premised pachinko game machine P, a process for determining the fluctuation display time of the special pattern in the special pattern lottery as the performance time necessary for notifying the performance of whether or not it is a big win and what the type of the big win is in the performance display device P80 is performed by using a fluctuation pattern table to be described later.

FIG. 12 mainly shows a normal game state (low probability/low base medium) and a low base state (non-electric chew support state), that is, a "low base medium fluctuation pattern lottery table" in which it is recommended to shoot game balls to the left area P501L of the game board in the premise pachinko game machine P.

``ID'' shown in FIG. 12 represents information stored as a result of performing variation pattern lottery, and ``variation pattern'' indicates a representative example of a variation performance mode displayed on a performance display device P80 when the same ID is won. "Variation time" is the variable display time value of the special symbol in the target variation pattern lottery result (variation pattern ID), and represents the time from when the special symbol is variably displayed to when it is stopped.

``Hold 1 fluctuation'' to ``Hold 4 fluctuation'' in FIG. 12 show the number of reservations in the situation where the execution conditions of the special symbol lottery are satisfied, and when the lottery result is "loss" and the number of reserved balls of the target special symbol (here, the first special symbol) is N, the fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of "Hold N fluctuation". That is, the variation pattern lottery for the first special symbols in the low base state is configured to vary the variation pattern table to be used depending on the number of reservations. In addition, when a game ball enters the starting winning hole in the state without suspension, it is temporarily stored as suspension for processing, so a variation pattern lottery is executed using the variation pattern table of "Hold 1 variation".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of reservations, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of reservations. Although not shown, when "lost 2 (ready-to-lose pattern)" is determined as a result of the pattern lottery, even in the fluctuation pattern lottery of the first special pattern, the fluctuation pattern lottery is performed using one fluctuation pattern table (fluctuation pattern table for lose 2) that does not depend on the number of reservations.

``10R probability variation'', ``5R probability variation'', ``10R normal'', and ``5R normal'' in FIG. In FIG. 12, since the second special pattern is not the main part of the game in the low base state, the big win variation pattern table is expressed so as to be determined in a manner independent of the big win pattern, but the big win of the second special pattern may also have a plurality of patterns according to the type of the big win.

Here, a specific example of the variation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. As a specific example, a lottery for the first special symbol, in a situation where the fluctuation pattern random number is ``30000'' and the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation is 3 (situation where the number of reserved balls becomes 2 after the start of fluctuation), and the result of the lottery result and the winning pattern lottery are ``lose 1'' will be explained.

First, since the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table of "maintain 3 fluctuations" is used. The lottery process compares (subtracts) the variation pattern random number and the random number range corresponding to the variation pattern ID of each lottery result in the same way as the lottery process in the winning lottery described above, and determines whether the random number belongs to the same range. By carrying out this process, at the timing of the normal fluctuation B of ID 2, the result of repeating the comparison calculation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random number range becomes a negative value, the same ID is determined as the fluctuation pattern lottery, and after the fluctuation display for 7 seconds is performed as the fluctuation display of the special pattern, the lost pattern 1 is displayed on the first special pattern display device P51.

Next, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be explained using FIG. The configuration of the variation pattern table in the high base state is the configuration opposite to the variation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. 12, and it is configured to have a variation pattern table at the time of losing depending on the number of reservations with respect to the second special symbol and a table according to the jackpot pattern at the time of the big win. In FIGS. 12 and 13, many variation patterns are configured to be commonly determined, but this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and it is also possible to configure the variation patterns determined in the low base state and the high base state to have only a small number of overlapping patterns, or not to overlap at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, as a lottery result of the second special symbol "H3 fluctuation" and "H4 fluctuation" at the time of loss, a 2-second fluctuation (fluctuation pattern ID "12"), which is the shortest fluctuation time of the premise pachinko game machine P, is configured to be determined.

Furthermore, as a characteristic point of the variation pattern in the high base state, the 10-second variation of the variation pattern ID "4" is always determined for the lottery of the first special symbol. The reason why the first special symbol is configured with a variation of 10 seconds is that the player's profit is large in the case of a big hit in the big hit symbol lottery table shown in FIG. . Further, even when there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage between the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, based on adopting the second special symbol preferential digestion control, it is possible to avoid the first special symbol from being variably displayed, to easily hold the suspension established in the normal game state (low base state) until the advantageous specific game state (high base state) ends, and to reduce the amount of game balls used to generate the suspension of the second special symbol in the high base state. There is also the purpose of avoiding the need for a large number of game balls to cause the holding of the first special symbol in the base state.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table for a limited period, representing a special variation pattern table that is referred to during a specific period. In FIG. 14, as an example of a special variation pattern table provided in the pachinko game machine P as a premise, special variation pattern tables for three periods are comprehensively described.

More specifically, in FIG. 14, there is a "holding table" (ID "51", "71") that is referred to during the period from the first to the fourth fluctuation after the big hit (a period called "holding consecutive" (retaining inside consecutive house) in which the four holdings that exist at the time of the big hit result in a big hit), and a high frequency reach table (ID "52", which is referred to in the nth to mth fluctuations after the big win and tends to select the reach fluctuation of 55 seconds). '53', '54' and '72'), and a 'result variation table' (ID '55' and '73' are targets) which are referred to in the last variation display in the high base state and are mainly used to execute the 'result performance' described later.

Such a special variation pattern table that is referenced for a limited period of time is called a "special variation pattern table" or a "limited frequency (pattern table)".

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referred to during a predetermined period after the jackpot game (activation of the special electric accessory, in other words, activation of the accessory continuous operating device). Whether or not these reference periods are referenced can be changed depending on the type of big win (big win pattern), and it is also possible to configure the reference period to be different in a specific period after the operation of the special electric accessory based on the small win game. What kind of special variation pattern table to refer to in what situation can be appropriately set for each pachinko game machine, and the details are not limited to those illustrated, and will be described in a separate description if necessary.

Next, the control of the effect control board P41 that performs control related to the effect operation in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, will be described. The operation control of the effect control board P41 is less restricted in the model test of the game machine, and has a higher degree of design freedom than the control of the main control board P40.

[Power-on processing of production control board to main loop processing]
In the premise pachinko game machine P, power-on processing (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 when the power of the game machine is turned on. Here, details of power-on processing of the effect control board P41 will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started in the effect control board P41 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the initial setting process related to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the effect control board P41, is performed (step 4002). The initial setting process is to appropriately perform settings necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and details thereof will be omitted, but regarding the effect that was executed in the state where the power was cut off last time, there is a time lag between the completion of the power-on process of the main control board P40 (Fig. 7) and the power-on process of the effect control board (Fig. 15). In the initial processing at the time of return, the effect information etc. are often initialized so that the effect that was being executed before the power failure is not executed (referred to as "reset control board", "sub-reset").

(Main loop of production control board)
In the premise pachinko game machine P, the main loop process is performed after the initial setting process. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the period (frame) for drawing the effect image in the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is set to about 33 ms (30 FPS) so that the drawing is performed 30 times per second.

In the main loop processing of the effect control board P41, clear processing of the watchdog timer for detecting runaway of the CPU is first performed (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process of updating the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various effect control random numbers used when an opportunity to execute the effect lottery occurs are updated.

Next, input port monitoring processing is executed (step 4008). The premised pachinko game machine P is designed to monitor the input port even during the interrupt processing of the performance control board P41, which will be described later. However, the monitoring processing of the input port in the main loop processing is performed at a cycle of 16ms. As a modified example, sensors to be monitored for performance may be checked in the input port monitoring process in the main loop process.

Similar to the input port confirmation process of the main control board, the content of the input port monitoring process is to generate and store level data and to store rising (falling) data from the input data of various sensors.

Subsequently, the effect control board P41 performs effect device control processing (step 4010), and executes control related to effect operations other than the effect display device P80 (image display). The production devices controlled in this process include a lamp P82 (“board lamp (P550)” and “frame lamp (P350)”), a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), and a production movable accessory P560.

Since the output of effect operation commands to various effect devices in the effect device control process (step 4010) needs to be executed (started) in synchronization with effect images displayed by the effect display device P80 (image display device), the effects of the effect display device P80 are switched when a signal transmitted at regular intervals from the image control board P42 controlling the effect display device P80 to the effect control board P41 or a signal for forced synchronization is received (received in the aforementioned input port monitoring process). Synchronization with timing is achieved, and performance operation commands are output to various performance devices.

In addition, regarding the operation control of the effect movable accessory P560 among the effect devices, it is necessary to control the driving means of the effect movable accessory P560 in a shorter period. Therefore, regarding the operation pattern of the effect movable accessory P560 to be executed by the effect operation command set in this process, the sensor is monitored and the operation is switched even during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) of the effect control board P41, which will be described later.

Next, the effect control processing (step 4012) executed in the main loop processing of the effect control board P41 will be described. The effect control process is a process of drawing lots or selecting the effect contents to be executed by various effect devices based on the flag established based on the result of analyzing the effect control command received from the main control board P40 in the effect control command analysis process described later, the information of the received effect control command itself (lottery result ID of the special symbol lottery etc.), the flag established during other processing such as the input port monitoring process (step 4008) and the interrupt process (FIG. 16).

The effect control process selects the effect determination process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the corresponding sub-module process for effect determination. As an example of the content of the production determined here, the process of determining the variable production corresponding to the variation of the special symbol once based on the command related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery (the success or failure command, the pattern command, the variation pattern command) (the content of the notice and the reach, the process of determining the decorative pattern to be stopped, etc.) and the prefetch production (also referred to as "pre-judgment production") for the newly generated hold based on the hold number information and pre-judgment information sent when the hold occurs Pre-reading to determine whether to execute. Lottery processing and special game effect content determination processing for determining the effect content during a special game based on information transmitted as a effect control command when executing a special game (big win or small win).

In addition, the effect control processing is not only processing for the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, but also determination processing of error display contents when an error is detected by the effect control board P41 (including determination processing of error display contents based on error information transmitted from the main control board), adjustment of the volume output from the speaker P83 based on the input operation of the effect operation means P81 such as the effect button P381 and the cross key P383 by the player, and change the light emission brightness of the lamp P82. It also executes determination of performance contents such as light quantity adjustment, customization of performance contents and performance content determination tendency.

In addition, regarding the determination processing of various performance contents performed in the submodule processing called in the performance control processing, since specifications unique to each gaming machine are often used, the explanation is omitted, and when the processing having characteristics is executed in the pachinko gaming machine P that is the subject of the invention, the details will be explained in the explanation of the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine P that is the subject of the invention.

Returning to the description of the main loop processing of the effect control board, the effect control command analysis processing (step 4014) will be described as the last processing of the main loop processing.

Based on the information stored as the performance control command transmitted from the main control board P40, the performance control command analysis processing stores information corresponding to the performance control command to be used for determining the content of performance in the aforementioned performance control processing, and sets a flag. In this process, it is necessary to determine the processing contents according to the command transmitted from the main control board P40, the processing contents are determined from the contents of MODE data and EVENT data which are the performance control commands, and the processing corresponding to the performance control commands is executed.

Since there is a possibility that one command (MODE data and EVENT data) is transmitted for each interrupt processing (every 4 ms) of the main control board P40, the pachinko game machine P repeats the analysis of the effect control command as long as it can be processed until the cycle (16 ms) of the main loop processing of the effect control board P41 elapses (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 will be described. Interrupt processing in the effect control board P41, unlike the interrupt processing of the main control board, has a plurality of interrupt processing that is started at different execution timing (see Figure 16 (A) and (B)). A priority is set for these multiple interrupt processes, and when an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, the interrupt process is controlled to be executed even during execution of the interrupt process. In this description, the production control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16(A)) and the production control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)) will be described as representatives.

(Production control timer interrupt processing)
Effect control timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16(A)) is interrupt processing executed at a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the effect control board P41.

In the port input/output processing (step 5002), from the input port of the effect control board P41, a sensor provided for detecting the position of the effect movable accessory P560 and other sensors (input sensor of the effect operation means P81) are input, level data and rising data are generated and stored, and from the output port, a drive signal is output to the drive means (solenoid, stepping motor, etc.) of the effect movable accessory P560 according to the operation pattern set in the effect device control process. Also, when data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) for counting the number of times of output is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer for measuring the switching timing of the effect operation. When the updating process for each timer is finished, a comparison operation with a comparison value is performed to judge whether or not a switching condition for the performance operation has occurred, and in the performance control processing (step 4012), processing for storing information and flags necessary for determining the content of performance in a storage area is performed.

The sensor monitoring process (step 5006) judges whether or not the sensor detection information related to the switching of the performance operation is generated, such as whether or not the performance operation switching condition of the performance movable accessory P560 is established, based on the detection data of the sensor generated in the port input/output processing.

The production button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process for determining whether or not the production switching condition is established based on the inputs of the production button P381, the lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the production operation means P81. In the effect button monitoring process, whether or not the effect operation means P81 is operated and how it is operated are determined based on the level data indicating the input state of each input device generated in the port input/output process (step 5002) and the starting data (data indicating that the level data has changed from OFF last time to ON this time).

For example, when rising data is generated as input information for the performance operating means P81, information such as a flag for executing the corresponding performance is stored assuming that the player has operated the performance operating means P81. If an input is determined based only on the rise data, there is a possibility that electrical noise will cause an erroneous detection and the effect action will be switched. Therefore, it may be determined that the player has operated the effect operation means P81 (which may be expressed as a "single push (single pull) operation" or "one hit operation") when level data (on data) is continuously input a plurality of times after the start data is generated.

In addition, when level data of ON input is continuously detected 500 times, that is, when it is determined that the effect operation means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined as a ``long press (long draw)'' operation and is handled as a special operation. In determining the presence or absence of the "long press (extension)" operation and continuation, the falling data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous ON to the current OFF) may be electrically detected as noise, but in this case as well, after detection of the falling data, it is possible to determine the input end of the "long press (extension)" operation based on the detection of the input of the level data (OFF data) multiple times, as in the case of the above-described measures to prevent erroneous detection.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, by executing the "long press" operation on the effect button P381, it is possible to repeatedly perform the process of presuming that there has been a "single press (single pull)" input operation of the effect operation means P81 once at a constant cycle (for example, every 0.3 seconds). Repeatedly executing the process is referred to as an "auto repeated hit" operation. Note that the "automatic repeated hitting" operation is not limited to the exemplified operation contents, and it is also possible to adopt a method of considering that the "automatic repeated hitting" operation has been executed based on the input of the production button P381 by operating a plurality of effect operation means P81 at the same time or by turning on/off a dip switch provided as a switch different from the effect button P381.

Note that the input to the effect operation means P81 has a period treated as a valid operation (“operation valid period”) and a period treated as an invalid operation (“operation invalid period”) depending on the execution status of the effect.

The multitasking process (step 5010) is a process of varying the processing contents to be executed during the effect control timer interrupt process that occurred this time according to the value of a task counter (updated between values '0' and '15') which is updated each time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed. The task counter is configured to circulate at a cycle of 16 ms, and the processing for each counter value is executed substantially in synchronization with one cycle of the main loop processing. As an example of processing in each task, it is determined whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed based on a signal (input information is generated by port input/output processing) transmitted from the image control board P42, and a process of monitoring the operation status of the image control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) is a process of transmitting an image control command (sometimes referred to as an "inter-sub command") to the CPU of the image control board P42 in order to cause the CPU of the image control board P42 to execute image display according to the content of the effect determined in the effect control process P41. Although the image control board P42 and the performance control board P41 may be configured by the same board, they are referred to as the image control board P42 for the sake of convenience in this specification.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the effect control board P41 is configured so that the image control command is composed of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command designating the pattern of the display content, and is transmitted to the image control board P42.

In the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, the image control command is transmitted by the effect control timer interrupt process, but regarding the transmission and reception of the command between the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42, it is also possible to provide a separate interrupt process and perform transmission and reception.

(Production control command reception interrupt)
Effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16 (B)) is an interrupt process that occurs when a strobe signal is output in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) in the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40 and the strobe signal is received by the effect control board P41.

When the performance control command reception interrupt is started, the performance control board P41 reads the performance control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, and updates and stores the temporary buffer data (steps 5502 and 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data ends, it is determined whether or not the reception of one effect control command (a combination of MODE data and EVENT data) has been completed (step 5506). It should be noted that the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40 has specific bits of "1" and "0" in the 1-byte data.

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, processing is performed to store the content of the effect control command received this time in the normal lower 1-byte storage area. At this time, if the part of the specific bits in the lower 1-byte storage area of the current temporary buffer data before updating indicates that it is MODE data, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1-byte storage area and stored, and then the EVENT data received this time is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

And in the judgment of the completion of reception of the effect control command in step 5506, it is judged whether or not the specific bit of the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is data indicating EVENT data, and if it is judged to be EVENT data, it proceeds to the next processing as the reception of the effect control command of 1 is completed (step 5506 YES). Until receiving the strobe signal based on, it exits the effect control command reception interrupt, performs other processing and waits.

In step 5506, when it judges that reception of the production|presentation control command was completed, it judges whether the sent production|presentation control command was normal (step 5508). This process is determined, for example, based on whether or not matching data exists in the list data of the effect control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. When it is determined that the command is normal, the command is stored in a storage area for storing the performance control command received so as to be analyzed by performance control command analysis processing during performance control timer interrupt processing, and temporary buffer data is discarded in the case of abnormal data.

[Example of basic image display effects]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic effects in the pachinko game machine P as a premise will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing pattern variation display (during display of decoration symbols stopped) during normal game (during low probability/low base), and FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game performance during operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base).

(Example of effect display in normal game state)
《Decorative pattern》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (decorative symbols are stopped) during a normal game (during low probability/low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in such a manner that the player can clearly see them. These three patterns are called ``decorative patterns (P801)'' (also called ``design''), and are dramatic display objects displayed corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and are variably displayed according to the variable display of the special patterns. Although only numbers are shown in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decoration image such as a character image. Also, in the case where each number is displayed with a decoration image, the display mode of the decoration image and each number may be changed according to the game state. Such a configuration makes it easier for the player to determine the current game state.

The decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed as one effect for one variable display of the special pattern (one special pattern lottery), except when a special effect is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed, the decorative pattern is variably displayed at high speed (transparent display or non-display depending on the case), and a performance called ``advance notice'' by an animation or a performance effect image is performed to enhance the expectation of winning the right of the big win game.

The decorative pattern P801 shown in FIG. 17 is scroll-displayed in the vertical direction (from the top to the bottom) when the variable display is started, and then the stop display patterns determined by the effect control board P41 are stop-displayed for each pattern row in the order of the left pattern (P801a), the right pattern (P801c), and the middle pattern (P801b). In general, when the three decorative patterns P801 are stop-displayed in the same manner (striped pattern), a big hit is reported in a dramatic manner. In addition, a state in which one symbol is variably displayed while other symbols are displayed, for example, a state in which the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed (temporarily stopped display) with the same symbol before the middle symbol P801b, which is the last symbol to stop (also called a "final stop symbol"), is called a "reach" (a "reach state" or a "reach mode").

The variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a scroll display mode in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the mode of the variable display is not limited to the vertical direction.

Also, the decorative symbol P801 may be stopped and displayed a plurality of times during one time of variable display of the special symbol. At this time, when the stop display is performed a plurality of times, the stop display showing the result of the special lottery is the stop display displayed at the same timing as the stop display pattern of the special pattern is stop-displayed on the special pattern display device, and the stop display at other timing is called "temporary stop (display)". In addition, the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display at the same time may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern P801 is not completely fixed, but is temporarily stopped to such an extent that it cannot be recognized as being fixed, moves in vertical or horizontal directions, or swings around one rotation axis in order to distinguish it from the final stop display (permanent stop) of the pattern. Such a state may be expressed as "shaking fluctuation" in addition to temporary stop.

After the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display may be repeated again, and generally, the re-variation from the temporarily stopped state of patterns other than the big-win patterns is called ``pseudo-variation (pseudo-continuous)'' performance, and the re-variation in which the big-win patterns stopped and displayed after the big-win patterns are stopped is called ``promotion (variation)'' performance. In addition, when the promotion performance is executed, it may be configured not to change to a jackpot pattern that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot pattern, or to not change to a losing pattern.

In addition, when the decorative pattern P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a kind of special decorative pattern which is not displayed during normal variable display and is displayed only when part of the performance is executed, which is called "special design (P804)" (special pattern). Each pattern of the special design has a meaning, for example, it suggests that a specific jackpot will be executed, that the above-mentioned pseudo-fluctuation effect will be performed, or that a specific ready-to-win effect (an advance notice effect displayed when the ready-to-win mode is reached) will be executed. When a special pattern is used, the special pattern may be temporarily stopped as the last decorative pattern (middle pattern P801b) to be temporarily stopped, or the special pattern may be temporarily stopped as one decorative pattern substituting all of the left pattern P801a, the middle pattern P801b and the right pattern P801c.

《Simple layout (mini layout)》
Three numbers displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P801 are displayed on the upper right of the screen. This design is also called "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design", and is displayed as a display that shows the lottery result of the special design in accordance with the variable display of the special design, similar to the above-mentioned "decorative design".

A simple design P802 (mini design) is different from a 'decorative pattern', and even when a special performance is performed in which the decorative pattern P801 is not stopped and displayed, the stop display is always performed once for one special pattern lottery in accordance with the special pattern display devices P51 and P52 showing the result of the special lottery.

Further, the variable display of the simple design P802 may be configured to form the same ready-to-win mode when the above-described decorative pattern P801 becomes the ready-to-win mode, or to achieve the minimum purpose of notifying the result of the special symbol lottery, a simple variable display method may be employed in which constant display switching is performed until the variable display of the special design is stopped and displayed independently of the decorative design P801.

《Reserved display area》
A pending display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. In the reserved display area P810, a reserved object P811 corresponding to the reserved (random number) corresponding to the unexercised right is displayed as the special symbol lottery right acquired by the player. The example of FIG. 17 shows a state in which three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the execution time of the special symbol lottery is (that is, the earlier the hold is), the closer it is to the lower part of the screen in the substantially central direction.

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the reserved display area P810, an object having substantially the same form as the reserved object P811 of the reserved display area P810 is displayed at a higher position and larger in size than the reserved object P811. This display area continues to display the pending display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the current special symbol variable display from the pending display area, and is called the "variable object display area (P812)". In addition, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is called "the variable object (P813)", but it may be called "the pending display" or the like, and the acronym "current" is added to distinguish it from the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810.

The display mode of the variable object P813 in the variable object display area P812 does not need to be completely the same as that of the suspended object P811. When the suspended display associated with the start of variation is moved and displayed in the variable object display area P812, the shape may change or disappear (not displayed). Further, the variable object P813 may also be configured so that the display mode can be changed in the same way as the pending display in the pending change look-ahead to be described later (for example, the shape and color of the object change at the timing during the variable display).

《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed side by side in the vertical direction at the substantially central position in the height direction on the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols, and are called "simple reserved display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 17, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "3" displayed above, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "4" displayed below.

(Look-ahead effect)
《Pending change lookahead》
Also, in FIG. 17, the reserved object P811 in the H3 display area in the reserved display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the reserved objects P811 in the H2 and H1 display areas. The premised pachinko game machine P is configured such that the display mode of the 3rd retained object P811 has a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the display mode of the 2nd retained object P811. In this way, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending object P811 and displaying it for a specific pending is called "holding change (prefetching)".

In addition to the mode illustrated in FIG. 17, it is also possible to have a plurality of types of change modes, and configure such that the possibility (expectation) of winning a big hit is different for each of them, and change the display mode of the pending object P811 step by step.

In addition, not only "suspension change (prefetching)", when the random number stored as suspension is determined to be the performance execution target, before the variable display corresponding to the suspension that is the performance execution target is started, the performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the suspension that is the performance execution target is likely to be a big hit is called "forecast performance" (sometimes referred to as "pre-determination performance").

When the ``prefetching performance'' is executed, the suspension determined as the suspension to be executed in the performance may be referred to as ``prefetching target suspension'', ``trigger suspension'', ``criminal suspension'', etc., and the variable display of the special pattern based on the prefetching target suspension is referred to as ``forereading target variation'', ``trigger variation'', ``criminal variation'' and the like.

Here, some representative examples that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified as "prefetching effect".

《Foresight of Opportunity》
The ``chance look-ahead'' is an effect in which the stop display pattern of the decorative pattern P801 conforming to a predetermined rule is stopped (or temporarily stopped) in the variable display of the decorative pattern P801 until the fluctuation of the look-ahead target is started. As an example of the rules of the stopped display mode of the decorative patterns P801 predetermined as the chance number, (a) when the missing patterns are stopped by combining only patterns with the same hue of the number part of the decorative patterns, (b) when the stopped patterns of the decorative patterns are displayed in order such as "1", "2", "3", "5", "4" and "3", etc., in a regular stop display mode such as lining up (in order and in reverse order), (c) special numbers such as "7" or " For example, a pattern different from a number such as "first" is stopped and displayed as a medium-sized stop display pattern.

《Direction movable role-reading》
``Prediction of performance movable accessory'' is a presentation in which the performance movable accessory P560 or the frame movable accessory P360 (such as the lever P382 of the premised pachinko game machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (the glass frame P3) is moved lively in accordance with the performance operation pattern from the start of the variation until the variation display of the prefetching target variation is started or straddling the prefetching target variation.

《Zone Transition Look Ahead》
``Zone transition look-ahead'' is a look-ahead performance suggesting a high possibility of a big win by shifting to a special performance mode (called a zone) in the variable display of special symbols before the look-ahead target variation starts, and executing a notice lottery for executing the foretell performance corresponding to the special performance mode until the look-ahead target variation is displayed. For example, "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> big hit", or "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> winning pattern stops and returns to normal background".

(Display example when executing reach effect)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big hit is being performed. As described above, the ``ready-to-win performance'' refers to a state in which decorative patterns (left pattern P801a, right pattern P801c) other than one decorative pattern (middle pattern P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and that a big win is announced if one more pattern stops in the same manner.

In many cases, the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, has a specification for notifying a big hit by displaying three decorative patterns P801 in the same stop display mode via a ready-to-win effect.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c of the decorative patterns are displayed as ``5'', and ``4'', ``5'', and ``6'' are displayed as patterns in the middle pattern row during fluctuation, and the ``4'' pattern vibrates violently, and if it switches to ``5'', it is a big win.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the display of "5" which is the left pattern and the right pattern of the decorative patterns is displayed smaller than the decorative pattern P801 at the time of stop display in FIG. At this time, the decorative symbols displayed in small sizes corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c may be called "retreat symbol (P803)" or "reach symbol". In the ready-to-win performance, in addition to the illustrated example, there is a case where it is notified whether or not a big hit will be achieved depending on how the end of the animation of the advance notice performance (ready-to-win performance) displayed with the variable display of the decoration pattern will be, and the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c already temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed (or not displayed) in a smaller size than the retreat pattern P803, thereby enhancing the visibility of the performance desired to attract the player's attention.

Also, there is a game machine that does not display three decorative symbols P801, and there is also a multi-line reach that simultaneously forms a reach mode of multiple lines, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the ready-to-win effect, there is a ready-to-win effect called “full-rotation ready-to-win” in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variably displayed in the same manner. Although the situation is different from the standard of the ready-to-win performance, ``a situation in which decorative patterns other than one decorative pattern are displayed in the same mode, and a state in which it is announced that a big hit will occur if one more pattern stops in the same mode,'' the full-rotation ready-to-win is also recognized as a ready-to-win performance by those skilled in the art.

Also, in FIG. 18, an "effect setting display area (P850)" is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, a volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The effect setting display area P850 is an area for displaying the setting status and change status of a sound volume setting function for adjusting the sound volume level output from the speaker P83 of the game machine P, a light amount adjustment function for adjusting the light emission luminance of the decorative lamp P82 of the game machine P, and a presentation mode change function for changing the type of the announcement effect to be generated and changing the frequency of occurrence of the announcement effect called the effect mode.

The effect setting display area P850 is not always displayed, but is temporarily displayed when the player executes an operation related to various effect settings (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function, effect mode change function). For example, the effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. In the situation of FIG. 18, when the player further operates the right button of the cross key P383, the set volume level (black area in the figure) increases and the volume setting value changes from "3" to "4".

In addition, in the premised pachinko game machine P, when adjusting the light amount, the change operation is performed by operating the cross key P383 in the up and down direction, and the effect mode change function is an example of switching the effect mode in a predetermined order according to the operation of the effect button. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes in relation to the execution of effects during the game, and can be appropriately adopted other than the exemplified method of changing the settings.

In addition, regarding the display of the performance setting display area P850 and the use of various performance setting functions, it is possible to respectively set a period during which the performance setting operation of the player is valid and a period during which the performance setting operation is invalidated, and when a particularly important performance is executed, the performance setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various performance setting functions is disabled.

(Example of effect display during jackpot game)
Next, based on FIG. 19, a description will be given of the display mode of the effect in a state in which a jackpot game is being executed in the premised pachinko game machine P. FIG.

《Production display indicating the type of jackpot》
At the bottom left of the screen and the top right of the screen in FIG. 19, the decoration pattern P801 that triggered the execution of the big hit game is displayed. The lower left part of the screen displays 1 decoration pattern P801 (also called "big win arrangement (P805)") in a display mode smaller than the decoration pattern under variable display as in the execution of the ready-to-win performance, and the upper right part of the screen continues to display the simple arrangement P802 displayed when the variable display of the special pattern is finished.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the type of the decorative pattern P801 that triggered the occurrence of the big win (stopped and displayed at the time of occurrence of the big win) instructs the player in terms of the kind of the big win to be executed, the degree of expectation of the number of game balls to be obtained during the big win, and the game state (normal game state) after the big win. Therefore, by displaying the decoration patterns (big win pattern P805, simple pattern P802) that triggered the execution of the big win, it is possible to suggest the kind of big win and the number of game balls expected to be obtained even during the big win game.

Further, as a display indicating the type of big hit, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 imitating a pentagonal shield is displayed under the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"), and the character "MAX" is described in the center of the icon P821. An icon P821 in the figure indicates a jackpot suggested by the character string "MAX", and indicates that a jackpot game of the maximum round of the premise pachinko gaming machine P is executed. This icon P821 is called a ``big win icon'' or a ``consecutive (display) icon'', and each time a specific game state and a big win game are repeatedly executed, the display is cumulatively arranged side by side, and it is a performance display for informing the player how many times and what kind of big wins have been obtained in the so-called ``consecutive game'' state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown, the premised pachinko machine P executes an effect for notifying the player of the type of jackpot by displaying ``XX bonus!''

In addition, for example, even if it is suggested that the game is a big hit such as ``△△ chance'' in which the number of rounds to be executed is small, it is possible to execute a ``big hit promotion effect'' such as ``extra bonus!

Incidentally, the ``big win promotion performance'' may also be used when suggesting that a big win game is being executed to shift to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the kind of big win reported earlier. For example, there is an effect display such as switching from the effect of a big win game (called ``non-probable variable big win'' or ``ordinary big win'') suggesting that the probability variation function does not operate after the big win game to the effect of a big win game (called ``probable variable big win'' or ``specific big win'') in which the probability variation function is activated after the big win.

<<Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game>>
Next, when executing the big win game, the effect display showing the progress of the big win game will be described. In FIG. 19, as the effect indicating the effect display of the big hit, there are "round display (P820)" which is executed by displaying the character string "ROUND_○" on the upper left of the screen, "display of the number of acquired balls (P822)" which is executed by displaying the character string "TOTAL_○○pt" on the lower right of the screen, and "count display (P825)" which is displayed by ten circular image objects on the right side of the screen. Although not shown, during the jackpot game, in addition to these displays, an image display such as an animation called "round effect" is displayed.

《Round display》
"Round display (P820)" is a display indicating what round the round game (unit game) being executed is during the jackpot game. The numerical value on the right side of "ROUND" is updated at the timing when the round game is started. The example of FIG. 19 shows a situation in which the sixth round game is being played.

It should be noted that the "round display (p820)" does not necessarily need to be synchronized with the actual number of rounds executed during the jackpot game. For example, in the specifications of the "small win V" mentioned above, the small win game is counted as the first round, and the first round of the big win game executed after the V winning is treated as the second round. In another example, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 in the round game ends with a transition to the easy ball entry state for a short period of time, the value of "round display" is not updated, and only when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 becomes the easy ball entry state for a long time, the substantially executed round may be treated as a "substantial round".

《Acquired number of balls display》
``Acquired ball number display (P822)'' includes a ``big hit acquired ball number display (P823*not shown)'' that displays the number of game balls cumulatively acquired in one big win game being executed, and a ``cumulative acquired ball number display (824)'' that displays the number of game balls cumulatively acquired in a plurality of big wins across a specific game. FIG. 19 shows an example in which a 5-digit display of the number of acquired balls, ie, "accumulated number of acquired balls display (P824)" is displayed. It should be noted that "display of the number of winning balls (P823)" and "display of the accumulated number of winning balls (P824)" may be simultaneously displayed in parallel.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the "number of won balls display (P822)" displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the big winning hole P751 during the big win game. However, as the accumulation target of the prize ball payout of the acquired ball number display P822, the payout based on the ball entry into the general winning hole P731 or the second start winning hole P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 may be accumulated and added.

In addition, as another modification, the display period of the ``display of the number of won balls (P822)'' may be displayed not only during the big win game but also during execution of the specific game, and the period of addition of the accumulated number of paid out balls of the ``display of the number of won balls (P822)'' may be expanded not only during the big win game but also during the specific game or during the small win game.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, in addition to the "display of the number of acquired balls (P822)", only in special situations such as when the cumulative number of payout balls reaches a delimiting number of payouts such as "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. !!”).

《Count display》
The ``count display (P825)'' is a display showing how many game balls can be entered in one round game up to the number of game balls set as the condition for closing the big winning hole P751, or how many game balls have entered the big winning hole P751 in the current round game. The former is displayed as a circular object that is shaded in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object in two columns at the approximate center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 19, as the sixth round of the game, the count display P825 indicates that 5 balls have been entered into the big winning hole (indicated by white circular objects), and that 5 more balls can be entered (indicated by shaded circular objects). The count display P825 is reset to its initial state each time a new round is started.

During execution of the round game of the jackpot game, depending on the flow of the game balls, game balls satisfying the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 may be successively awarded with the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition of the big winning hole P751, and the occurrence of winning of the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an ``over winning'' occurs, a special effect may be performed using an object display of the count display P825, or a special effect sound may be emitted from the effect lamp P82 or a special effect sound from the speaker P83. Further, with respect to the above-described winning ball number display P822, the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of "over winning" may be added or may be excluded from addition.

<<Other production display during jackpot game>>
Next, another effect display that is executed in FIG. 19 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed at the substantially center position on the left side of the screen are the aforementioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decoration pattern (jackpot layout P805) at the bottom left of the screen is a "selected music display (P854)" indicating the title of the music being reproduced during the current jackpot game. The premised pachinko game machine P has a specification that allows the player to arbitrarily select a piece of music to be reproduced by operating the performance button P381 or the cross key P383 during the first round or the second round during the jackpot game. As for the selected music display P854, when the music can be changed, an image of "can be changed with (up) and (down) keys" is displayed near the selected music display P854 as shown in FIG.

The selection of the effect during such a jackpot game is not limited to the selection of music, but it is also possible to change the round effect, select the effect (effect mode) during the specific game after the jackpot game, etc.

Finally, the "Right shot" and the right arrow symbol displayed at the bottom of the simplified drawing P802 on the upper right of the screen are image displays related to "Blow split notification (P830)" (also called "recommended firing position notification" etc.). In the premised pachinko game machine P, during the jackpot game, the game state is such that it is recommended to shoot the game ball to the right area P501R of the game area.

The "beating notification" is displayed not only during the jackpot game, but also during the game in the specific game state or during the game in the normal game state. In particular, in a situation where the game state changes (occurrence/end of a big win or occurrence/end of a specific game state), an effect is executed to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next game state by temporarily displaying a larger size display in the center of the screen than the notification P830 shown in FIG. 19 so that the player can easily recognize it.

In addition, in the "beating division notification (P830)", the one that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the game state transition is expressed as the "first division notification image" ("right hitting large display (P831)", "left hitting large display (P833)"), and during the jackpot game or during the specific game state, the display that displays the recommended firing position in the game state almost all the time the game state continues is the "second hitting division notification image" (" It may be expressed as "right shot small display (P832)", "left shot small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "beating split notification (P830)", when a situation in which a game ball is shot at a position other than the recommended shooting position is detected, for example, when a game ball is shot to the left side area P501L of the game area during a big hit, a "left strike warning notification" ("right strike attention alert notification (P835)") that alerts the player that the game ball should be shot to the right side area P501R of the game area is provided. display a message such as "Please hit right"). In addition, in a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are opposite to each other, "Right-handed warning notification" ("Left-handed attention calling notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of effect display during specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function during the specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). A wide variety of performance displays are shown in the figure, but the explanation of those explained in the above description is omitted, and the performance displays that have not been explained so far and the performance displays that are different from the above explanation will be explained.

First, as an effect display that has not been explained so far, as an explanation of the effect display during the specific game state, the "production mode display (P840)" and the "remaining number of games display (P841)" will be explained.

<<Production mode display>>
The ``performance mode display (P840)'' is a display indicating the state of the current performance display mode, and indicates that the advance notice performance corresponding to the corresponding mode is drawn according to the state information called the performance mode. When the performance mode display is different, it is common that the kind of the notice performance visually recognized by the player is made so that the visual impression is greatly different, although there are some common notice performances. In FIG. 20, "RUSH_MODE" is displayed, indicating that the game state of the pachinko game machine P as a prerequisite is "ST (variable number of cuts)" (high probability/high base state).

In addition, the "production mode display (P840)" may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) in addition to notifying the production mode in the specific game state, or when a plurality of production modes are provided in one game state, the display may be performed temporarily or continuously until the production mode ends each time a condition for switching the production mode is satisfied.

《Remaining number of games displayed》
The ``remaining game count display (P841)'' is a display showing the number of times of variable display of special symbols (number of times of special symbol lottery) until the end of the specific game state and the number of times of variable display of special symbols until the end of the current performance mode. In FIG. 20, the display of ``remaining_56'' is executed in the upper center of the screen, and the player is notified that the game state of ``ST (variable probability of cutting the number of times)'' will be continued until the special symbol lottery is executed 56 more times.

Next, in the example of the effect display in the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, the display that is different from the example of the effect display in the other game states described above will be described.

《Decorative pattern (specific game state)》
At the center of the screen in FIG. 20, a variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed. In the example of the effect display of the decorative pattern P801 in the specific game state of FIG. 20, the display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed smaller than the decorative pattern P801 of the example of the effect display in the normal game state of FIG.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, a performance mode display P840, a remaining game count display P841, and a jackpot icon display P821 are performed on the upper part of the screen as the performance display of the specific game state, and a selected music display P854 and a winning ball number display P824 are performed on the lower part of the screen. In the specific game state, such additional display that is not displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is performed, so if the decorative pattern P801 is displayed in the same size as in the normal game state, there is a risk that some of the patterns will overlap with a part of each display during the stop display, and the visibility of the stop display pattern will be reduced. It is intended to be small and simplified. Further, as an example of simplifying and displaying the decorative pattern P801, it is possible to adopt a method of reducing the size and not displaying a character image or the like that is displayed along with the number indicating the pattern.

《Reserved display area (specific game state)》
In the premised pachinko game machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen in FIG. 20, as a display of a suspended object P811 in a suspended display area P810 in a specific game state, a display area of suspended objects "H1" to "H4" is provided in the depth direction from the front side of the screen. Note that the display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the "RUSH_MODE" rendering mode state.

When the variable display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new change starts in the state, the display of the pending object P811 positioned at the bottom in FIG. 20 disappears, and the display of the pending object P811 lined up in the back moves to the front and the display is controlled to become larger.

In addition, although not shown, a description will be given of the "result display effect", which is an important effect displayed during the specific game.

《Result display performance》
In the premised pachinko machine P, the "result display effect" is an effect that is performed at the timing when the player recognizes that the "continuous game" state has ended, such as when the final variation of the specific game state (high base state) is executed, or when the hold that occurred during the specific game state disappears. It is a production that informs the person.

[First embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P of the first embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the base technology described above. In the following, differences from the underlying technology will be mainly described, and descriptions of common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the elements identical or corresponding to the elements explained in the underlying technique are given the same reference numerals and explained.

(Description of the housing (slot machine 1))
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 21 shows the appearance of the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment. The slot machine 1 is roughly divided into the front panel 2 side and the cabinet 3 side, and necessary parts and substrates are attached respectively. The front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 and the side surface of the cabinet 3 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device, and the locking device side can be opened by inserting a lock key into the locking device provided on the front panel 2 and rotating it in a specific direction.

The constituent elements on the front panel 2 side of the slot machine 1 will be explained below.

(Front panel 2)
The front panel 2 is composed of a plate member with a design, and is provided with a display window 4, an operation instruction lamp 24, a bet number display lamp 25, a credit number display 26, a winning number display 27, an operation panel 11, a lower panel 5, an upper or both side production lamp, etc. on the front side (player side), and a medal selector 34 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "selector"), a display device 32, a sub-control board unit 42, various boards, etc., and setting display LEDs (hereinafter, set value display LEDs). , a setting indicator, a setting value indicator, a setting display device, or a setting value display device) are provided.

(Display window 4)
The display window 4 is configured so that the pattern printed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel tape fixed to each reel rim portion of the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c, which are vertically rotatably provided with the front panel 2 closed, can be visually recognized through the display window 4 from the front side (player side). When the reels are stopped, 3 consecutive symbols out of 21 symbols (21 symbols in this embodiment, but may be freely designed such as 20 or 16 depending on the specifications) are visible. That is, 3 [symbols]×3 [reels]=9 symbols in total are displayed on the display window 4 . Here, among the stop positions where the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c each stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is the upper stage, the center stop position is the middle stage, and the lowest stop position is the lower stage.

(Valid line)
The active line is a symbol combination line that is subject to winning determination processing (to be described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are stopped. The effective line in this embodiment is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) passing through the middle of each reel in the display window 4 . When it is determined that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line corresponds to any winning combination by the prize determination process, the process corresponding to the stopped symbol combination is performed. As an example, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell has stopped, the payout processing of game medals (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medals, game media, or game value) or credit addition processing is executed, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped, the automatic betting processing is executed.

Depending on the slot machine 1, the effective lines are set to 5 lines, that is, the upper horizontal line, the middle horizontal line, the lower horizontal line, the upward right line, and the downward right line. It can be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine 1, such as setting six lines or more including the number of lines, or setting the effective line so that it changes depending on the number of bets. A straight line other than the valid line may be called an invalid line.

(Operation instruction lamp 24)
The operation instruction lamp 24 is provided around the display window 4, and instructs the player to operate the stop switch 13 (described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are rotating. That is, it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated when the left operation instruction lamp 24a lights, the middle stop switch 13b should be operated when the middle operation instruction lamp 24b lights, and the right stop switch 13c should be operated when the right operation instruction lamp 24c lights.

(Bet number display lamp 25)
The number of bets (number of bets) display lamp 25 is provided on the operation panel 11 and has a function of displaying the number of bets operated by the player. Also, it is composed of a 1-bed bet number display lamp 25a (not shown), a 2-bed bet number display lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3-bed bet number display lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, a one-bet number display lamp 25a lights up, when two medals are bet in total, a two-bet number display lamp 25b is lit, and when three medals are bet in total, a three-bet number display lamp 25c is lit. Also, although not shown, after the symbol combination relating to the replay is displayed, when the automatic betting process is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the bet number used in the game in which the replay is won is lit, and the replay lamp is lit. The lighting timing of the bet number display lamp 25 and the lighting timing of the replay lamp may be the same, or one of them may be lit first.

(Credit number indicator 26)
The credit amount display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of a segment display 26a (not shown) composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP) that mainly displays the upper digits of the credit amount, and a segment display 26b (not shown) that mainly displays the lower digits of the credit amount composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). The number of credits means the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine 1 . Also, when a normal game cannot be played, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

(Acquisition number indicator 27)
The acquired number display 27 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of a segment display 27a (not shown) composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displaying the upper digits of the acquired number, and a segment display 27b (not shown) composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP) mainly displaying the lower digits of the acquired number. The number of won medals means the number of medals paid out to the player according to the game result in the slot machine 1 (including the number of medals stored in the credit number display 26). Also, when a normal game cannot be played, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

The credit number indicator 26 and the acquired number indicator 27 display information by segment indicators 26a, 26b, 27a, and 27c. In addition, depending on whether or not the DP is lit, it is conceivable to display information different from the credit number information and the acquired number information. For example, information indicating that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section (to be described later) or information indicating that a predetermined external signal is being output may be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. In addition, it may have the capability of notifying the pressing order by using the upper digit display section and the lower digit display section of the acquired number display 27 . When the winning number display 27 is used to notify the pressing order, the winning number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

(Operation panel 11)
The operation panel 11 is provided substantially in the center of the front panel 2 . The operation panel 11 is configured substantially horizontally, and is provided with a start switch 12, a stop switch 13, a medal slot 17, a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, and an adjustment switch (described later).

(Start switch 12)
A start switch 12 (also called a start lever) is provided on the operation panel 11 . It consists of a lever-shaped operation part, and the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and when the start switch sensor is turned OFF when operated, it is determined that the start switch has been operated. The operation of the start switch 12 becomes valid when the number of bets reaches a specified number, and the operation starts an internal lottery process (described later), an AT lottery process (described later), a reel rotation process (described later), and the like. Further, in this embodiment, since the input signal is low-active, the start switch input signal is turned off when the start switch sensor is turned on during non-operation, and the start switch input signal is turned on when the start switch sensor turns off from on during operation. The configuration is not limited to this, and the start switch input signal may be turned on when the start switch sensor is turned on.

Hereinafter, simply referring to "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated" means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and that the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON.

(Stop switch 13)
A stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11 . In this embodiment, the left stop switch 13a corresponds to the left reel 8a, the middle stop switch 13b corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the right stop switch 13c corresponds to the right reel 8c. Also, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the color of the lamp provided in the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamp around it is changed to suggest that the stop switch 13 is effective. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, it lights up in blue, and when it cannot be operated, it lights up in red.

(Medal slot 17)
A medal slot 17 is provided on the operation panel 11 . It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal insertion slot, and restricts the insertion of medals of a standard size or larger. A plurality of types of medal insertion slots 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of a plurality of types of medals, but the attachment standards of the various medal insertion slots 17 are made the same so that the various medal insertion slots 17 can be commonly attached to the operation panel 11.例文帳に追加

Regarding the input of game media, the game media are not limited to the insertion of the medals described above. For example, there are those in which game balls used in pachinko are thrown in (so-called parrot), and those in which the game machine reads information on the number of game media stored in an electrical storage medium such as a magnetic card or flash memory, updates and saves the information on the number of game media in the electrical storage medium at the timing of setting the number of bets and payout of prizes, and can be changed as necessary for each gaming machine.

(Bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19))
A bed switch is provided on the operation panel 11 . When the bet switch is operated when there are stored medals in the credits, the betting number setting process equivalent to the act of inserting medals into the medal slot 17 is performed (betting number setting means 158). However, even if the bet switch is operated when there are no stored medals in the credit, it will be invalid (not accepted). It is composed of a MAX bet switch 18 which can bet the maximum number set for each slot machine 1 and a 1-bet switch 19 which can bet one, and by operating the 1-bet switch 19 a plurality of times, the same number of bets as the number of operations can be made within the range of the maximum number of bets. When the 1-bet switch 19 is operated in a state where the maximum bet number of game media is betted, the state may shift to a state in which one is betted, or the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 may be invalidated (not shifted to a state in which one is betted). Note that the maximum number of bets in this embodiment is three. It should be noted that the maximum number of bets may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the bet switches described above, it is conceivable to provide an n-bet switch that allows an arbitrarily set number of n (n is a positive integer) to bet in one operation. Further, the MAX bet switch 18 is invalidated (not accepted) even if the MAX bet switch is operated when the currently set number of bets is three. When the number of stored medals of the current credit and the currently set number of bets are less than 3 and the sum of the number of stored medals of the current credit and the currently set number of bets is less than 3, even if the MAX bet switch is operated, it is invalidated (not accepted), or the number of bets that can be set as the number of bets is set as the number of bets.

(Sub switch 20)
A sub switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11 . It is a switch that is operated mainly according to an instruction screen displayed on a display device 32, which will be described later. In addition to the sub-switch 20, sub-cross-key switches 21 (sub-cross-key upper switch, sub-cross-key lower switch, sub-cross-key left switch, sub-cross-key right switch) and performance switches (switches to be operated using instructions during the game) are provided as input means. Also, the sub-switch 20 can function as a trigger for activating an interlocking system with a portable terminal, which will be described later. Although the sub-switches 20 are used for the menu display function and the effect switches are used for operation during the game, they may be used as common switches.

(Payment switch)
A settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11 . By being operated after the game is over, the number of game media that has been bet or the number of game media that has been stored in credits is paid out (settlement) to the player. note that. In this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated under the condition that a bet is placed and game media are stored in credits, the game media on credits are first paid out and then the game media stored in credits are paid out. In other words, it may be configured such that only the game media that are bet are paid out when the settlement switch is operated in a betting situation, and then the game media stored in the credit are paid out when the settlement switch is operated again.

(bottom panel 5)
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel 2 . A design sheet is sandwiched between two sheets of transparent resin, and the design sheet is printed with a characteristic color of each slot machine 1.例文帳に追加

(Medal payout port 43)
A medal payout port 43 is provided below the lower panel 5 . This is an exit for ejecting medals paid out from a hopper 44 (also referred to as a hopper) to the outside of the slot machine 1 (receiving tray 28). It also serves as a return port for releasing medals removed from the medal selector 34 (to be described later) to the outside of the slot machine 1 .

(Receptacle 28)
A receiving tray 28 is provided below the lower panel 5 . It has a substantially concave structure to receive and store the medals discharged from the medal payout port 43, and protrudes toward the player side so that the player can check the stored medals.

In addition, the receiving tray 28 has other functions such as a cigarette ashtray 29, a resin sheet to which a union license seal, a patent stamp seal, and a model seal are attached, and a seal storage part 30 having an opening for displaying to the player side.

(Speaker S)
Speakers S are provided above and below the front panel 2 . It is connected to the sub-control board unit 42 by a harness (not shown), and the speaker S outputs an error sound and a warning sound to inform that an error has occurred, in addition to sound effects in accordance with the performance.

(Display device 32)
The display device 32 is provided above the front panel 2 . It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices such as liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board unit 42 and displays various performance images, a game instruction image for instructing the pressing order of the stop switch 13 and the position of the eyes during the game, an error image when an error occurs, and the like. Further, there are slot machines 1 that do not have the display device 32 depending on the model.

(Other production devices such as dot displays and movable accessories)
Other production devices such as dot displays and movable accessories are provided at arbitrary positions on the front panel 2 such as the periphery of the display window 4 and the upper and lower panels. It is electrically connected to a sub-control board unit 42 to display and operate various performance images and performance operations, as well as game instruction images and operations for instructing the pressing order and eye pressing positions of the stop switch 13 during the game, and error images and operations when an error occurs. Other production devices such as a dot display and movable accessories are optionally installed in accordance with the model of the slot machine 1.例文帳に追加Various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can also be used as other rendering devices. In particular, in a game machine that is provided with a liquid crystal as an additional effect device, the display device 32 may be referred to as a main display device, and the liquid crystal as another effect device may be referred to as a sub display device. In this case, the display area of the main display device is larger than that of the sub display device.

(Medal selector 34)
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine behind the front panel 2 and is provided in the downflow passage below the medal slot 17 . In addition to a medal count function for counting the number of medals thrown in by a player with a sensor provided on the flow passage, a medal exclusion function for guiding the inserted non-standard medals out of the flow passage and removing them out of the slot machine 1 is generally provided. In addition, by operating a switch provided on the front surface of the front panel 2, there is an eject function for removing medals stuck in the medal selector 34, a blocker function for removing medals that are thrown in other than when accepting medals from the downflow passage by an electrically driven blocking member, and a foreign matter detection function for physically detecting foreign matter that has entered the medal flow path 35. If the medals inserted at the time of receiving the medals are normal, they are discharged to the hopper 44 located downstream.

Various sensors in the medal selector are composed of a path sensor, an insertion sensor 1, an insertion sensor 2, and a shoot sensor. The path sensor is a sensor that first detects medals inserted from the medal slot, and is provided to count the number of inserted medals and ejected medals. The throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 are positioned downstream of the passage sensor and the blocker, and are provided to determine the passage time of the medals passing through the throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 to judge normal passage or abnormal passage. Note that the input sensor 2 is located downstream of the input sensor 1 . The shoot sensor is located downstream of the throw-in sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of thrown-in medals and ejected medals. Since the passage sensor and the shoot sensor have overlapping functions, only one of them may be provided.

Components of the slot machine 1 on the side of the cabinet 3 will be explained below.

(Cabinet 3)
The cabinet 3 is configured in a shape having an opening on one side of a rectangular box, and is provided therein with a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter simply referred to as a "reset switch" or a "setting switch"), a power supply device 39, a main control board unit 41, an external output terminal plate 47, and the like.

(Main control board unit 41)
The main control board unit 41 is composed of a main control board case base, a main control board case cover, and a main control board 100 . The main control board 100 is accommodated by the main control board case main body and the main control board case cover, and is not easily opened and closed by caulking (sealed). The main control board unit 41 is fixed to the main control board case bracket inside the cabinet 3 .

The main control board 100 is provided with a main IC that controls the functions of the main CPU, main ROM, and main RAM (hereinafter also referred to as main RWM). Under the control of the main IC, general games (hand lottery process, reel control process, payout process, etc.), which will be described later, are realized.

(reel unit 6)
The reel unit 6 mainly includes a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a middle reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet 3 and fixed by a locking member (to be described later).

The reels (left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c) have reel tapes on which a plurality of types of patterns are drawn, and each reel has a different pattern arrangement. When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, it starts rotating and accelerates to a speed of about 80 rpm (acceleration processing). After reaching a constant speed, after maintaining a constant speed rotation state in which the stepping motor is moved one step for each interrupt (constant speed rotation), the reels are moved to a stop position determined by each operation reception position of each reel at a constant speed in response to the operation of the stop switch 13 by the player, and after moving to the stop symbol position, a brake is applied (four-phase excitation is applied) to stop the rotation of the reels.

In addition, each reel is provided with an index, and an index sensor provided on the spoke portion of each reel detects the index to determine which symbols are passing during rotation. The number of steps of the stepping motor, which is the driving source of the reel in this embodiment, is 336 steps, and the rotation failure detection counter is incremented every two interrupt processes during constant speed rotation. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when the index is detected, so that the rotation failure detection counter becomes 0 before it reaches 180 if the constant speed rotation process is normal.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided inside each reel, and is lit to emphasize the stopped pattern after the reel stops, or to improve the visibility of the pattern while the reel is rotating.

(Hopper 44)
The hopper 44 is placed in engagement with a rail structure provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet 3, and can slide back and forth along the rail structure. The hopper 44 is composed of a storage tank portion for receiving and storing medals led from the medal selector 34 into the inside of the game machine, a medal alignment mechanism for aligning the medals by driving the hopper motor by a hopper motor driving means 156 and rotating the rotating disk to discharge the stored medals to the tray 28 one by one, and a medal payout portion 45 provided with a discharge mechanism for discharging the medals to the tray 28 through the medal payout port 43.

(Auxiliary tank 46)
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be able to store medals, and the medals stored in the storage tank part are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 through a downwardly inclined rail part provided in the storage tank part. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box-like structure, and when it is installed in the cabinet 3, two full detection electrodes attached to the cabinet 3 are exposed in the auxiliary tank 46 through through holes provided on at least one side surface. The number of fullness detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of fullness detection electrodes may be changed, such as providing three. Further, the method of fullness detection is not limited to the method of using the fullness detection electrode, and a sensor provided at a predetermined position may detect medals to enable fullness detection.

(Setting key switch 37)
The setting key switch 37 is provided in a setting key switch unit provided inside the slot machine 1 and provided with an opening/closing door on the front surface thereof. After opening the front panel 2, access is made possible by opening the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it to the right. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in a state in which medals can be accepted, the current set value can be confirmed, and when it is determined that the setting key switch 37 is on in the power-on processing when the power is turned on, setting change processing (to be described later) is executed.

(Power supply device 39)
The power supply device 39 is provided on the lower left side of the cabinet 3 when viewed from the front. It has a rectangular box shape, is provided with a power switch 40 on the outside, and is provided with a power supply board for generating a voltage inside. They are individually connected to the spinning drum board and the sub-control board unit 42 via harnesses (not shown), and the spinning drum board is further connected to the main control board unit 41 via harnesses to supply power.

The power supply device 39 is configured to take in power from the outside of the slot machine 1 when the switch is turned on, generate predetermined voltages respectively, take in predetermined voltages to the main control board unit 41 and the sub control board unit 42, and is configured not to take in power from the outside of the slot machine 1 when the switch is turned off.

(External output terminal plate 47)
The external output terminal board 47 is generally installed inside the cabinet 3 of the slot machine 1, converts a signal relating to the game result output from the main control board unit 41 into a signal of a predetermined format, and transmits the signal to the outside of the slot machine 1. Contents of game results include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (the number of big bonuses, the number of regular bonuses), the door open signal, and the like. Other conditions for transmitting a signal to the outside can be set based on predetermined information controlled by a main control board 100, such as when an AT state is reached, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, when a counter value related to a game reaches a predetermined value, and the like.

(Functional block diagram)
The electrical schematic configuration of the slot machine will be described with reference to the functional block diagram shown in FIG. 25 of this embodiment.

<Main control board>
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is electrically connected to a main control board 100 (also referred to as main control board) that governs general game flow, a sub control board 1000 (also referred to as sub control board), a door relay board (also referred to as a central display board), a reel device board, a reset/setting switch 38, a setting key switch, etc., thereby enabling data communication. However, bi-directional communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled, and data communication is enabled by uni-directional communication from the main control board to the sub-control board. A main control chip is mounted on the main control board. In the main control chip, a main control CPU, a main control ROM, a main control RAM, etc. are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. Under the control of the main control chip, the winning lottery (also called internal lottery), reel drive control (also called reel control), payout control, etc. are appropriately communicated to various boards. In addition, to the sub control board, as a result of the internal lottery, when a selected hand (AT role, AT target hand, pushing hand, pushing hand, pushing hand, and operation procedure hand including both pushing hand and eye pushing hand) is won and information regarding the display of the selected hand (push order, operation timing) is notified on the main control means side, information on the display of the handed hand (chosen hand group information, information on the display of the handed hand) is sent to the sub control means. It is possible to notify. It should be noted that all the processes related to AT, such as shifting to AT, extending the number of AT games, notification of pressing order, etc., may be referred to as processes related to (related to) the instruction function. The push order combination is a conditional device in which the symbol combination to be stopped and the game medals awarded to the player are different depending on the order of the reels to be stopped (push order), and the eye-pushing combination is a conditional device in which the symbol combination to be stopped and the game medals awarded to the player are different depending on the timing of accepting the operation of the stop button.

<Sub control board>
A sub-control chip is mounted on the sub-control board. In the sub-control chip, the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The sub-control board is capable of two-way communication with the effect control board, and transmits data designating effects to be output to the speaker S, the LED lamp, the sub-switch 20, and the like. Information to the display device 32 is transmitted to the image control board. Also, the sub-control board is directly supplied with power from the power supply board.

<Rotor device substrate>
The reel device board is a relay board that performs data communication between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also called an external collective terminal board), etc. and the main control board. A reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the reel device board when the projecting piece (also called an index) passes the sensor. A door switch is a sensor that determines whether or not the front door is opened. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether the medals are properly passing when they are paid out from the hopper. The external collective terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to a hall computer outside the game machine. Further, power is supplied directly from the power supply board to the rotary drum device board.

<Door relay board>
Input information to the door relay board includes various sensor information in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, passage sensor, chute sensor), bet switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and output information includes blocker information, credit amount information, bet amount information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout amount information. The door relay board is electrically connected to a selector, a bet switch, a stop switch, a checkout switch, a credit indicator 26, a payout indicator, a replay lamp, a 1-bet lamp, a 2-bet lamp, a 3-bet lamp, a start lamp, a medal insertion possible lamp, and an advantage zone lamp.

<Production control board>
The effect control board is electrically connected to a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, a switch for effect, a speaker S, a back lamp, an LED lamp provided on the front panel 2, and an image control board for controlling display contents of the display device 32.

<Image control board>
The image control board is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, and the like for specifically displaying the effect content on the display device 32 .

<Power board>
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, power is supplied from the power board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch. The power supplied to the reel device board supplies power to the main control board and the door relay board. Then, the supplied electric power is supplied to each component to establish an electrical connection. The power supplied to the sub-control board supplies power to the performance control board, and supplies power to the image control board. The supplied electric power is supplied to each component and electrically connected.

I will explain the control of the main board that controls the game of the game machine.
(main memory)
The main CPU 105 has a built-in ROM and a RAM, and the built-in RAM that is cleared by the clearing process will be described. The storage areas of the RAM include a storage area for a switch state flag indicating the on/off state of the automatic settlement switch 62 and the on/off switch 60, a storage area for set value information indicating any value from 1 to 6 to be set, a storage area for RT status information indicating which RT state is in a plurality of RT states, a storage area for a specific condition device indicating the winning state of a specific condition device such as a bonus, a game information storage area for storing other information necessary to progress the game, and an unused storage area. There are a storage area for use, a storage area for a stack area in which data saved from registers is stored, and a storage area for a temporary stack area that is set when the power is turned on.

(interrupt processing)
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, non-maskable interrupts and maskable interrupts are provided as interrupt processing. A non-maskable interrupt is an interrupt that occurs when a signal is input to a specific terminal (NMI terminal) of the main CPU 105, and is executed with priority over a maskable interrupt.

When a non-maskable interrupt occurs, it executes power-off processing. Unlike non-maskable interrupts, maskable interrupts are processes that are executed periodically (2.235 milliseconds). When a maskable interrupt occurs, processes such as operation switch input check and timer measurement are executed. In the following description, interrupts that are not specifically described are maskable interrupts.

(RAM initialization processing)
The RAM is initialized at the time of setting change processing by the setting change means 112, at the time of power failure recovery processing, and at the start of each game.

During the setting change process, if power-off recovery cannot be performed normally, or if recovery is not possible, data 0 is set (initialized) in the RAM area excluding the switch status flag storage area. In other words, only the switch state flag is taken over the state before the setting change. For example, the RT state and the condition device flag are cleared and not taken over.

Also, during the setting change process, either when the power-off recovery can be performed normally or when the setting change process is performed normally, data 0 is set in the RAM area excluding the storage area for the switch status flag storage area, the setting value information storage area, the RT status information storage area, and the storage area for the specific condition device. In other words, the RT state, the set value data, and the condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the set values after the setting change while maintaining the game state before the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and new setting values are set in subsequent setting change processing.

Further, during power interruption recovery processing, data 0 is set in the storage area of the stack area excluding the unused storage area of the RAM area at the start of each game and the maximum use area at the time of power interruption recovery and RAM initialization during power interruption recovery processing.

(power off recovery, power on)
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, data stored in the RAM is held by a backup power supply when a power switch 40 is turned off or when power supply is interrupted such that an operating voltage for operating the slot machine 1 cannot be maintained due to a power failure or the like. Then, when the power is turned on next time, the main control board 100 determines whether or not the data held in the RAM is normal, and when it is determined to be normal, that is, when the processing at the time of power failure is performed normally, it controls to return to the state before the power failure based on the data stored in the RAM.

When the setting is changed at power-on, the state before power-off is not restored, but only part of the information is retained and restored as another state (initialization). It should be noted that, although part of the information is retained at the time of setting change, all the information may not be retained.

(power-off interrupt processing)
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operating voltage of the slot machine 1 drops due to occurrence of an event of power supply cutoff, and when the operating voltage drops to a predetermined voltage, the power cutoff is detected, and when the power cutoff is detected, power cutoff interrupt processing is executed. When the voltage monitoring circuit 110 detects a power cutoff, a power cutoff signal is input to the NMI terminal of the main CPU 105, a non-maskable interrupt is generated, and power cutoff interrupt processing is executed by the non-maskable interrupt.

In the power-off interrupt processing, as processing for maintaining the state at the time of execution of the processing and returning to the state before the power-off when the power is turned on again, processing such as clearing the output port, stopping the interrupt, saving the data stored in the register, saving the interrupt state and stack pointer, calculating and saving the RAM checksum data, prohibiting writing to the RAM, and waiting for reset are performed. Instead of using a non-maskable interrupt, it may be determined whether a power-off signal from the voltage monitoring circuit 110 is input each time an interrupt process that is executed periodically is detected, and if a signal is detected in consecutive interrupt processes, or if a signal is detected twice in one interrupt process, it is determined that a power-off has occurred, and a power-off interrupt process (power-off interrupt process) may be executed.

(Recoverable error handling)
Recoverable errors include selector-related errors (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), hopper-related errors (hopper error, hopper empty error), door open error, harness missing error, etc. If the reset switch operation is accepted after removing the cause of the error, the game can be returned to the game without turning on the power again. During the restorable error, in order to notify the player of what kind of error has occurred, the display device 32, payout number indicator, and various lamps display information about the error that has occurred. By stopping the progress of the game even during a recoverable error, damage to the manager of the game parlor can be suppressed even if an illegal operation is performed. The condition for recovering from a recoverable error may be other than acceptance of reset switch operation after removing the cause of the error, and an error recoverable without turning on the power again is called a recoverable error.

(Unrecoverable error handling)
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, interruption is prohibited, the progress of the game is restricted by clearing the output of the output port, etc., and the unrecoverable state is notified by displaying a credit number indicator 26 according to the type of the error.

Also, when a recoverable error is set, the error is canceled when a reset switch (not shown) operation is accepted, but once an unrecoverable error is set, the unrecoverable error cannot be canceled simply by accepting the operation of the reset switch or turning on the power again. In this case, the unrecoverable error is canceled by performing the setting change process. When the power is turned on again in the event of an unrecoverable error, after a part of the power-on process is executed, the display of the unrecoverable error is repeatedly executed so as not to execute subsequent game processes.

Examples of unrecoverable errors include the case where the number of bets is out of the specified number at the time of lottery, the case where the value is not within the normal range in the set value error check, the case where it is determined that power-off processing is not normally performed at the time of power failure recovery, the case where random number abnormality such as an abnormality in the frequency of the crystal oscillator 114 is indicated, and the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the effective line in the prize determination processing.

(Game method, game flow)
In order to play a game on the slot machine 1, the predetermined number of medals to bet is set by first inserting medals from a medal insertion port 17 or betting previously stored medals (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). In this embodiment, three sheets are set as the prescribed number of sheets. By setting the number of bets of medals, the activated line is set to be effective and the game becomes possible.

When medals are inserted from a new medal insertion slot in a situation where the number of medals to bet is set to the upper limit, the number of game medals (game value) stored in the credit increases. The maximum number of cards stored in the credit is 50. When medals (54 medals) exceeding the upper limit of the number of bets (3 medals) and the upper limit of the reserved amount (50 medals) are inserted from the medal insertion slot (54 medals), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (state to prevent medals from being inserted into the game machine) and returned to the tray. That is, the blocker is turned off when the number of bets is the upper limit and the number of accumulated credits is the upper limit.

A situation in which the number of medals can be betted or can be stored is when the sum of the number of bets (3) and the reserved amount (50) is less than 53, and during a game standby (period from the end of the game to the start of the next game). For example, a symbol combination related to replay is displayed, and the requirement that medals can be inserted even during game standby after automatic betting processing is executed is satisfied.

Next, when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, the combination lottery process is executed, and after determining one combination lottery result (also referred to as a condition device number) as a result of the combination lottery process, the reels start rotating. The reel rotates downward within the display window 4, accelerates until the rotational speed of the reel reaches a predetermined speed (approximately 80 rpm), and then rotates while maintaining the speed (constant speed rotation).

Next, when the operation (stop operation) of any one of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 is stopped according to the winning combination lottery result and the timing of accepting the stop operation. When all the reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not each stop pattern determined at the time of reception of stoppage of each reel is normal or not, and if not abnormal, which pattern combination is the stopped pattern combination is searched, and processing such as payout of medals (including addition to credits), setting of replay (automatic bet processing), setting of bonus state, termination of bonus state, setting of RT state, termination of RT state, etc. is performed according to the pattern combination corresponding to the search result.

(Freeze processing)
The freeze process (also referred to as a freeze effect) for delaying the progress of the game by suspending it for a predetermined period of time includes, for example, suspending functions related to acceptance of game media, acceptance of a bet switch operation for determining the number of pre-credited game media to bet, acceptance of an operation of the start switch 12 for starting a game, or acceptance of a reel stop operation. It should be noted that the freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board.

As the freeze effect, all the functions related to the progress of the game may be temporarily stopped, or only some of the functions may be temporarily stopped.

As a mode in which the progress of the game is paused, control processing based on the operation of the player (detection processing of insertion of game media by a passing sensor, processing of setting the number of bets based on operation of the bet switch, reel rotation processing or winning lottery processing based on operation of the start switch 12, reel stop processing based on operation of the reel stop switch) is not performed.

When an input signal based on the player's operation is issued during the period in which the progress of the game is temporarily stopped by the freeze performance, the control processing based on the input signal is not performed, the input signal is not accepted, or the transmission of the input signal is delayed until a predetermined period elapses.

Regarding the freeze performance performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels are not rotated for a predetermined period and the reels are rotated after the predetermined period, when the role lottery and reel rotation are not performed for the predetermined period when the start switch 12 is operated, and the role lottery and reel rotation are performed after the predetermined period has elapsed, or when the start switch 12 is operated, the role lottery is performed for the predetermined period, but the reels are not rotated and the reels are rotated after the predetermined period. , or after the start switch 12 is operated and the combination lottery is performed, a predetermined period is set and the reels are rotated or stopped during the predetermined period.

As for the freeze performance performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, the freeze performance performed based on the reception of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the freeze performance performed based on the stop display of the specific pattern on the reel as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13 are different in the control processing of the freeze performance.

The control processing of the freeze effect performed based on the reception of the operation of the stop switch 13 includes not performing the stop control processing of the spinning reels. As a result, the player cannot stop the spinning reels during the prescribed period, but since the stop control processing is performed after the reception processing of the operation of the stop switch 13 after the prescribed period has passed, the timing from the reception of the stop to the stop of the reels can be delayed.

As a result of the operation of the stop switch 13, the control processing of the freeze effect performed based on the stop display of a specific symbol on the reel is, when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reel by the operation of the stop switch 13 other than the last stop switch 13, the stop control of the next stop switch 13 is not performed, and when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reel by the operation of the last stop switch 13, the next game is started. For example, the processing for detecting the insertion of game media or the control processing based on the automatic betting processing that is performed when the replay stops on the activated line is not performed.

During the predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operation is temporarily stopped, but the gaming machine operation irrespective of the progress of the game can be executed. For example, the stop control processing based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, but the rotation mode of the reels can be set arbitrarily.

As the rotation mode of the reels during a predetermined period, there are rotating the reels in a direction opposite to the normal rotation, rotating the reels for a predetermined number of symbols and stopping a specific combination of symbols, stopping a predetermined reel among a plurality of reels and rotating the other reels, changing the rotation speed of the reels, or changing the operation of the reels due to the player's operation.

The predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to predetermined conditions (player's operation, lottery, etc.). Here, the predetermined condition includes the detection of a signal based on the player's operation (the start switch 12, the bet switch, the stop switch 13, and the settlement switch) and the predetermined result of a lottery. Also, changing includes shortening or lengthening the suspension period.

Control processing for shortening the suspension period includes forcibly ending the suspension period or rewriting the suspension period to a period shorter than the suspension period. As control processing for lengthening the suspension period, adding another period after the suspension period, or rewriting the suspension period to a longer period. Further, the temporary stop period based on the freeze effect is not limited to a maximum time, but may be continued until a certain result is obtained based on the player's operation.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set including the wait period. When the wait period is included, it is determined whether or not the freeze performance is finished during the wait period, and when it is finished, a mode of setting the freeze performance period after the wait period or a mode of restarting the rest of the wait period after the freeze performance is finished can be mentioned. Alternatively, such determination processing can be omitted by providing a freeze effect period longer than the wait period in advance.

As the freeze effect, a pseudo-game freeze effect as if a normal game is progressing can be mentioned. In the pseudo game freeze performance, a freeze performance period is determined from start switch 12 acceptance processing based on the operation of the start switch 12 to reel rotation start processing, reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13 during the freeze performance period. However, the combination lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 12, the winning determination process or the payout control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In the pseudo-game freeze effect, the motion of swinging up and down may be performed at the timing when the stop switch 13 is operated, the timing when a specific reel rotates, or the timing when all the reels are stopped. As a result, it is possible to suggest whether it is a normal game or a pseudo-game freeze effect.

(Setting changing means 112)
The setting change means 112 is a means for monitoring whether or not the setting change mode is set, and determining any set value among set values 1 to 6 (set values 1 to 6 on the display) when the setting change mode is set, and is provided with a winning lottery table in which winning probabilities of the winning combinations are different for each set value. After any setting value is determined, the winning probability combination lottery table corresponding to the determined setting value is continuously set until the setting value is changed by the setting change means 112 next time.

A setting change means 112 turns on the setting key switch signal when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on when the slot machine 1 is powered on with the setting key used for setting change turned on by an administrator of the game parlor while the setting key is held at the rotational position at which the setting key switch signal is turned on. In this embodiment, turning on of the setting key switch signal means turning on (turning from off to on) at the rising edge. If the setting key is turned on before the power is turned off, turning on of the rising edge is not detected after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is configured not to shift to the setting change mode.

A setting change means 112 activates a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value of the slot machine 1 when determining that the setting key switch signal is on, the door opening signal is on, and the setting changeable flag is on.

The setting changeable flag switches between ON and OFF according to the game state. For example, when a bonus game or an RT game is started or when a start switch 12 is operated to make it impossible to accept medals, the setting changeable flag is turned off, and when the bonus game or RT game is finished or when medals can be accepted, the setting changeable flag is turned on.

In this embodiment, the setting changeable flag is turned off at the start of the bonus game, but the setting changeable flag may be kept on even when the bonus game is started, or the setting changeable flag may be kept on only when a specific bonus game is started.

When the setting change mode is activated, a blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off so that the game cannot be started by inserting medals. Set values that can be changed in a setting change mode have six stages of '1', '2', '3', '4', '5' and '6', and a combination lottery table advantageous to a player is set every time the set value increases. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the ratio (distribution rate) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals bet in the entire game, so that the winning combination lottery table is advantageous to the player.

After activating the setting change mode, the current set value is determined. If the current set value is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is set, and if the current set value is determined to be out of the normal range, the set value is set to "1".

After starting the setting change mode, the segment indicator 64 and the LED are turned on to indicate that the setting change mode is set. Then, set value display data for displaying the set values are set, and the set values are displayed by lighting a credit number indicator 26 arranged on the front surface of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 and a setting display LED (not shown) arranged on the rear surface of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1. - 特許庁When the set value data is set in six stages from 0 to 5, the set value display will display "1" when the set value data is "0", "2" when the set value data is "1", "3" when the set value data is "2", "4" when the set value data is "3", and "5" when the set value data is "4". When the data is "5", the set value display shows "6".

After starting the setting change mode, it continues to determine whether the start switch 12 sensor signal is on or not, and when it is determined that the start switch 12 is operated and the start switch 12 sensor signal is turned on, the set value is determined and the current set value is displayed on the setting display LED. On the other hand, when the start switch 12 sensor signal is not determined to be on, when it is determined that the setting switch signal is on, the setting switch rising data is cleared, and it is determined whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (set value data "6"). 5"), the current set value is incremented. The setting change mode processing when the set value data has six levels from 0 to 5 determines whether the current set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (set value data "5"). If it is determined that the current set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (set value data "5"), the set value data is cleared (the set value data is set to "0"), and if it is determined that the current set value is less than the maximum set value (set value "0" to "4"), the current set value is incremented. You can make a comment.

After that, set value display data for displaying the set set value data is set again, and a credit amount indicator 26 arranged on the front surface of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 and a setting display LED arranged on the rear surface of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 are lit to display the current set value.

When it is determined that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on and the setting value is determined, it is continued to determine whether or not the setting key switch signal is turned off by rotating the setting key. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF, the determined setting value is stored in a main RAM 56, the obtained number display 27 and the setting display LED are turned off, and a blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned on to end the setting change mode.

The setting change mode is maintained without ending the setting change mode even if the setting key switch signal is turned off by rotating the setting key in a state where the start switch 12 sensor signal is not determined to be ON after starting the setting change mode. When it is determined that the start switch 12 signal is on in this state, unrecoverable error processing is performed.

After starting the setting change mode, the setting key is rotated in a state where the start switch 12 sensor signal is not determined to be on, and the setting key switch signal is turned off, and when the setting switch is operated in this state, normal set value change processing is performed. After that, the setting key is rotated before the signal of the start switch 12 is turned on, the signal of the setting key switch is turned on, and when the signal of the start switch 12 is turned on, normal setting change mode end processing is performed.

When it is determined that the set key switch signal is on while the door opening signal is off, there is a possibility that the slot machine 1 is malfunctioning or that a malicious third party is involved. Therefore, when determining the set value, the set value is changed from the set value after the change operation to "1" ("0" when the set value data is in six stages from 0 to 5), and the set value is set to set the most disadvantageous role lottery table for the player. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on when the door open signal is off, unrecoverable error processing may be performed.

The most disadvantageous combination lottery table is preferably the most disadvantageous combination lottery table among settable set values, but may be a special set value that is not normally set. The combination lottery table with a special set value at that time includes a combination lottery table that does not shift to an advantageous state (does not shift to a bonus game state) such as setting the winning probability of the bonus to 0, and a combination lottery table that sets the payout number to a number smaller than usual.

In the present embodiment, in order to activate the setting change mode, it was necessary to turn on the setting key while power was not supplied. In this case, it is conceivable that the setting key switch is turned on when the power is on, the door open signal is on, and the reset/setting switch 38 is on. The condition is not limited to this example, and the setting key switch may be turned on under the condition that the power is on and a predetermined switch that can be operated only when the door is opened is turned on. This is because the door of the slot machine 1 is rarely opened during normal operation in the game hall, and it is difficult for the setting key switch inside the slot machine 1 to be turned on when the door is closed. Therefore, by adding the turning-on of the switch that cannot be operated when the door is closed, the purpose is to prevent accidental shift to the setting change mode during the operation of the game hall or unauthorized shift.

(Role lottery means 120)
The combination lottery means 120 is a means for performing a combination lottery that determines a combination or a loss as a lottery result from a combination lottery table using random numbers. A combination lottery is performed using a random number generated by a random number generator 122, and a flag corresponding to the combination determined in the lottery result of the combination lottery is set.

(type of role)
The types of wins provided in the slot machine 1 are roughly classified into bonuses, small wins, and replays.

A bonus means a feature that is activated in a predetermined case. Generally, it is activated when the symbol combination of "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display window 4. FIG. Depending on the operation of the bonus-related accessory, the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each specified number is changed, or the conditional device activation probability of the symbol combination related to winning for each specified number is changed.

<RB>
RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also called a first class special bonus. The RB is generally set as a termination condition of winning 8 times of small winnings or 12 times of game results, and during the RB, a role lottery is performed using an RB medium role lottery table in which the winning probability of a minor role is set higher than that of a normal role lottery table.

<BB>
BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device related to a first class special accessory. In BB, the payout of more than 285 game medals related to winning a small winning combination is set as a termination condition, and during BB, a winning combination lottery table is used to set the winning probability of a small winning combination (to be described later) higher than that of a normal winning combination lottery table. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the BB middle winning lottery table during the BB. For example, the BB middle winning lottery table that continuously operates the RB middle winning lottery table described later until the end condition of the BB is satisfied may be called the BB middle winning lottery table.

<CB>
CB is an abbreviation for challenge bonus, and is also called a second type special accessory. The CB can be set in such a state that at least all minor winning combinations have been won regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery. Further, during CB, stop control different from normal stop control is performed for a predetermined reel. For example, it is conceivable to control the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds.

<Control of PB≠1 in CB>
Since the CB is in a state where at least all of the small wins have been won as described above, the symbol combination that can be displayed according to the operation procedure may not be displayed (also referred to as a dropout). For example, during CB, by controlling the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds, if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific symbol can be displayed on the effective line at any operation timing, but if it stops within 75 milliseconds, it may not be possible to display a specific symbol at a specific operation timing.

<MB>
MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device related to the second type special bonus. The MB is set as ending conditions such as payout of more than 153 medals associated with winning a small winning combination, winning of RB, or winning of SB, which will be described later.

<SB>
SB is an abbreviation for a single bonus, and is also called an ordinary accessory. The SB is set as an end condition that the result of one game is obtained. During the SB, the combination lottery is performed using the SB medium combination lottery table in which the winning probability of the minor combination is set to be high for the common combination lottery table.

In the present embodiment, the BB uses the BB medium role lottery table to perform the role lottery, but the game is not limited to this, and the game may be played using the BB general role lottery table in which the winning probability of the normal role lottery table and the minor role is set to the same probability and the RB winning probability is increased, and the RB medium role lottery table in which the winning probability of the minor role is set higher than that of the normal role lottery table. Even in this case, the BB still sets a payout exceeding 285 medals for winning a small winning combination as an end condition. In addition, the special game control means 151 is a general term for those that control the bonuses.

A small winning combination is a winning combination in which a symbol combination based on the winning minor winning combination is stop-displayed on the effective line and medals are paid out based on the stopped-displayed combination of symbols when a prize-winning determination means 140 (to be described later) determines that the player has won a prize.

A replay is a combination in which a symbol combination based on a winning replay is stopped and displayed on an effective line, and the next game can be played without inserting medals when a winning determination means 140 determines winning.

In the lottery result of the combination lottery, when none of the bonus combination, the minor combination, and the replay combination are won, the winning process is not performed as described later. When the player loses, the combination of symbols that does not relate to any combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

When the symbol combination is not stop-displayed on the effective line in the winning game with respect to BB, RB and MB among the roles drawn by the role lottery, the winning flag can be carried over to the next game or later (special handover means 146). While the winning flag is being carried over, the combination lottery may be performed using the combination lottery table before the winning flag is carried over, or the combination lottery may be made using the carryover medium combination lottery table corresponding to the winning flag. When the pattern combination based on the winning BB, RB or MB is stopped and displayed on the effective line while using the carryover middle role lottery table, it is determined that the transfer condition of the role lottery table is satisfied, and the carryover middle role lottery table is shifted to the role lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

(Role lottery table)
Winning probabilities for a plurality of types of roles are determined in the winning combination lottery table, and a plurality of types of winning combination lottery tables are provided according to the game state. For example, it corresponds to a BB middle winning lottery table used during BB, an MB middle winning lottery table used during MB, and the like.

A single winning combination in which one type of pattern combination can be stop-displayed on an effective line and a duplicate winning combination in which a plurality of pattern combinations can be stop-displayed on one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the combination lottery table according to the lottery result of the combination lottery.

For a plurality of symbol combinations set as overlapping winning combinations, one winning combination may be set to be stop-displayable according to the operation mode of all the symbol combinations, or some of the symbol combinations may be set to be non-stop-displayable. Of the multiple winning combinations, the combination corresponding to a part of symbol combinations that cannot be stopped may be referred to as a control combination.

As a role of the control role, even if the same combination of symbols can be stop-displayed on the effective line as a result of a plurality of winning lotteries, it plays a role of being able to control the effective line to be stop-displayed to be different according to the kind of the control combination set as the overlapping winning combination.

(Winning flag control means 148)
Winning flag control means 148 turns on a flag corresponding to the winning combination when any combination is won in the lottery result of the combination lottery. Then, all the stop switches 13 are operated by the player, and the flag corresponding to the winning combination is turned off when the winning process for the winning combination ends.

As for the above-mentioned BB, RB and MB, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but if the symbol combination of the winning BB, RB or MB is not stopped and displayed on the active line when all the stop switches 13 are operated, the flag is carried over to the next game and after, the carryover middle role lottery table is set, the symbol combination of the winning BB, RB or MB is stopped and displayed, and the winning process relating to the winning combination is completed. turns off the flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB.

(RT)
In addition, an RT combination lottery table is provided in the combination lottery table. RT is an abbreviation for replay time, which is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay differs in a role lottery from that in a normal role lottery table.

As a concrete usage example of RT, the winning probability of replay may be increased by replacing the losing area of the normal combination lottery table with replay, or the winning probability of replay may be decreased by replacing the replay area of the normal combination lottery table with losing.
Further, although the area of the normal combination lottery table and the replay are the same, the types of replays to be won in the area of the replay may be made different.
The slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of RT combination lottery tables, each of which is configured to shift to another RT state when a predetermined shift condition is satisfied.

The transition conditions for the RT combination lottery table are as follows.
1: When a specific design combination (design combination of bonuses, RT migration pattern combinations) is stopped and displayed 2: When the bonus is elected 3: When the BB, RB, or MB ends the bonus 4: The specified number of pattern combinations (RT migration pattern combination) is stopped and the prescribed number is stopped. When the technique is digested, 5: When BB, RB, or MB ends, when the gaming of the specified number of times is digested, the transition conditions of these RT role lottery tables can be set as appropriate according to the playability.

In this embodiment, there are five RTs in total (non-RTs and RTs 1-3, during bonus operation: see FIG. 42). Non-RT, RT1, and RT2 can stay in a state in which the bonus is not carried over (MB flag is off), RT3 can stay in a state in which the bonus is carried over (MB flag is on), and can stay when the MB flag is on and a symbol combination related to MB is displayed during bonus operation. Hereinafter, non-RT, RT1, and RT2 states are referred to as non-internal (also referred to as bonus non-internal, type 2 BB non-internal, or MB non-internal), RT3 state is internal (also referred to as bonus internal, type 2 BB internal, or MB internal), and the state during bonus operation is described as bonus, but other cases may be provided. In the present embodiment, the process of changing the state of the bonus or RT during the period from when all reels are stopped until the next game is started is described, but the state is not limited to this, and the state may be switched during the game. In other words, it is also possible to directly shift to the bonus without going through the inside. In addition, when 1 type BB is provided, the above-mentioned inside may also be referred to as bonus inside, BB inside, or 1 type BB inside, and the above-mentioned non-inside may also be called bonus non-inside, BB non-inside, or 1 type BB non-inside. Also, the state inside the bonus does not necessarily have to shift the RT, and the RT state in which the bonus was won may be continued. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the inside of the bonus will be described as an expression with RT transition.

Each RT state can be shifted by satisfying any one of the conditions 1 to 5 described above.
For example, when the pattern symbol 01 (FIG. 42-1, FIG. 50) is stop-displayed in the non-RT and RT2 states, it is controlled to shift to RT1, when the re-game 05 (FIG. 42-2, FIG. 46) is stop-displayed in the RT1 and RT2 states, it is controlled to shift to non-RT, and when the re-game 06 (FIG. 42-3, FIG. 46) is stop-displayed in the RT1 state, it is controlled to shift to RT2, and the non-RT, RT1, RT2 states are controlled. When the lottery result is MB and no symbol combination related to MB is displayed (Fig. 42-4, Fig. 46), control is made to shift to RT3, when a symbol combination related to MB is displayed (Fig. 42-5, Fig. 46), control is made to shift to bonus operation, and control is made to shift to non-RT when a predetermined number of payouts (here, 9) is paid out in the bonus operation state (Fig. 42-6).

In addition, not limited to conditions 1 to 6, it may be controlled to shift to non-RT by turning off the MB flag stored in the main memory, the MB flag may be turned off during power-off processing or setting change processing, or these may be combined.

(set number)
The lottery set numbers by the combination lottery means 120 will be described with reference to FIG.
The conditions under which the lottery number can be changed include when the number of bets is different, when the set value is changed, and when a bonus game is in progress. Different numbers of bets refer to three-bet games and two-bet games, and all the lottery numbers can be changed according to the number of bets. The set value is a value for setting the total medal payout expected value determined by the hall manager in the game machine according to the business policy, and is mainly provided in six stages from 1 to 6 (value of set value display data). During the bonus game means that the lottery number can be changed by shifting to the bonus game. In addition, (*) described in RT2 in FIG. 44 is written as (*) in this embodiment because the MB and the replay-A condition device are simultaneously won, but there is no change in the winning probability of MB even in RT2. It is described that the MB and the replay-A condition device are simultaneously won during RT2, but not limited to this, it may be possible to win simultaneously with any of the winning condition devices (15 to 34), or to win alone.

(Replay number change)
As for the lottery numbers, only the lottery numbers related to replay can be changed when the above-described conditions 1 to 5 are satisfied. For example, while the replay probability for non-RT and RT1 is 1/7.3, the replay probability for RT2 and RT3 is set to 1/1.5. As a result, the reduction of medals can be suppressed by playing the game in a state where the replay probability is high, and the amusement can be added to the game.

(Reel control means 130)
The reel control means 130 controls all (three) stopped reels to start rotating (rotation control means 132) when the start switch 12 is operated, or controls to stop all the rotating reels (stop control means 134) when the stop switch 13 is operated. Further, after the lottery result is determined by the role lottery means 120, the pattern control number corresponding to the lottery result of the game is referred to select the stop table corresponding to the pattern control number, the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13 is determined, and the stepping motor 66 is driven and controlled to stop and control each reel at the determined stop position. Further, when the start switch 12 of the game is operated before a predetermined time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has passed from immediately before the start of rotation of the reel of the previous game, the reel control means 130 rotates the reel by controlling the drive of the stepping motor 66 after the predetermined time has passed.

(accelerated processing)
Acceleration processing is processing that is executed from a state in which reel rotation is stopped to a constant speed rotation processing. In the constant-speed rotation process, the stepping motor is moved one step for each interrupt process, but if the constant-speed rotation process is suddenly executed while the reel is stopped, there is a high possibility of stepping out due to insufficient torque. Therefore, an acceleration process is required to gradually rotate the reels. In the acceleration process of the present embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved one step after 50 interrupts are processed, then the stepping motor is moved one step after 30 interrupts are processed, the stepping motor is moved one step after ten interrupts are processed, the stepping motor is moved one step after five interrupts are processed, the stepping motor is moved one step after two interrupts are processed, and then the stepping motor is moved one step after one interrupt process. After that, the process is connected to a constant speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved by one step for each interrupt process.

(Constant speed rotation, stop control activation time)
The reel control means 130 performs constant-speed rotation processing for maintaining the rotation speed of the reel at a constant speed, performs deceleration preparation processing (also referred to as slip control) for moving the reel to the stop symbol position when the stop switch 13 is operated, and performs deceleration control when the reel is moved to the stop symbol position, thereby stopping the reel at a predetermined stop position. In this embodiment, the time during which the reel rotates at a constant speed is set to 80 rotations per minute, and control is performed to stop the reel within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch 13 is operated. In this embodiment, it is possible to pull in up to four symbols including the symbols existing in the display window 4 area when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted. For example, when the replay pattern of number 3 is displayed on the effective line corresponding to the first main reel, when the left stop button is operated to stop, the watermelon pattern of number 6 including the replay pattern of number 3 can be stopped at most.

(Slip control, kicking, retraction)
The slip control is control to rotate the reels to a stop position predetermined by the symbol control number based on the winning combination and the operation timing when the stop switch 13 is not stopped at the timing when the stop switch 13 is operated. The slip control includes kick-off control and pull-in control, and the kick-off control is a control for rotating the reels so as not to stop the symbols different from the winning combination on the effective line when there is a winning symbol not based on the winning combination on the effective line when the stopping of the stop switch 13 is accepted, because it is necessary to pay out medals unlike the symbols related to the winning combination. For example, when there is a combination in which winning is fixed only by the stop display of the symbols attached to the left reel 8a and the win is not won in the combination, when the stop reception is performed on the activation line by the stop reception position, control is performed so that the symbols are not stopped and displayed on the activation line. The pull-in control is a control to rotate the symbols related to the winning combination to a predetermined stop position when the symbols related to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when there is no symbol associated with the prize winning based on the winning combination on the effective line when the stop switch 13 is stopped. For example, when there is a combination for which winning is decided only by the stop display of the symbols attached to the left reel 8a and when the combination is won, the symbols related to the winning combination exist outside the display window 4 and can be stopped and displayed on the effective line from the stop receiving position, control is made to stop and display the symbols on the effective line. note that. The rotation speed of the reel during the slip control is the same as that during the constant speed rotation process, and the process of moving the stepping motor by one step is executed for each interrupt process.

(symbol combinations that do not require technical intervention)
The symbol combination that does not require technical intervention means that even if the stop switch 13 is operated at an arbitrary timing while the reels are rotating, the symbol combination of the winning combination can always be stop-displayed on the effective line. For example, when the symbols related to the winning combination always exist within the draw-in range, even if the stop switch 13 is operated at an arbitrary timing, the symbols related to the winning combination can always be stopped and displayed on the effective line. Hereinafter, the pull-in rate that does not require technical intervention is referred to as PB=1. For example, replays and bells are arranged at intervals of 3 frames for each pattern, so you can always draw them on the effective line.

PB≠1 means that when the stop switch 13 is operated at an appropriate timing while the reels are rotating, the symbol combination of the winning combination can be controlled to stop on the effective line without fail. For example, when there is a place where there is no symbol related to the winning combination in the drawing range, the symbols related to the winning combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line unless the stop switch 13 is operated at an appropriate timing, so it can be said that the drawing rate of the symbols related to such a winning combination is PB≠1. In other words, if the symbols related to the winning combination are separated from at most four symbols including the corresponding symbols in the display window 4 after the stop switch 13 is operated, it cannot be drawn. For example, watermelons and cherries that are not arranged at intervals of three frames cannot be pulled in, and therefore cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

(Small win priority control, bonus priority control)
The priority control is to give priority to symbols related to predetermined conditional device flags and stop and display them on the active line when a plurality of conditional device flags are ON in the game, and the main types include minor combination priority control and bonus priority control.

The minor winning combination priority control is to stop and display the symbols relating to the minor winning combination on the valid line when both the symbols relating to the bonus and the symbols relating to the minor winning combination can be drawn onto the valid line at the stop operation timing when the condition device flag relating to the minor winning combination which cannot be carried over to the next game and the condition device flag relating to the bonus which can be carried over to the next game are on by the special winning combination carry-over means 146.例文帳に追加

The bonus priority control is to stop and display the bonus symbol on the effective line when both the bonus symbol and the minor symbol can be drawn onto the effective line at the stop operation timing when the special symbol carry-over means 146 turns on the conditional device flag related to the minor winning combination which cannot be carried over to the next game and the conditional device flag related to the bonus which can be carried over to the next game. For example, when a conditional device flag for a small winning combination of PB=1 and a conditional device flag for a bonus of PB≠1 are on, when the stop operation timing is the timing at which the symbols related to the bonus can be pulled in, the symbol combination related to the bonus is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

For priority control, when the conditional device flags of replay and small winning combination, replay and bonus, or replay, small winning combination and bonus are turned on at the same time, the following definition can be made as a relationship of stop priority.
Replay > Small role ≧ Bonus (Small role priority control)
Replay > Bonus ≧ Small win (Bonus priority control)
In the present embodiment, a minor combination priority control is adopted, so if a minor combination (a winning-A1 to C6 condition device) is won in the bonus, control is performed to preferentially display the symbol combination related to the minor combination. However, if the winning A1-condition device is won in the bonus and the left stop switch 13a is first stopped at a position where the bell or BAR can be pulled in, the symbol combination BAR related to the minor combination and the bonus is controlled to be pulled in, so that the symbol combination BAR related to the minor combination and the bonus is operated in the correct operation order. Even in such a case, it is possible to draw in either a bonus or a winning combination depending on the operation timing, so that the game can be progressed without getting bored. This is because the number of payouts for the symbol combination including the bell and the symbol combination including the BAR are the same, and therefore the priority for the minor combination is the same.
Not limited to this, even when a bonus and a small combination are won at the same time, the symbol combination related to the small combination may be preferentially displayed.

(Stop position determination table)
The stop position determination table is provided corresponding to the symbol control number determined by the result of the combination lottery by the combination lottery means 120, and predetermines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13.例文帳に追加The stop position determination table corresponds to a BB win stop position determination table, an RB win stop position determination table, an SB stop position determination table, a minor combination win stop position determination table, and a replay win stop position determination table.

The stop position determination table at the time of BB winning is such that when BB is won as a result of a winning combination lottery and only the conditional device flag for BB is on, or when BB is won as a result of a winning combination lottery before the game and the conditional device flag for BB is carried over in an ON state, and when the result of the winning combination lottery in the game is not winning, and the stop switch 13 is operated within the range where the symbols related to BB can be stopped on the activated line, the symbols related to BB are stopped and displayed on the activated line. , the stop position is determined in advance. When the stop switch 13 is operated within a range in which the symbols relating to the BB cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, the stop position is determined in advance so as to stop the symbols suggesting the winning of the BB (BB reach eye). In addition, when BB is won as a result of the winning combination lottery before the game and the conditional device flag related to the BB is carried over in the ON state, when the result of the winning combination lottery is the small winning combination or the replay winning in the game, the small winning combination or the replay is drawn in by the minor winning combination or the replay priority control, but by performing the small winning combination or the replay lead-in control different from that when the BB is not won, the stop result suggesting the BB winning can be stopped and displayed.

The stop position determination table at the time of RB winning is such that when RB is won as a result of a winning combination lottery and only the conditional device flag for RB is on, or when RB is won as a result of a winning combination lottery prior to the game and the conditional device flag for RB is carried over in an ON state, and when the result of the winning combination lottery in the game is not won, and the stop switch 13 is operated within the range where the symbols related to RB can be stopped on the activated line, the symbols related to RB are stopped and displayed on the activated line. , the stop position is determined in advance. When the stop switch 13 is operated within a range in which the symbols relating to the RB cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, the stop position is determined in advance so that the symbols suggesting the winning of the RB are stopped and displayed (RB reach eyes). In addition, when the RB is won as a result of the winning combination lottery before the relevant game and the conditional device flag related to the RB is carried over in the ON state, when the result of the winning combination lottery is the small winning combination or the replay winning in the relevant game, the small winning combination or the replay is drawn in by the small winning combination or the replay priority control, but by performing the small winning combination or the replay drawing-in control different from that when the BB is not won, the stop result suggesting the RB winning can be stopped and displayed.

The stop position determination table for winning a small combination is used when a small combination is won as a result of the lottery, and the stop position is determined in advance so that the symbols related to the small combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line. Further, when the symbol relating to the minor combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line, stop control is performed to suggest that the minor combination has been won (small winning combination).

The replay win stop position determination table is used when a replay win is made as a result of a winning combination lottery, and the stop positions are determined in advance so that symbols relating to the replay are stopped and displayed on the activated line.

(Operation order detection means 138)
The operation order detection means 138 is managed by the main control board 100 and detects in which order the stop switches 13 operated by the player are operated. By transmitting the operation order of the stop switches 13 detected by the main control board 100 to the sub control board 1000, the sub outputs the corresponding image or sound. Specifically, the input port is checked in the interrupt processing of a predetermined period, and when the operation of the predetermined stop switch 13 is detected during the input port check, the detection result is transmitted to the main control board 100 or the sub control board 1000, and the main control board 100 or the sub control board 1000 detects the operation order from the order in which the detection result regarding the operation switch is received. Note that "operation order" is synonymous with "push order".

(Operation order control)
The operation order control is predetermined according to the winning combination, and is to change the stop position of the symbols according to the operation order of the stop switch 13 and control to change the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the set effective line. As a stop operation order pattern, there are six combinations of operation orders for the three stop switches 13 (left center right, left right center, center left right, center right left, right left center, right center left). It is also possible to perform control so that the combination of symbols to be stop-displayed differs according to the winning combination and the order of operation. As will be described later, when multiple winnings are made, the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the active line can be changed according to the order of operation (number priority control, number priority control). It is also possible to vary the number of game media to be paid out according to the order of stop operations.

(Regarding priority control for attracting small wins)
When a small winning combination for which medals are paid out by winning a prize is won alone, and if the symbols related to the small winning combination can be pulled in, control is performed to pull in the symbols related to the small winning combination. When the minor combination is won multiple times, the pattern combinations corresponding to all the winning combinations are controlled to be pulled in when all the combination of symbols corresponding to all the winning combinations can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, but when the small combination and the bonus combination are repeatedly won, either the small combination or the bonus combination is preferentially stopped by priority control, and control is performed so that both are not stopped and displayed on the effective line at the same time.
(Winning judgment means 140)
Winning judgment means 140 is a means for executing judgment processing (also referred to as winning judgment processing) as to whether or not the combination of symbols forming a winning combination has been stopped and displayed on the activated line. It is a means for judging whether or not the stop symbol determined when the operation of the stop switch is abnormal or not, and does not judge by the symbol combination actually stopped on the effective line. After determining that there is no abnormality by a winning determination means 140, winning processing is performed based on the stop-displayed pattern combination, and processing based on loss is performed when it is not determined that the combination of symbols constituting a winning combination has been stopped-displayed on the effective line.

The winning process is a process of giving a privilege to the player based on the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line. Winning processing when a symbol combination based on a small winning combination is stopped is payout of medals based on the stopped symbol combination (payout means 142) and processing for shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Winning processing when the symbol combination based on replay is stopped is giving the right to replay and processing for shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Winning processing when the symbol combination based on the bonus is stopped is displayed. is a process of shifting the game state based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

However, without being limited to this, when the result of the winning determination means 140 is a loss, a winning process based on the losing process may be performed, and as a result of the winning process, a process may be performed in which no privilege is given to the player. Further, as the winning process based on the loss, the game state may be shifted according to the operation mode when the game is lost. For example, when all the stop switches 13 are operated in accordance with a predetermined operation order when losing, a transition to a game state with a different freeze winning probability can be mentioned. In addition, even in the case of an apparent loss due to the omission of a small winning combination, it is possible to carry out a prize winning process such as controlling the transition of the game state such as transition to the RT state without paying out. Furthermore, as a winning process based on a bonus, payout of medals (payout means 142) based on the stop-displayed combination of symbols or giving the right to replay may be added.

The process of shifting the game state is to set a combination lottery table according to the game state to be shifted, to set the reel control according to the game state to be shifted, to set the freeze winning probability according to the game state to be shifted, or a combination thereof.

When the winning symbol combination is determined, the winning determination means 140 transmits to the sub-control board 1000 winning symbol combination information (stopped eye information) stopped and displayed on the active line and winning lottery result information. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 1000 receives these pieces of information, it can use the display device 32, the lamp, or the speaker S to output an effect corresponding to the winning symbol combination information and the combination lottery result information.

(Payout means 142)
The payout means 142 is a means for paying out predetermined medals in accordance with the winning minor winning combination when the winning determining means 140 determines that the winning winning combination has won.

A winning judgment means 140 judges winning on all the effective lines, and when a plurality of symbol combinations based on overlapping winning combinations are stop-displayed on the plurality of effective lines as a result of the judgment, the prize-winning processing is performed for each of the plurality of stop-displayed symbol combinations.

For example, when a small winning combination set as the number of payouts of 2 and a small winning combination set as the number of payouts of 10 are stop-displayed on a plurality of effective lines, the number of payouts based on the small combination set as 2 and the number of payouts based on the small combination set as 10 are totaled, and 12 coins are paid out.

An upper limit is set for the number of coins to be paid out once, and when the upper limit of the number of coins to be paid out is exceeded when the combination of symbols based on a plurality of small wins is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the number of the upper limit is paid out.

For example, when the upper limit of the number of payouts is set to 15 and a small winning combination set to 12 as the number of payouts and a small winning combination set to 10 as the number of payouts are stopped and displayed on a plurality of effective lines, when the total value of the small combination set to 12 and the small combination set to 10 exceeds the upper limit, the payout of 15 which is the upper limit is performed.

In the present embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for small wins, but medals equal to the number of bets may be paid out as winning processing based on replay, or a predetermined number of medals may be paid out as winning processing based on bonuses.

(Program start processing flow)
A program start process executed by the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings regarding the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it performs RAM check processing for setting the interrupt mode, setting the functions of the main CPU, and creating power failure recovery data. In the RAM check process, it is determined whether or not the checksum of all RAMs is normal. If the condition is satisfied, the power failure recovery data is determined to be normal, and if the condition is not satisfied, the power failure recovery data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the states of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal are checked to determine whether or not the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

When the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, the setting change enable flag is set on to indicate that the setting change state is to be entered. Next, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data is normal or whether the recovery is possible. If the power-off restoration data is normal or in a restorable state, then it is determined whether or not a setting changeable flag indicating whether or not the setting can be changed is on. If the setting changeable flag is ON, the process proceeds to setting change processing in FIG. Also, if the power failure recovery data is abnormal or cannot be recovered, the setting change process is similarly performed. Then, after the setting change process, the main game progress shown in FIG. 29 is entered.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not on and if the setting changeable flag is off, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power-off recovery data is abnormal, an error is reported and the progress of the game of the slot machine 1 is stopped to shift to non-recoverable error processing. On the other hand, if the power failure recovery data is normal, the power failure recovery process of FIG. 28 is performed. Then, after the power-off recovery process, the main game progress shown in FIG. 29 is entered. After the power-off recovery process, the game is restarted from the state before the power-off occurred, so the process is not necessarily executed from the beginning of the main game progress.

In the non-recoverable error processing, interrupts are prohibited, and the output of the output port (the output of the sub-control command, the output of the excitation signal to the stepping motor 66, etc.) is cleared. Then, the display (notification) of the error is repeated on the obtained number display 27 .

(Description of power-off processing)
Power-off processing executed in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the power-off process, the output port is cleared, interrupts that are periodically executed are prohibited, and the interrupt disable/enable state at power-off is saved. Next, the used registers are saved and the stack pointer is saved. When the data is saved, the power-off processing completed flag indicating that the power-off processing has been performed is turned on and saved, and the checksum data of all the RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then, writing to the RAM is prohibited, and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the stored stack pointer, presence or absence of a power-off processing completion flag, and whether or not the checksum of all RAM areas is normal are checked in order to determine whether or not appropriate power-supply interrupt processing has been performed by the power-supply interrupt means 144 during power-on processing.

(Description of interrupts)
Interrupt processing that occurs periodically (for example, every 2.235 milliseconds) in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the interrupt process is started, the necessary data stored in the register is compared, and when a power-off detection signal is received, the power-off process is executed, the input port for determining the input of various sensors and operation switches is read, and various timers (freeze period measurement timer, wait period measurement timer, etc.) are measured. Next, port output processing is performed to create and output data (excitation signal to the stepping motor 66, hopper drive signal, etc.) to be output for each output port, and to check whether or not various abnormalities have occurred. Various kinds of abnormalities include whether or not the current set value is a normal value, and whether or not the operation pattern of the input/discharge sensor is normal. Next, an external signal is output to set (on/off control) an external signal such as a bonus signal, an ART signal, a security signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal to be output to an external system such as a hall computer (S304).

Next, in the control command transmission process, if there is a set sub-control command, the sub-control command is output to the sub-control board 1000 to control the lighting of various LEDs, output notification data to be transmitted to the sub-control board such as stop switch operation sound and medal insertion sound, output a signal related to the performance test, restore the register, save the interrupt permission flag to ON, and end the interrupt process.

(Description of power failure recovery processing)
Power-off recovery processing executed in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the power-off recovery process, the stack pointer is recovered, and the output data related to the sub-control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 1000 is recovered. After that, it is determined whether or not the set value data is within the normal range. As a result of the judgment, if it is abnormal (the value is out of the defined range), it shifts to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if normal (within a defined range of values), an unused RAM area is initialized, a periodically executed interrupt is activated, and the input port is read. After that, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, the used registers are restored, and the interrupt prohibition/permission state at the time of power-off is restored, and the power-off recovery processing is completed. It should be noted that when the power failure return processing is completed, the state before the power failure occurs is restored, and if it does not return (at the time of setting change), the game progress main control processing is performed from the beginning.

In the above embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a predetermined timing during the power-off recovery process, but the interrupt may be activated during the program start process.

(Description of main game progression)
A game progress main control process executed by the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

A main control board 100 refers to the value of the freeze performance number stored before the previous game, executes the freeze performance when the stored freeze performance number corresponds to the number to execute the freeze performance, and proceeds to the next processing without executing the freeze performance when the stored freeze performance number does not correspond to the number to execute the freeze performance. The freeze performance number may be configured not to be stored when the freeze performance is not executed, in which case it is determined whether or not the freeze performance number is stored, and if it is not stored, the processing may proceed to the next processing.

Next, when game medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (game medal insertion process). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of bets enabling a game to be executed has been betted, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it is determined whether or not a start lever has been operated, and if it is determined that no bet has been placed, game medals are inserted, or if the bet is stored in credits, operation acceptance of a bet switch (in the case of storage in credits) is waited for. When the number of bets enabling a game to be executed is betted and the start lever is operated (the start switch signal is determined to be on), internal lottery processing is performed, and when the start lever is not operated (the start switch signal is not determined to be on), reception of operation of the start lever is waited for.

In the internal lottery process, the internal lottery random numbers are generated and acquired, and a predetermined arithmetic process is executed to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After determining the winning combination, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and is prepared so that the stop control can be executed even if the operation of the stop switch is accepted immediately after the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch after rotation of the reel is permitted.

Next, it is checked whether the minimum playing time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has passed. When it is determined that the minimum game time has passed (when the value of the minimum game time timer is determined to be 0), the minimum game time is newly set, and when it is not determined that the minimum game time has passed (when the value of the minimum game time timer is not determined to be 0), the value of the minimum game time timer is decremented and then whether or not the minimum game time has passed is checked. This check processing of the minimum game time is executed until it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, and other processing is not executed as the game progress main processing between the processing of determining the minimum game time and the processing of newly setting the minimum game time. As a result, since the minimum game time is not extended by other processes, the game time of the player can be made available as soon as possible. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed without making the player wait.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another process may be executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum playing time and the process of newly setting the minimum playing time. Other processing in this case may be processing for clearing the RWM address, processing for storing other data in the RWM, or other instructions with a short processing time. Since the processing time for these processes is extremely short, the extension of the minimum playing time cannot be experienced by the user. After newly setting the minimum playing time, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed.

In the reel rotation start preparation process, data related to spinning reel stop saved in the previous game is initialized, a stop table to be used in the current game is set, an output for starting rotation of all reels is requested, and a sub-control command (reel rotation start command) indicating the start of rotation of the reels is set.

After the reel rotation start preparation process is completed, a process relating to a freeze effect (for example, a reel effect before reel rotation) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reels are slightly moved or reversely rotated, mainly to indicate the degree of expectation of the winning combination.

When the freeze effect is not executed, or after the freeze effect is executed and the execution of the freeze effect ends, a process of rotating the reels is executed. There are four reel rotation states: an acceleration state, a constant speed state, a stop preparation state, and a stop state. When the reel is rotated, the acceleration state is set. In the acceleration state, the stepping motor is gradually rotated by interrupt processing.

As described above, if the constant-speed rotation process is suddenly executed while the reel is stopped, there is a high possibility of stepping out due to insufficient torque. Therefore, an acceleration process is required to gradually rotate the reels. In the acceleration process of this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved one step after 50 interrupt processes, then moved one step after 30 interrupt processes, then moved one step after ten interrupt processes, moved one step after five interrupt processes, moved one step after two interrupt processes, and then moved one step after one interrupt process. After that, the process is connected to a constant speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved by one step for each interrupt process.

When constant-speed processing is being executed, the value of the above-described rotation failure detection counter is incremented for each interrupt processing to detect rotation failure. Since the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, it is incremented for each interrupt process. However, if the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 180, the value of the rotation failure detection counter may be decremented for each interrupt process, and it may be determined that rotation failure has been detected when the counter reaches 0. In addition, in the constant speed state, the stop acceptance of the stop switch is permitted, and the operation of the stop switch is waited. When the stop acceptance of the stop switch is permitted, the lamp of the stop switch is lit in blue to inform the player that the stop switch is valid (when the stop acceptance of the stop switch is not permitted, the red light is lit). The lighting control of the stop switch lamp may be performed by the main control means or by the sub-control means. Further, as lighting control of the lamps of the stop switches, when executing push order navigation, the lamps of the stop switches may be flashed so that the player can easily recognize the stop switch to be stopped.

Also, a command indicating that the reel has started rotating is transmitted to the sub-control means, and when the sub-control means receives the command, a reel rotation time measurement timer for measuring the rotation time of the reel is set and counting is started. When the value of the reel rotation time measurement timer reaches a predetermined value (time equivalent to 3 minutes), ``Please stop the reels'' (reel stop warning image) is displayed on the liquid crystal to urge the player to rotate the reels. The reel rotation time measurement timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the stop switch operation is accepted), and if there is a reel that is still spinning, it counts again. In this way, the reel rotation time measurement timer continues to be updated until all the reels are stopped. When the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, the reel stop warning image is displayed in front of the push order navigation, so that even when the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, the visibility of the reel stop warning image is ensured and the player can be clearly urged to operate the stop switch. Also, at this time, since the pushing order navigation becomes difficult to see and there is a risk of not knowing which reel to stop, the reel stop warning image may be erased (or the reel stop warning image may be made smaller or moved) by operating a sub switch so that the pushing order navigation can be recognized.

After enabling reception of operation of the stop switch in the game progress main processing, determination processing of reception of operation of the stop switch (reel stop reception check processing) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. When it is determined that one of the stop switches has been operated, stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is executed. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch shifts from the constant speed state to the stop preparation state, and rotates the reel to the target stop position while rotating at the constant speed. Then, when it reaches the target stop position, it shifts to a stop state, and all the four-phase excitations are turned ON to apply the brakes. Here, the target stop position is determined by whether or not the pattern number currently passing and the pattern number stored as the stop position match or not, and when it is determined that they match, the four-phase excitation is turned on as the target stop position. The currently passing pattern number is determined by setting the initial pattern number at the instant when the index sensor detects the index (when the index signal rises), and then setting the next pattern number after the initial pattern number when moving by one pattern by interrupt processing. That is, if a rotation failure occurs on a predetermined reel during reel rotation, and then the predetermined reel is stopped and the rotation failure is not detected (for example, if the index sensor stops before the index sensor detects the index), it may be determined that the symbol number currently passing and the symbol number stored as the stop position match. However, even in this case, winning determination is executed by using not the actually stopped symbols but the symbol number saved at the time of acceptance of the stop, so that the result of the game does not differ from the lottery result.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it is checked whether all the reels are stopped. When all the reels are stopped, the process proceeds to the prize giving process, and when all the reels are not stopped, the process of waiting for stop operation reception of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is executed. Then, after all the reels have stopped, the contents displayed on the status display monitor are updated, and the process proceeds to advantageous section clear counter management processing. Then, a game end check process for updating the RT status, etc. is performed, and a series of main flow of the game progress is finished. Note that the software random number update process may be performed during the period from when the reel starts to rotate until the stop operation is accepted.

(setting change processing)
A setting change process executed in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting change mode is started, it is determined whether or not the current set value is within the normal range, and if it is within the normal range, the current set value is acquired, and if it is out of the normal range, "1" is saved as the set value and the set value "1" is acquired.

After acquiring the setting value, the setting value display data is saved (S1405). After saving the setting value display data, the lighting control is performed by referring to the setting value display data every 5 interrupts by dynamic lighting control which is interrupt processing.

After that, it is determined whether or not the start switch 12 has been turned on from off. When it is determined that the start switch 12 has not turned on from off, it is determined whether or not the setting switch has turned on from off.

Here, when it is determined that the setting switch is not turned on from off, it is determined again whether or not the start switch 12 is turned on from off, and when it is determined that the setting switch is turned on from off, it is determined whether the set value is equal to or larger than the maximum set value (setting 6).

If the set value is not equal to or greater than the maximum value, the current set value is incremented, and if the set value is equal to or greater than the maximum value, the initial value (0) is stored in the current set value and incremented. After incrementing the setting value, the process returns to S1404 to display the updated setting value.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has turned from off to on, set value determination processing is performed, the system waits until it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off, and saves the set value when it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off.

(Advantageous section clear counter management processing)
Advantageous interval clear counter management processing relating to the management of advantageous intervals, among the processing that is mainly executed during game progress, will be described.

First, the current value of the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter before the subtraction is 0 or not. When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, it is next determined whether the advantageous section flag is 1 or not. The advantageous section flag corresponds to the game state. When the advantageous section flag is 1, it is an advantageous section, and when the advantageous section flag is 0, it is a normal section. When the advantageous interval flag is determined to be 1, it indicates that it is decided to shift from the current game to the advantageous interval, so 1500 is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter. 1500 stored in the advantageous section clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is played 1500 times at maximum, the normal section is set from the next game. This is for the purpose of preventing addiction, suppressing the state in which the number of medals continues to increase throughout the day, and not significantly fueling the gambling spirit. As for the timing of setting the advantageous section flag to 1, the advantageous section transition lottery process is performed between the reception of the start switch and the start of rotation of the reels. Advantageous section shift lottery processing is a process passed when a condition device number to be a lottery object is selected, and if the advantageous section shift lottery is won, the advantageous section flag is set to 1, and if the advantageous section shift lottery is not won, the advantageous section flag is set to 0 (normal section). In this embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is a process that is executed only in the normal section. It is also conceivable to execute the advantageous section transition lottery during the advantageous section. In this case, if the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the advantageous section flag is set to 1, but if the advantageous section transition lottery is not won, the current flag is maintained (1 if the advantageous section flag is 1, and 0 if the advantageous section flag is 0). When the advantageous section flag is updated from 1 to 0, it is updated by the parameter initialization processing when the advantageous section shifts to the normal section.

When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before the subtraction is 0 and the advantageous section flag is not 1, the advantageous section clear counter management process is terminated because it is in the normal section.

When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is not 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 after subtraction. When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter after the subtraction is not 0, it is in the advantageous section (other than the final game), so the difference between the number of OUT (payout of the game) and the number of IN (bet of the game) is added to the MY counter. When the value of the MY counter after addition becomes a negative value, the initial value (0) is saved. Here, the MY counter counts an increased value starting from the state in which the number of medals has decreased the most during the advantageous period, and is always 0 while the number of medals decreases during the advantageous period (for example, when the MY counter value is 0 and the game is executed with three bets resulting in a loss, the counter value becomes -3, but when the counter value becomes a negative value, the counter value is corrected to 0). In addition, even if a small winning combination is won by chance and the MY counter reaches 10 (10 small winning combination), the value of the MY counter becomes 0 if the deviation continues for 5 games (three cards are inserted per game). Then, when the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400 (if the value of the MY counter is exactly 2400, the game is not terminated), even if the advantageous interval clear counter is not 0, the advantageous interval is terminated. When the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400, all parameters affecting the performance of the pointing function are updated to 0. The parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games and the game state related to AT. Then, by updating the advantageous section flag to 0, a transition is made to a normal section that is not an advantageous section, and this process ends. When the value of the MY counter is 2400 or less, this process is terminated while maintaining the advantageous section. In this embodiment, if a replay is won during the advantageous period, the MY counter update process is not executed, but the process of determining whether the MY counter exceeds 2400 is passed. In the case of replay, OUT-IN is always 0 because the same number of bets as the inserted number is automatically betted. However, there is a possibility that the value of the MY counter will be updated at a timing different from the original processing due to noise or fraud, so it is determined whether or not the MY counter has reached the upper limit even during replay.

In addition, the advantageous interval can be terminated at any timing for each gaming machine other than the lapse of 1500 games or exceeding MY2400. For example, when winning a final lottery when a predetermined combination is won, or when an arbitrary number of games (less than 1500 games) are executed. Thus, when the advantageous interval is terminated with an arbitrary termination opportunity, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is set to 1 before executing the advantageous interval clear counter management processing (preferably, the processing related to AT is executed after all reels are stopped), so that when the advantageous interval clear counter management processing is executed, the advantageous interval clear counter is 1 before subtraction and 0 after subtraction of the advantageous interval clear counter, and the advantageous interval can be terminated by the advantageous interval clear counter management processing. That is, after setting the value of the advantageous interval clear counter to 1, by subtracting 1 from the counter value, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter becomes 0 and the advantageous interval can be terminated. This makes it possible to perform processing within the same module without using a separate advantageous section termination module when an arbitrary termination condition is achieved.

Further, the advantageous interval clear counter subtraction processing in the advantageous interval clear counter management processing is configured to be executed in any game state in any number of bets (when a plurality of prescribed numbers are set for the gaming machine).

(Direction)
The sub-control means 1101 is provided with an effect control means 1110 and the like, and the effect control means 1110 controls the output of the effect via the above-described display device 32 and the like. A performance control means 1110 selects and outputs a performance by lottery using software random numbers based on the lottery result of a role lottery by a lottery lottery means 120 triggered by the operation of the start switch 12 for each game. Also, with the winning combination as an opportunity, there is a case where an effect called a continuous effect, which is related to a plurality of games, is performed.

The effect control means 1110 selects the contents of the effect based on the lottery result of the role by the role lottery means 120 . In this embodiment, a plurality of types of performance contents are provided in advance, and a performance control means 1110 selects the performance contents by a lottery using a software random number after a lottery for a role is performed by a role lottery means 120 at the start of a game or the like.

In addition, a plurality of types of effects are provided according to not only the result of the combination lottery but also the result of the freeze lottery, the game state (RT state, freeze state), and the like. More specifically, a plurality of types of presentation contents are provided corresponding to bonus wins, small win wins, replay wins, non-win wins, and the like.

The content of the effect determines the timing (when the start switch 12 is operated, when each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) and what kind of effect is output (how the lamp is turned on, blinked, or extinguished, what kind of sound is output from the speaker S, what kind of image is displayed on the display device 32, etc.) as the game progresses.
Then, the effect output control means 1002 controls the effect control means 1110 to output the effect from the effect output device at a predetermined timing according to the selected effect contents.
BL boards 1018a, 1018b, and 1018c are provided for controlling illumination of the lamps from the back side of the symbols in order to make the symbols attached to the reels easier to see.

(Production by player's operation)
Moreover, it is also possible to generate an effect output by the effect control means 1110 according to an operation by the player. For example, it is conceivable that an effect is generated by the effect control means 1110 of the sub control board 1000 based on the sub control command transmitted from the main control board 100 in response to the operation signal of the start switch 12, the stop switch 13, the medal insertion slot 17, the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), the checkout switch, etc. for which the operation signal is input to the main control board 100, or the sub switch 20 and the sub cross key switch 21 for which the operation signal is input to the sub control board 1000. It is also conceivable to directly generate an effect from the sub-control board 1000 according to the sub-input switch operating means 1008 such as.

(Movable object 72)
The game machine has a movable object control means 1010 for controlling a movable accessory in addition to the effect output by the display device 32, the lamp, and the speaker S. Specifically, a shutter is arranged in front of the display device 32, and the operation of the shutter serves to liven up the game. Another example is that the lamp or the speaker S is moved.

(AT)
AT is an abbreviation for assist time, and is also called a notification period, and is a period (hereinafter referred to as notification) for facilitating the winning of a winning combination by a winning combination lottery. In general, the means for notifying in the AT includes the operation timing of the stop switch, the operation order of the stop switch, the operation timing and the operation order, and is also called an operation procedure or an operation mode (hereinafter referred to as an operation procedure). Generally, the target of notification is a symbol combination that can give an advantageous result to the player, among a plurality of symbol combinations included in the winning combination. For example, it is possible to win a symbol combination that gives the most medals in a small combination, and a symbol combination that is more advantageous than the current combination lottery table in replay (higher probability of winning in replay).

(Mainly manage AT)
In the past, when ATs were managed on the sub side, fraudulent acts (such as unauthorized access to the harness that electrically connects the main and the sub, unauthorized access to the sub side's electronic components, etc.) were rampant. By managing the AT on the main side, it is possible to reduce costs and improve security.

(instruction monitor)
During the AT, when announcing the information on the operation procedure for the winning hand, the operation procedure information may be announced using the win number indicator. Specifically, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor for push order A (left, middle, right correct), "2" is displayed for push order B (left, right, middle, correct), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor for push order C (middle, left, right, correct), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor for push order D (middle, right, left, correct), and "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor for push order E (right, left, middle, correct), and push order F ( In the case of right middle left correct), "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With such a configuration, the player can know the correct pressing order by checking the instruction monitor. In addition, since the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it is possible to accurately notify the pressing order even if the sub-control board is illegally modified.

Also, when the indication monitor is used also as the acquired number display, the above-described numbers (1 to 6) may be displayed in the lower digits, and "=" may be displayed as the identifier in the upper digits. In this case, the identifier can be used to determine whether the winning number indicator displays the winning number or the pressing order, so that the player's recognition is not hindered.

Also, when the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a 3-digit 7-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, in the case of push order A (left, middle, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order B (left, right, middle, correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order, C (middle, left, right, correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order, D (middle, right, left, correct), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order E (right, left, middle, correct), "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the case of pushing order F (right middle left correct answer), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to intuitively grasp the pressing order of the instruction monitor, and the player can easily grasp the correspondence relationship between the pressing order and the display of the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the pushing order on the instruction monitor is preferably any timing from when the pushing order is won by an internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch to when the stop switch becomes operable in an advantageous section. With such a configuration, the pressing order can be notified before the player operates the stop switch, so it is possible to prevent the stop operation from being performed in an incorrect pressing order.

(Grouping of alternative roles)
In order to prevent the operation procedure information from being illegally acquired even when the AT is not in progress due to the fraudulent act described above, it is conceivable to classify the information transmitted from the main to the sub at the time of winning a winning combination. Specifically, group information (also referred to as performance group number) indicating that the selected hand is won is transmitted when the selected hand is won during non-AT, and operation procedure information is transmitted in addition to the group information during AT. Thus, on the sub side, it is unclear which operation procedure will display the pattern combination advantageous to the player during non-AT, and since the operation procedure information is transmitted during AT, the operation procedure can be notified by the liquid crystal display device and the operation instruction lamp on the sub side. As a result, the player can easily recognize the operation procedure combination by checking the liquid crystal display device, and can suppress illegal acquisition of the operation procedure information during non-AT.

(Normal section)
A normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When winning the pushing order role in the normal section, a process of transmitting masked information (performance group number) indicating which pushing order was won to the sub-control means is executed. In addition, when winning the pushing order in the normal section, notification of the pushing order (both the correct pushing order and the incorrect pushing order) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, neither the main control means nor the sub-control means notify the pushing order even if the pushing order is won, so that even if the pushing order is won in the normal section, it is always unknown whether the answer is correct or incorrect.

(advantageous section)
An advantageous section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed. Advantageous sections are provided in order to suppress excessive medal acquisition by the AT. If you win the advantageous section transition lottery executed in the normal section, you can shift to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, a lottery to transfer to AT can be held, but in order to suppress the above-mentioned excessive medal acquisition, it is designed so that the advantageous section ends based on certain conditions and shifts to the normal section.
in particular,
1) When 1,500 games have been played from the next game shifted to one advantageous section 2) When 2,400 or more medals are obtained from the next game shifted to one advantageous section 3) When an arbitrary condition is satisfied. By these means, excessive acquisition of medals can be suppressed. Incidentally, the optional condition of 3) includes, for example, when one AT is finished, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, and the like.

(advantageous section ramp)
An advantageous section lamp is provided as information indicating on the main side that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section. As a result, when the player confirms whether or not he/she is staying in the advantageous section, he/she can easily judge by lighting/non-lighting of the advantageous section lamp. Specifically, when the DP of the credit number display 26 is lit, it indicates that the player is staying in the advantageous section, and when the DP of the credit number display 26 is not lit, it indicates that the player is not staying in the advantageous section. The lighting timing of the advantageous zone lamps includes after all reels have stopped, after all reels have stopped, after receiving a bet switch operation, when detecting insertion of the first medal for maintenance, after inserting the second medal for maintenance, after inserting the third medal for maintenance, after receiving the start switch, and after winning a role by internal lottery. In addition, as a condition for always turning on the player, there is a case where the player stays in an advantageous section, and when the operating procedure information for the winning hand is notified and the ball payout rate (maximum ball payout rate) of the information game exceeds 1 (increases). In addition, the advantage zone lamp is lit even in the case of announcing the RT shift pushing order to an RT with a high replay probability although the payout rate does not exceed 1 because a small combination of pushing order is not installed in the specifications. This is to inform the player that the state is advantageous to the player by means of the advantageous section lamp, and is intended to prevent the player from suffering damage due to ignorance of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Note that if the condition for always lighting the advantageous section lamp as described above is not satisfied, there is no problem even if the timing for lighting the advantageous section lamp after the transition to the new advantageous section is arbitrary.

When the advantageous section lamp is lit once, it continues to be lit until the advantageous section ends, and the advantageous section lamp is turned off before accepting the operation of the start switch of the next game after the advantageous section has ended (after stopping all the reels, after accepting the bet switch operation, when detecting the medal inserted for maintenance as the first bet, when detecting the medal inserted for maintenance as the second bet, or when detecting the medal inserted for maintenance as the third bet). By constructing in this way, even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, it may be an advantageous section, and even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the processing related to the instruction function will be executed. As a result, conventionally, if it is a normal section, the game is just a matter of waiting for a shift to an advantageous section, but with the game machine of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that an AT shift lottery or the like is performed even in a normal section, so it is possible to maintain the motivation of the game.

Further, when the advantageous section flag is 1, it is not necessarily an advantageous section. This is because in the game in which the advantageous interval flag is 1 in the normal interval (advantageous interval flag is 0) and the advantageous interval transition lottery is won and the advantageous interval flag is 1, the advantageous interval flag is 1 but the game state is in the normal interval because it has not yet shifted to the advantageous interval. When executing the process for transmitting whether the test signal is an advantageous section or a normal section, if the advantageous section flag is referred to, the signal of the advantageous section is sent even though it is the normal section as described above, so that the signal different from the original state is transmitted. In order to prevent this situation, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is referred to when transmitting either the advantageous interval or the normal interval as the test signal. When the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0, processing for outputting a test signal indicating the normal section is executed, and when the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0 (value of the advantageous section clear counter is 1 to 1500), processing for outputting the test signal indicating the advantageous section is executed. With such a configuration, as the processing for outputting the test signal, it is possible to accurately identify the state simply by judging whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 or not. As described above, even when the advantageous interval is terminated under an arbitrary termination condition, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is set to 1. Therefore, in the processing for outputting the test signal, it is possible to accurately output that it is an advantageous interval even in the game in which the advantageous interval ends.

(Processing related to instruction function)
The processing related to the instruction function is a concept that includes not only AT-related lottery such as AT transition lottery, AT additional lottery, AT end condition update (addition/subtraction of AT game number, addition/subtraction of AT execution notification number), but also processing related to AT state management. The processing related to this instruction function can be executed for a predetermined bet number for each game state, and when a plurality of bet numbers are set as a prescribed number in a certain game state, the processing is executed only when one of the bet numbers is set. For example, when a 2-card bet and a 3-card bet are possible in the middle state of the bonus, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed only in the game with the 3-card bet, and the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed in the game with the 2-card bet. That is, in a game with two bets, the AT lottery is not executed even if the AT lottery target role is won, or the AT game number is not updated according to the progress of the game. In addition, if SB or CB, which ends in one game, is exclusively for 2-bet games, and the game after SB or CB is 2-bet or 3-bet, if the replay is won in SB or CB and the number of bets automatically bet is 2, the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed in the game after SB or CB (3-bet can execute the processing related to the instruction function), so when the replay is won in SB or CB. Set the number of bets to be put in to 3. By doing so, it is possible to execute the processing related to the instruction function even in the game after the replay is won in SB or CB, so that the game that is disadvantageous to the player can be eliminated. It should be noted that, as described above, processing related to the advantageous section is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

(Status display monitor)
A status display monitor is provided on the main control board so that a hall manager can easily confirm whether medals are illegally acquired from the game machine by the above-mentioned fraudulent act or whether the game is being played by a modified game machine different from the performance test passed by the security communication association. The information displayed on the status display monitor includes:
1) Display of the performance of the advantageous section of the gaming machine (identifier: 7P. or 7U.)
2) Continuous role ratio in 6000 games (identifier: 6Y.)
3) Role ratio in 6000 games (identifier: 7Y.)
4) Continuous accessory ratio in total number of games played (identifier: 6A.)
5) Accessory ratio in total number of games played (identifier: 7A.)
are mentioned. 7 segments are used as means for display.

Regarding 1), there are two types of display patterns: the first is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals that the player has easily obtained through the activation of bonuses and other accessories and AT (referred to as "7P" type), and the second is information indicating the ratio of the number of games staying in the advantageous section to the total number of games staying in the normal section and the advantageous section (referred to as "7U" type).

2) to 3) are information indicating a ratio calculated at an arbitrary timing (also referred to as round-slicing calculation) of 6000 consecutive games out of the above-described total number of games played.

5) to 6) are information indicating the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio from when the gaming machine starts playing until the final game.

The display order is set so that the hall manager can easily check the state ratio monitor. Specifically, the display is switched at predetermined intervals such as 1) identifier⇒1) ratio⇒2) identifier⇒2) ratio⇒ 6) ratio⇒1) identifier⇒ . Also, depending on the specifications of the monitor used for display, 1) ⇒ 2) ⇒ 6) ⇒ 1) ⇒ .

In addition to the above display contents, calculate the ratio of the number of staying games during bonus and the number of staying games during non-bonus

<Notification of exceptions in the content displayed on the status display monitor>
To check whether the status display monitor is operating normally,
1) after power-on and for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the setting change process; Desirably, the display contents are patterns that cannot be displayed on a normal status display monitor, such as "0-."

(Interlocking system between slot machine 1 and mobile terminal)
By using the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the mobile terminal owned by the player and the slot machine 1 can be interlocked to output an effect peculiar to the player from the sub-control board 1000, and to perform an interlocking system between the slot machine 1 and the mobile terminal, such as managing the effect information output in the slot machine 1 by a dedicated server.

The sub-control board 1000 is provided with an effect generation flag for managing that predetermined effect information is output according to the progress of the game by the player, and a number-of-games flag for managing that a specific number of games has been fulfilled, holds the flag information when various flag information managed in advance by the slot machine 1 is satisfied by the player, outputs such information so as to be received by the mobile terminal at an arbitrary timing by the player, and receives the output information by a mobile terminal capable of connecting to the Internet, thereby serving as a dedicated server. Communicate and manage various flag information on the server.

More specifically, the sub-control board 1000 holds various generation flags according to the effects and game information generated during the progress of the slot machine 1, such as "winning BB", "playing 10000 games", and "appearing a small win suggesting effect that contradicts the winning small win" as a predetermined condition. Information is output to the outside via a QR code (registered trademark of Denso Wave Co., Ltd.) or infrared rays, and the player receives it with a mobile terminal (mobile phone including smart phone, electronic device such as a mobile PC that can connect to the Internet), which automatically connects to a dedicated server and manages the information based on the player's personal information registered in advance in the server.

When the player plays a game from the next time onward, the player connects to a dedicated server by a portable terminal to issue personal information of the player managed on the server as a password to the portable terminal, and the player inputs the issued password to the slot machine 1 when starting the game from the next time onwards, so that various flag information managed by the server until now is reflected in the slot machine 1.例文帳に追加

A sub-control board 1000 starts holding various flag information when a password is input by a player, and controls to erase the held flags when various flag information is output.

Also, when a player inputs a password to the slot machine 1, by inputting a password containing specific information, for example, the character's clothes can be changed to arbitrary clothes selected by the player, or the sound source output during BB can be changed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the password input by the player is cited as a trigger for the slot machine 1 to hold various flags, but the trigger is not limited to this. For example, if a player operates the sub button when starting a gaming, the sub -control board 1000 will temporarily retain various flags, and if the player wants to manage various flags that have occurred due to the "special production" due to the progress of the gaming, operate the sub button as before. It is also conceivable that various flags holding various flags holding on the sub control board 1000 by reading information such as QR code output from Tit Machine 1 on a mobile device. According to this specification, when a player leaves the seat after finishing the game without outputting information from the slot machine 1 although the player temporarily sets various flags to be held, the various flags can be held until the next power-off processing or setting change processing is performed, or can be automatically deleted when the game is not played for a predetermined time.

In addition, the information output from the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above information, and it is also possible to output, for example, game history information at the same time. The history information includes information such as "number of games", "number of BB/RB", "number of AT/ART", "number of medals", etc. from the time when the password is input by the player (or when various flags are temporarily held by operating a sub-button) to when the various flags are erased by external output of information. Various information managed by the slot machine 1 can be output, including information such as "Was it won?"

At that time, if the QR code output from the slot machine 1 is not enough for one data, it is possible to divide it into a plurality of data and output it, and the communication means is not limited to issuing infrared rays or QR codes, but it is also possible to appropriately adopt general communication technology actually used in various fields such as wired and wireless LAN.

<First Embodiment>
A configuration applicable to the first embodiment, in which the termination condition of the advantageous interval is varied according to the gaming state in which the advantageous interval transition lottery is won, will be described below.

First, FIG. 32 shows a symbol arrangement in the first embodiment, FIGS. 33 to 35 show a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the winning combination lottery in the first embodiment, FIGS. 36 to 38 show a list of symbol combinations formed by each winning combination, and FIG. In the first embodiment, detailed description of FIGS. 32 to 39 is omitted.

The RT state transition conditions and replay winning probability will be described with reference to FIG. RT0 is a state set after the main RWM is initialized at the time of shipment from the factory or when the payout of game medals exceeds 210 during operation of the 1st type BB, and shifts from RT0 to RT1 when the 1st type BB is won. RT1 is a state (sometimes referred to as inside of 1st class BB) that is set at the time of winning 1st class BB, and shifts from RT1 to general BB based on display of a symbol combination relating to 1st class BB on an effective line.

The BB general state is one of the states in which the 1 type BB is in operation, the symbol combination relating to the 1 type BB is displayed, the state is shifted to the 1 type BB operation, and the state is set when the 1 type BB is in operation and the RB is not won. Based on the fact that RB is won in BB general, the game shifts from BB general to inside RB (shifts when the symbol combination related to RB is not stopped and displayed). "Inside RB" is a state set when the type 1 BB is in operation and in the RB winning state, and when the symbol combination related to RB is displayed, the game shifts from inside RB to during RB operation. RB in operation is a state set in the case of 1 type BB in operation and RB in operation, and transition from RB in operation to general BB on the basis of 12 games played or 8 wins during RB operation.

In this way, there are three states that can be set during BB operation: BB in general, RB inside, and RB in operation. In addition, while the BB is in operation, if the payout of game medals during the operation of the type 1 BB exceeds 210 in addition to the above conditions, the process shifts to RT0.

The sum of replay winning probabilities inside RT0, RT1, and RB is set to 9188/65536, and the types of replays to be won are also set to be the same. During BB in general, the total replay winning probability during RB is set to 0/65536. In other words, the replay indicates that you will not win.

In the first embodiment, the replay winning probabilities have been described for RT0, RT1, BB in general, RB inside, and RB in operation. For example, the sum of the replay winning probabilities may be set to 9188 for RT0, 8978 for RT1, 4 during general BB, 9187 during RB internal, and 0 during RB operation, or the normal replay A winning probability may be made different.

Next, the L mode number will be explained. The L mode number is a number saved (stored) in a predetermined storage area controlled by a main control board, and the saved value differs depending on the RT state when winning the advantageous section transition lottery, and the performance during stay in the advantageous section can be varied according to the saved value. Specifically, when winning the advantageous section transition lottery while staying in RT0, the L mode number does not change (maintains 0).

When 0 is saved (stored) as the L mode number, the maximum number of staying games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games, and the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is set to 1400 games. That is, when 1400 games are continuously consumed in the non-AT period, the AT period shifts to the AT period, and thereafter the AT period of up to 100 games can be executed.

When the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is won during RT1 stay, 1 is saved as the L mode number, and when 1 is saved as the L mode number, the maximum number of staying games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games, and the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is set to 500 games. That is, if the non-AT period is played continuously for 500 games, the AT period shifts to the AT period, after which the AT period of up to 1000 games can be executed.

When winning the advantageous section transition lottery while staying in the RB, 2 is saved as the L mode number, and when 2 is saved as the L mode number, the maximum number of staying games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games, and the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is set to 500 games. When 2 is stored in the L mode number, it is configured to shift to the normal section after 500 consecutive non-AT periods are played.

When the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won during the BB general or during the stay in the RB operation, 3 is saved as the L mode number, and when 3 is saved as the L mode number, the maximum number of staying games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games, and the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is set to 1200 games. That is, when 1200 games are continuously consumed in the non-AT period, the AT period shifts to the AT period, and thereafter the AT period of up to 300 games can be executed.

Thus, in this example, when 0, 1, and 3 are saved in the L mode number, the effective ceiling is set. On the other hand, if the L mode number 2 is set, the real ceiling is not set.

The stored L mode number may be configured such that (1) 0 is set at the timing of the end of the advantageous section (shift to the normal section), and then the L mode number corresponding to the staying gaming state is set at the timing of shifting to the advantageous section, and (2) the saved L mode number is maintained at the timing of the end of the advantageous section (shifting to the normal section), and the L mode number corresponding to the staying gaming state is set at the timing of shifting to the advantageous section thereafter.

Next, the conditions for starting and ending the advantageous section will be described. The conditions for starting the advantageous section are configured such that when a small winning combination involving the payout of game medals is won during a normal section in RT0, RT1, BB general or inside RB, the advantageous section shifting lottery is performed, and the advantageous section shifting lottery is not performed for the minor winning combination during the operation of the RB. In this embodiment, when the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, the transition to the advantageous section is performed with a probability of 100%, but this is only an example, and the transition may be made with a probability of less than 100%.

When the L mode number 0, the L mode number 1, and the L mode number 3 are set, the end conditions of the advantageous section are determined to shift to the non-AT period during the AT period after shifting to the AT period, and then terminate the advantageous section at the timing of shifting to the non-AT period. In addition, when the L mode number 2 is set, as described above, when the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is completed, the game shifts to the normal section (ends the advantageous section). Note that these are only examples, and can be changed without any problem. For example, when the L mode number 2 is set, if the configuration is such that the AT period can be shifted to before the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is completed, it may be configured to be able to shift to the normal section when the conditions for ending the AT period are satisfied.

Next, the relationship between game characteristics and setting of L mode numbers in the non-AT period and the AT period will be described. A player plays a game with RT0 or RT1 in a non-AT period, displays one kind of BB symbol combination when he/she acquires the right to the AT period, and plays the game while the BB is in operation during the AT period. In particular, since the replay probability is higher inside the RB than during the BB in general and during the RB operation, it is advantageous for the player to consume the AT period inside the RB. During the AT period, one set of 30 games of AT can be executed, and by the end of the first set's AT period,
(1): Win the AT continuation lottery (2): End the BB operation before completing 30 games By satisfying one of the conditions, you can acquire the right of the second set of AT period.

"(1): Winning the AT continuous lottery" means that the lottery is drawn according to the lottery result of each game in 30 games, with a probability of 1% when winning-A1 to winning-B12, winning-C1 to winning-C3 is 5%, winning-C4 is 30%, winning-E1 to winning-E6 is 6%, winning-F and winning-G win the AT continuous lottery with a probability of 50%.

"(2): Terminate BB operation before completing 30 games" means that the termination condition during BB operation ends when 210 game medals are paid out. Therefore, if 210 game medals are paid out before 30 games are completed while staying in either BB general state, inside RB or during RB operation, the AT continuation lottery will be won.

As described above, it is possible to change the performance of the advantageous section according to the game state (set L mode number) in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won, and the player can appropriately select the game method to expand the game property. In this embodiment, it is optimal for the player to play in RT1 during the non-AT period and within the RB during the AT period. That is, during the non-AT period, when winning the 1st type BB, it is preferable to proceed with the game by staying in RT1 without stop-displaying the symbol combination related to the 1st-type BB, and during the AT period, when winning the RB, it is preferable to progress the game by keeping the symbol combination related to the RB inside the RB without stop-displaying it.

As described above, the timing at which the right of the AT period can be acquired (the timing at which the AT continuation lottery can be won) is determined by the lottery result according to the role lottery result between 30 games, or whether the BB operation is terminated before 30 games are completed.

As described above, the timing of acquiring the rights for the AT period has been explained. When the timing of the advantageous interval transition lottery is RT1 (the L mode number is 1), the game is shifted to the advantageous interval by completing 500 games at the maximum in the non-AT period, and when shifting to the advantageous interval during the inside of the RB (L mode number 2), the maximum 500 games are played in the non-AT period and the operation is shifted to the normal interval.

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if the AT continuation lottery is not won during the AT period and inside the RB, the game shifts to the non-AT period and the normal section inside the RB. As an example of the operation in the case of not winning the lottery for acquiring the right of the AT period executed in each game, 2 is saved as the L mode number when winning the advantage zone transition lottery in the normal zone in the RB. After that, by satisfying the end condition during BB operation, it shifts to RT0, wins 1 type BB and does not stop displaying the symbol combination related to 1 type BB, it shifts to RT1, 500 games are played in the situation where the L mode number is saved at 2 (500 games are played in total for RT0 and RT1), it shifts to the normal section during RT1, and by winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the L mode number 1 is saved. migrate. That is, the player can recognize that he or she has reached the so-called ceiling by completing about 1,000 normal states (non-AT periods), including 500 games in which 2 is stored as the L mode number, about 1 game from the normal section to the advantageous section, and 500 games in which 1 is stored as the L mode number.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in a gaming machine in which the maximum number of staying games in an advantageous section is set to 1500 games, a series of game progressions of about 1000 games in the non-AT period and about 1000 games in the AT period in total of about 2000 games can be designed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, an example of a method for storing L mode numbers according to this embodiment will be described in detail. It should be noted that the processing in the same figure is processing executed by the main control board.

First, it is determined whether or not it is in non-RT mode. If it is not RT (YES), the process ends without saving the L mode number. That is, the L mode number is maintained at 0. Also, if it is not non-RT (NO), it is determined whether or not it is in RT1. If it is in RT1 (YES), 1 is saved as the L mode number, and this processing ends. Also, if it is not in RT1 (NO), it is determined whether or not the RB condition device has been activated before the previous game, in other words, whether or not it is in the RB. If it is inside the RB (YES), 2 is saved as the L mode number, and this processing ends. Also, if it is not inside the RB (NO), 3 is saved as the L mode number, and this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, the L mode number stored differs depending on the game state at the time of transition to the advantageous interval, but the state in which the L mode number 1 is stored is called the "second advantageous interval", the state in which the L mode number 2 is preserved is called the "first advantageous interval", the state in which the L mode number 3 is preserved is called the "third advantageous interval", and the state in which the L mode number 0 is preserved is called the "fourth advantageous interval".

Regarding the transition to the AT period, it has been explained that the non-AT period is transitioned to the AT period by completing the number of games corresponding to the L mode number, but the probability of transition to the AT period may be changed for each set value and each combination lottery result according to the L mode number. For example, the AT period transfer probability at the time of the L mode number 2 of the set value 1 may be lower than the AT period transition lottery probability at the time of the L mode number 2 of the set value 6, and the AT period transfer probability setting value is the most common AT period transfer probability setting at the time of L mode number 0 and L mode number 3. The probability may be low, and it may fluctuate for each set value or the role lottery result, but it is desirable to have a lower AT period transfer probability than L Mode number 1 and L mode number 2.

<Second embodiment>
A configuration related to a reel unit (sometimes simply referred to as a reel) applicable to the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

The reel unit of the second embodiment is composed of a reel base and a reel sheet wound around the reel base.

Also, the reel sheet is composed of three areas: a non-transmissive silver-stopped area, a white area having a higher transmittance than the silver-stopped area, and a non-stopped area having a higher transmittance than the white area.

The upper part of FIG. 42 shows the inside of the lamp house housing the LEDL, LEDC, and LEDR in the reels, and the lower part of FIG. 42 shows the state where the reel sheets are attached.

FIG. 43 shows the area where the reel sheet is attached to the sheet attaching surface, and shows the reel sheet surface structure having the pattern area and the background area.

FIG. 43 shows a general reel sheet back surface structure showing areas that transmit light and areas that reflect light when light is emitted from each LED. On the back surface of the reel sheet, the silver stop area corresponds to the background area, and the white stop area corresponds to the pattern area. The light from each LED is emitted toward the reel sheet, but when the light is applied to the silver-stopped area, the light is totally reflected, so the light does not pass through the silver-stopped area. Further, when light is applied to the white stop area, unlike the silver stop area, it does not undergo total reflection, and the luminance of the irradiated light decreases and passes through the white stop area.

Since the background area corresponds to the silver stop area and the pattern area corresponds to the white stop area, the light emitted from each LED can emphasize and brighten only the pattern area. However, in the case of a general reel sheet, the brightness of the light emitted from each LED may be weakened by passing through the white stop area.

It is conceivable to dispose LEDs in the space between the reels and the display window so that the player can easily see the patterns (pictures) attached to the reel sheets. This allows the entire reel to be illuminated from the outside. The larger the number of LEDs to be arranged, the brighter the light. At that time, it is desirable to arrange the LEDs at positions closer to the reel side than to the display window side. When the reels are arranged at a position close to the display window, when the reels are directly irradiated with light, the light is reflected and the player sees white, which may make it difficult to visually recognize specific symbols during the game.

Instead of the reel structure described above, it is conceivable that the background area corresponds to the white stop area and the pattern area corresponds to the silver stop area. By doing so, the background area occupies a larger proportion of the reel sheet, and the background area is arranged so as to cover the pattern area, so that the brightness of the entire reel can be maintained at a high level.

However, by setting the background area to the white stop area, the separation part between the reels (in other words, the sheet attachment surface) is also the white stop area, but it is also the sheet attachment surface, so that the light from each LED does not reach, and a dark line appears when viewed from the player. As a result, when the player tries to stop the pattern attached to the reel sheet in order to stop the rotating reel, the black line floats so that the player may lose the desire to play the game, and the overall balance of the pattern design attached to the developer's sheet may be lost.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43(a), a new no-stop (pattern) area is provided on the reel sheet, which is different from the white stop (design) area and the silver stop (background) area. In addition, FIG.43(a), FIG.43(b), FIG.43(c) is only an example.

The non-stop area is an area where silver stop or white stop is not applied on the rear surface of the reel sheet. By providing this region, it is possible to irradiate the outside of the house lamp with light from each LED without lowering the irradiation luminance of the light from the white stop region.

A part of the no-stop area shown in FIG. 43(b) is arranged at a position overlapping with the sticker sticking surface, and the no-stop pattern shown in FIG. 43(c) is arranged at a position not overlapping with the sticker sticking surface. When a portion of the non-stop region overlaps the sticker-affixed surface, the light emitted from each LED passes through part of the non-stop region, but does not pass through the portion overlapping the sticker-affixed surface. When arranged in this manner, the brightness in the space is increased, but a part is not included in the irradiation range, so that a part of the non-stop area looks black when viewed from the player, which may reduce the visibility and design of the reel from the player's point of view.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(c), by arranging the non-stop region in a region that does not overlap with the sheet attachment surface, the entire non-stop region allows the light emitted from each LED to pass through, thereby preventing the appearance of black lines.

As a result, the brightness of the light from each LED according to the conventional structure can be provided to the player without lowering it as much as possible, and the effect of providing a reel sheet excellent in design not only in the pattern area and the background area can be provided.

As a derivative plan, the pattern used in the pattern area may be included in the pattern area in consideration of the design used in the gaming machine. The pattern arranged in the pattern area may be a non-stop area like the pattern area, or may be a white stop area. By setting the pattern arranged in the design area as the non-stop area, the specific design is emphasized more. Among the symbols on the reels, the specific symbol at this time is desirably used as a relatively large symbol (such as white 7) or as an index symbol when the player performs so-called eye pressing. By using the pattern arranged in the design area as the white stop area, the pattern area can be emphasized.

Furthermore, the number of pattern areas may be different between index patterns and non-index patterns. As described above, the index pattern is a relatively large pattern, and the area in which the pattern area can be arranged is small. In other words, the patterns other than the index patterns are relatively small, and the area in which the pattern area can be arranged is large. This can be used as a reference when a player presses a specific pattern in accordance with the arrangement and size of the pattern pattern when pressing other than the indicator pattern.

Further, the liquid crystal effect provided in the game machine and the lighting mode of each LED may be interlocked. Specifically, it is conceivable that after the player operates all the stop switches and all the rotating reels are stopped, the respective LEDs are turned on in turn from the lower stage to the upper stage, and after the LEDs on the upper stage are lit, the pattern of the same system is displayed from the lower area of the liquid crystal corresponding to the reel. At this time, the color of the displayed pattern is preferably the same color as or similar to the color projected in the pattern area. Moreover, it is more preferable to perform the effect during a period (so-called omen) in which an AT or a big win can be expected.

Further, each LED may be arranged at a position in the vertical direction of the pattern area or at a position in the vertical direction of the pattern area.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a configuration related to scenario management during an advantageous section, which is applicable to the third embodiment, will be described in detail below.

The purpose of the third embodiment is to prevent the player from acquiring excessive game medals and suppress the gambling spirit of the player by managing in advance the expected value of acquiring game medals while staying in the advantageous section.

In the third embodiment, when winning the advantageous section shift lottery (when it is decided to newly shift from the normal section to the advantageous section), one of scenario numbers 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 44 is selected. The maximum number of games that can be stayed in one advantageous section (maximum number of games that can be stayed continuously) is set to 1480. Basically, a new scenario number is not selected until 1480 games are played.

The scenario number described in FIG. 44 is a number stored in the main RWM when winning the advantageous zone transition lottery, and is configured to select one of scenario numbers 1 to 6. Note that the period is the number of games with 37 games as one unit. The values of "0" and "1" corresponding to each scenario number and each cycle, "0" indicates a non-AT period and "1" indicates an AT period. For example, when the scenario number "1" is selected, "0" is stored in the first cycle, which indicates that the first cycle is a non-AT period (in other words, AT is not executed for 37 games from the 1st game to the 37th game). When the scenario number 1 is selected, the 25th cycle (889th game) stores "1", which indicates that it is the AT period.

When the scenario number 1 is selected, since the 1st cycle to the 24th cycle are "0", it is a non-AT period, and the game medals decrease. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the expected number of game medals to be obtained during the non-AT period is -54. That is, since game medals decrease during the non-AT period, it is designed to decrease 54 game medals per cycle. Also, since the 25th cycle to the 39th cycle is "1", it is an AT period and is a section in which game medals can be increased. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the number of game medals expected to increase during the AT period is 100. That is, since the number of game medals increases during the AT period, it is designed to increase the number of game medals by 100 per cycle. The expected number of game medals to be obtained is the average value of all game states in the advantageous section. It should be noted that the numerical values in the figure may be applied only to a predetermined game state in the advantageous section.

Considering the expected number of game medals to be obtained during the non-AT period and the AT period, the expected number of game medals to be obtained can be calculated as 150 when winning the advantageous section transition lottery, selecting scenario number 1, and executing 1480 games in the advantageous section. In this embodiment, the maximum number of games that can be played in one advantageous section is designed to be 1480 games, but the number is not limited to this and may be 1500 games. In other words, when scenario number 1 is selected, the expected number of medals to be obtained is 150, so the player is more likely to benefit from playing the game in the advantageous section in which scenario number 1 is selected. The expected number of game medals to be obtained may be the average value of all game states in the advantageous section, or may be applied only to a predetermined game state (the same applies to other scenarios).

Similarly, the expected number of game medals to be obtained when playing 1480 games in scenario numbers 2 to 5 is as follows.

When any one of scenario numbers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 44 is selected, the game medals close to the expected number of game medals to be obtained (the number of owned medals) increases or decreases by playing the game from the start of the selected scenario number (first game) to the end of the selected scenario number (1480th game).

However, if the AT period is predetermined, a player who has a lot of experience (knowledge) playing the game of this specification can easily specify the current scenario number depending on which cycle the AT period occurs. In particular, scenario number 4 has a negative expected value for winning game medals, so if it is determined that scenario number 4 is selected, the player is more likely to leave the seat.

In order to solve the above problem, scenario number 6 is prepared in which the non-AT period and the AT period are not predetermined in each period. Scenario number 6 is a scenario number that determines whether or not a win is made during the AT period according to the result of the lottery. By providing the possibility that scenario number 6 will be selected, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the expected value for winning game medals is a positive scenario number or a negative scenario number.

In this embodiment, scenario number 6 determines whether or not to shift to the AT period by a random lottery (according to the result of the role lottery) until the 24th cycle. Specifically, when it is determined by random lottery in the second period that the AT period is started, the third period is the AT period. In this way, in Scenario 6, when staying in a predetermined cycle, it is determined by the lottery result of each game whether to use the AT period or the non-AT period in the next cycle of the predetermined cycle. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the scenario determined by whether it is the AT period or not, and the game can be progressed while having expectations for the arrival of the AT period.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the expected value of winning game medals when scenario number 6 is selected is -700. Also, in scenario number 6, if the AT period is entered and then the non-AT period is entered, the current advantageous section may be terminated (the current advantageous section will be terminated and a new scenario number determined).

Next, the scenario number selection probability will be described. The "selection probability" in FIG. 44 indicates a value that makes the ratio of winning the advantageous section transition lottery and selecting the scenario number different for each set value. R1 has a set value of 1, R2 has a set value of 2, R5 has a set value of 5, and R6 has a set value of 6, exemplifying a case in which four stages of set values are provided. The numbers below R1, R2, R5, and R6 indicate the scenario number selection probability in %. For example, with a set value of 1, scenario number 1: 10%, scenario number 2: 3%, scenario number 3: 2%, scenario number 4: 20%, scenario number 5: 5%, and scenario number 6: 60%.

At setting value 1, scenario number 3 has the lowest selection ratio and scenario number 6 has the highest selection ratio. At setting value 6, scenario number 4 has the lowest selection ratio and scenario number 1 has the highest selection ratio. In general, a design in which the expected value of game medal acquisition is negative and a design in which the expected value of game medal acquisition is positive are often provided for each set value.

Scenario number 6 shown in FIG. 44 is different from scenario number 1 to scenario number 5 described above, and is a scenario in which whether or not to win the AT lottery is determined based on the winning lottery results and the like until the 24th cycle. The reason why the scenario number 6 is prepared is that, in the case of the patterns from the scenario numbers 1 to 5 described above, there is a period in which the player does not win when playing the game, and the player is likely to stop the game when the period reaches the period. Therefore, by providing the scenario number 6, the player can be more interested in guessing the current scenario number.

The game medal acquisition expected value of scenario number 6 is designed to be negative. In the present embodiment, the setting value 1 has the highest probability of selecting scenario number 6, which has a negative expected value for winning game medals, and the setting value 6 has the lowest. Furthermore, the setting value 6 has the highest selection probability of the scenario number 1 in which the game medal acquisition expected value is positive, and the setting value 1 has the lowest. In other words, when the player is playing the game, it is possible to increase the interest in the game while guessing the setting value by the change of the scenario number.

Scenario numbers 1 to 5 are designed to be "0" at the start (1st to 3rd cycles) and at the end (40th cycle). This is because the number of game medals that can be acquired while staying in one advantageous section is prevented from becoming excessive. For example, although not shown, if the AT period corresponding to the selected scenario number is from the 16th cycle to the 40th cycle, assuming that 100 game medals can be obtained in one cycle, about 2400 game medals can be obtained. Assuming that 100 game medals can be obtained in one cycle when the AT period corresponding to the selected scenario number is from the 1st cycle to the 20th cycle when winning the lottery for the transition to the next advantageous interval after the 40th cycle is completed, about 2000 game medals can be obtained. From the player's point of view, the situation is such that 2,400 and 2,000 medals can be obtained consecutively, so there is a high possibility that the player will get too many game medals and become absorbed in the gaming machine. Also, although the maximum number of game medals that can be obtained in one advantageous section is 2400, there is a risk that the maximum number of game medals that can be obtained will be intentionally increased.

Therefore, even if scenario numbers 1 to 5 are selected, it is possible to avoid a situation in which game medals are excessively obtained continuously across advantageous sections. Furthermore, since the AT period (in other words, the expected number of game medals to be obtained) is determined in advance as in scenario numbers 1 to 5, it is possible to control excessive acquisition of game medals and consumption of excessive game medals, and to provide a game machine that can expect a relatively stable design that does not depend only on probability. That is, by setting the cycle at the start (from the 1st cycle to the 3rd cycle) and the cycle at the end (40th cycle) of the scenario as a non-AT period, even when scenario numbers advantageous to the player are continuously selected, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining too much game medals and becoming absorbed in the game machine.

In the present embodiment, it is conceivable that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won and the advantageous zone lamp is not lit until at least the scenario number is shifted to the AT period, but when scenario numbers 1 to 5 are selected, the selected scenario number is maintained until 1480 games are played. In other words, once the advantageous section lamp is turned on (shifted to the AT period), the advantageous section lamp cannot be turned off until the advantageous section ends. As a result, for example, in the advantageous interval in which scenario number 2 is selected, the timing at which the advantageous interval lamp lights is the start timing of the fourth cycle. In this way, if the advantageous section lamp is designed to light up in a specific period, there are no options for scenario number 1 and scenario number 5, and if the 5th period is a non-AT period, it will be detected that it is scenario number 4 (with a negative expected value for winning game medals), so the player is more likely to leave the seat.

Based on the above, it is desirable to turn on the advantageous section lamp from the next game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won and one of the scenario numbers is selected, and to keep lighting the advantageous section lamp until the selected scenario number is completed. This makes it difficult for the player to identify which scenario number it is, so that the player can avoid unintentionally leaving the seat.

Next, selection of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 44 will be described. In this embodiment, when the scenario number 1 is selected, the rendering configuration 1 is selected, when the scenario number 2 is selected, the rendering configuration 2 is selected, when the scenario number 3 is selected, the rendering configuration 3 is selected, when the scenario number 4 is selected, the rendering configuration 4 is selected, when the scenario number 5 is selected, the rendering configuration 5 is selected, and when the scenario number 6 is selected, one of the rendering configuration 1 to the rendering configuration 5 is selected. '0' described in the effect configuration indicates that the precursor effect is not performed, '1' indicates that the present precursor effect indicating the case where it is decided to shift to the AT period is executed, and '2' indicates that the fake precursor effect indicating the possibility of shifting to the AT period is executed although the shift to the AT period is not performed. In other words, in the next cycle, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts whether or not the AT period will come.

As for the performance configuration 6, since one of the performance configurations 1 to 5 is selected when the scenario number 6 is selected as described above, a game machine can be provided in which a player can play a game while guessing which scenario number is the current scenario number based on the generation timing of the premonitory performance by the performance configuration.

As described above, the scenario management and effect configuration when shifting to one advantageous section have been described, but the design may be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the scenario numbers are designed to be 1 to 6, but the number of selectable scenarios may be increased.

In this embodiment, the selection ratio of the scenario numbers is designed to vary according to the set value, but the selection ratio may be increased stepwise so that scenario numbers 1, 2, 3, and 5 have the lowest selection probability for scenario numbers 1, 2, 3, and 5, and the highest selection ratio for set value 6.

In this embodiment, in Scenario No. 6, the current advantageous interval ends when the AT period is entered at least once and then the AT period is entered non-AT period. For example, if the expected value of winning game medals in scenario number 6 is positive, the game is designed so that it is easier for the player to stay in scenario number 6 to play the game. Also, regarding scenario number 6, it is conceivable that the condition for shifting to the non-AT period after shifting to the AT period is until the number of games is managed and the continuation rate lottery is not won.

In this embodiment, the performance configuration is designed to select any one of the performance configuration 1 to the performance configuration 5 when the scenario number 6 is selected, but when the shift to the AT period is determined by random lottery, the current performance configuration 0 is rewritten to 1 so that the player can recognize that the omen has started. Also, when it is decided to shift to the AT period, it is conceivable not to rewrite from the case where the current effect configuration is 0.

Further, in scenario number 6, the probability of winning the AT lottery (it is determined that the next period will be the AT period) may be varied for each set value. For example, the set value 6 may be configured such that the scenario number is more likely to be selected than the other set values, while the winning rate of the AT lottery for the scenario number 6 is higher than the other set values.

It should be noted that the number of types of scenario numbers, the number of games in one cycle, the allocation of AT periods, and the like described above are merely examples, and it should be noted that there is no problem even if they are changed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, in the fourth embodiment, game characteristics related to RT fluctuation at the end timing of MB and the end of CB will be described.

FIG. 45 describes the reel arrangement in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 46 shows a list of symbol combinations that can be won in the role lottery result in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 47 shows a list of winning combinations in the role lottery result in the fourth embodiment, and FIG.

In the fourth embodiment, BB and MB can be won as bonuses. The CB has no symbol combination, the CB game starts when the game starts during the MB operation, and the CB game ends when the game ends during the MB operation.

FIG. 49 shows an RT transition diagram in the fourth embodiment. The non-RT state is an RT state in which a game can be played by transitioning to the factory shipment, after the main RWM is initialized, or when the result of 50 games is obtained in RT2. As will be described later, the non-RT is also referred to as the withdrawal zone in the fourth embodiment.

RT1 is an RT state that can be shifted when the winning 05, winning 09, and replay 02 symbol combinations are displayed. As will be described later, RT1 is also referred to as a normal game in the fourth embodiment.

RT2 is an RT state that can be shifted to when the MB ends and the winning 05 and winning 09 symbol combinations are not displayed. As will be described later, RT2 is also referred to as a first advantageous game in the fourth embodiment.

RT3 is an RT state that can be shifted to after BB ends. As will be described later, RT3 is also referred to as a second advantageous game in the fourth embodiment.

Inside the BB is an RT state that can be shifted to when the BB is won and the BB symbol combination is not displayed in the game. As will be described later, the inside of the BB is also referred to as an inside game in the fourth embodiment.

The BB operation is an RT state that can be shifted when the BB symbol combination is displayed. As will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the BB operation is also referred to as a game during the BB.

The replay winning probability in each RT state will be explained. In the fourth embodiment, the prescribed number can be selected from 2 and 3 (only 3 prescribed numbers during BB operation and MB-B operation), and according to the prescribed number of each RT state, the reference destination of the lottery table and the number of game medals to be paid out are different.

In the fourth embodiment, during the operation of the MB, it is a game in which the symbol combinations relating to all the small wins can be displayed regardless of the win lottery result. For example, even if a result of a winning combination lottery is obtained during MB operation, the winning combinations that can be displayed are all small winning combinations (a prize-A condition device to a prize-G condition device). When the result of the replay-B condition device is obtained as a result of the role lottery during MB operation, the winning combination that can be displayed is all small wins (winning-A condition device to winning-G condition device) and the re-play-B condition device. Since the patterns of displayable symbol combinations are different between the result of the loss and the result of the replay-B condition device, predetermined stop control may be performed according to each displayable symbol combination pattern. Concretely, it may be controlled to preferentially draw in a specific pattern combination when losing, and to preferentially draw in a predetermined pattern combination different from the specific pattern combination when the replay-B condition is set. Details will be described later.

FIG. 50 describes the end timing of the MB-A game and the RT variation timing. The MB game ends when more than 72 game medals are paid out for MB-A. On the other hand, the CB game that operates during the MB-A game is terminated after the result of the game is obtained. In this embodiment, in the MB-A game, even if the RT transition symbol combination is displayed, the RT transition is not allowed, but in the MB-A game and the CB game, while a specific symbol combination relating to a small winning combination is displayed and the game medals are being paid out, the MB game is ended when the game medals are paid out as a termination condition of the MB-A game. However, in the CB game, the payout of all the game medals has not been completed and the result of the game has not been obtained, so the CB game continues. When the CB game ends, the CB game ends after paying out the game medals.

In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination related to the win 05 is displayed in the MB-A game, the prescribed number of 3, control is performed to pay out 12 game medals, but when the 10th game medal out of 12 is paid out, 72 game medals, which is the condition for ending the MB-A game, are paid out, so the MB game ends. In other words, the MB game ends in the middle of paying out 12 game medals. Thereafter, after the payout of 12 game medals is completed, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in the current game is a symbol combination that triggers RT shift. Since winning 05 is a symbol combination that shifts to RT1, the game will be played at RT1 from the next game. Since RT1 is a game state with a relatively low replay probability, it is a game state disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the MB-A game, when the pattern combination related to winning 06 is displayed in the prescribed number of 3, 11 game medals are put out, but when the 10th game medal out of 11 is put out, the MB game is ended when 72 game medals, which is the termination condition of the MB-A game, are put out. In other words, the MB game ends in the middle of paying out 11 game medals. Thereafter, after the payout of 11 game medals is completed, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in the current game is a symbol combination that triggers RT shift. Since winning 06 is not a symbol combination that shifts to RT1, it is possible to stay in the RT2 state continuously even after the MB game ends. A player can play the game while maintaining RT2, which is an RT state in which the replay probability is higher than RT1, except during the operation of BB when the specified number is three, so that the player can play the game in a state in which the expected value of acquiring game medals is high.

In the fourth embodiment, a game flow in which a player plays a normal game will be described. A player usually plays a game with a prescribed number of three coins in RT1, expecting to win MB-A or BB. In the case of the specified number of 2, the replay winning probability is high, but since the winning probability of BB or MB-A is low, it is disadvantageous for the player to play the game with the specified number of 2, and it is desirable to play the game with the specified number of 3.

When MB-A is won, the player plays the game so as to display the symbol combination related to winning 05 until the game in which more than 72 coins can be paid out. For example, 72 coins are paid out by displaying the symbol combination relating to winning prize 05 six times. As described above, in the present embodiment, the MB game can be terminated even during payout of game medals.

In the MB-A game, when the game is played with RT1 and the prescribed number of 3 cards, there are two types of lottery results (replay-A condition device + all wins, all wins). As a result of the lottery of the two types, control is performed so that Winning 05 or Winning 09 is displayed. Therefore, when the player plays the game with the prescribed number of three tokens, there is an opportunity to maximize the payout of game medals.

Similarly, in the MB-A game, the player plays the game so as to display the symbol combination relating to winning 05 until the game in which more than 72 coins can be paid out. For example, 72 coins are paid out by displaying the symbol combination relating to winning prize 05 six times. In the next game, the game is played with the prescribed number of 2 tokens, that is, if it is an MB-A game, and if the game is played with RT1 and the prescribed number of 2 tokens, re-game-B will be won in about 1/2, and if re-game-B is won, winning 06 will be displayed. → RT2 is set → the payout of game medals is completed → the winning 06 is stopped and displayed, so the RT state does not shift.", the acquisition of one game medal is less than when winning 05 is displayed in the final game (game with the last winning) in MB-A, but as a result, it is possible to shift to RT2 with a high replay probability.

At the timing when the termination condition of MB is satisfied, processing related to RT state transition is executed by interrupt processing.

As a method of increasing the probability of winning the replay-B in RT1, it is possible to increase the winning probability of the replay-B in RT1 by increasing the winning probability of the replay-B in RT1 by increasing the probability of winning in the prescribed number of 3 or 2, but by performing the game by selecting either the prescribed number of 3 or 2, the reference destination of the lottery table is made different even in the same RT1. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the MB game, RT1, in the game immediately before the game in which the MB game may end, it is possible to increase the ratio of winning 06 to be displayed (in other words, winning 05 or winning 09 is not displayed) by playing a game with a high winning probability of replay-B, and to improve the game playability. The winning percentage of replay-B when the prescribed number is 2 is 50% (32768/65536).

In addition, in the MB-A game RT2, even if the game is played with the 3-coin bet, the re-game-B is won with a high probability, so that the player can play the game without worrying that the winning 05 is displayed by betting the 3-coin, and the winning 06 is displayed. In RT2, if a game is played with the specified number of 3 cards, it is possible to maintain RT2 at about 80% (52066/65536), and if a game is played with the specified number of 2 cards, RT2 can be maintained at about 50% (32769/65536). In addition, when the prescribed number is two, even with the same combination of symbols, the allocation of game medals is small, so it is desirable to play the game with the prescribed number of three.

Finally, RT3 will be explained. RT3 is a game state that can be shifted to after finishing the BB game, and unlike the above-mentioned MB-A winning route that makes it easier to shift to RT2 by changing the prescribed number, it is a route that makes it relatively easy to shift to RT2.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, by ending the MB game in accordance with the timing of the number of payouts, it is possible to provide a game property in which the RT transition is possible according to the symbol combination displayed thereafter. As a result, the player can be given an opportunity to select whether or not to change the specified number before the game ends.

In addition to the above, as a derivative plan, when there is a situation in which it is advantageous to play a game with the prescribed number of 3 coins and a situation in which it is advantageous to play a game with the prescribed number of 2 coins, specifically, during the MB-A game, the gaming machine side may notify whether to bet 2 or 3 according to the remaining number of payouts when the MB-A game ends. It is preferable that the notification is made by LED lighting, segment display, liquid crystal display, voice output, or the like. The timing of notification is
1: Notify during game standby after satisfying the condition of the remaining number of sheets.
2: During the game, based on the condition before the condition of the number of remaining coins is satisfied, the result of the combination lottery is determined and the result of the game is obtained.
3: Always notify after the condition of the remaining number of sheets is satisfied.
can be considered.

As a result, the player can change the specified number according to the notification regardless of the timing of the notification, can easily satisfy the conditions for shifting to RT2, and can proceed with the game without causing unintended disadvantages.

<Configuration regarding main switch applicable to this example>
(Various main switches)
A 1 bed switch, a MAX bed switch, a start switch, a left stop switch, a middle stop switch, a right stop switch, a settlement switch, and a reset switch are provided as switches managed by the main control means (hereinafter sometimes referred to as main switches). Information on whether or not these main switches have been operated (data corresponding to ON or OFF) is stored in a storage area starting from a predetermined address in the RWM. More specifically, input port 0 level data is stored at 0xF001, input port 1 level data is stored at 0xF002, input port 2 level data is stored at 0xF003, input port 0 falling data is stored at 0xF004, input port 0 rising data is stored at 0xF005, input port 1 rising data is stored at 0xF006, and input port 2 rising data is stored at 0xF007.

In this example, the 0th bit (D0) of the input port 0 is set to the setting/reset switch signal, the 1st bit (D1) is set to the setting key switch signal, the 2nd bit (D2) is set to the door switch signal, the 3rd bit (D3), the 4th bit (D4), and the 5th bit (D5) are not used, the 6th bit (D6) is set to the power failure detection signal, and the 7th bit (D7) is set to the full detection signal. In each of the D0, D1, D2, D6, and D7 bits, 0 indicates OFF, and 1 indicates ON.

The 0th bit (D0) of the input port 1 is set to the right stop switch sensor signal, the 1st bit (D1) is set to the middle stop switch sensor signal, the 2nd bit (D2) is set to the left stop switch sensor signal, the 3rd bit (D3) is set to the 3-bet sensor (MAX bed switch sensor) signal, the 4th bit (D4) is set to the 1-bet switch signal, the 5th bit (D5) is set to the settlement switch signal, and the 6th bit (D6) is set. The start switch sensor signal is set and the 7th bit (D7) is unused. In each of the D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, and D6 bits, 0 indicates OFF, and 1 indicates ON.

The 0th bit (D0) of the input port 2 is set to the reel sensor signal 1, the 1st bit (D1) is set to the reel sensor signal 2, the 2nd bit (D2) is set to the reel sensor signal 3, the 3rd bit (D3) is set to the payout sensor 2 signal, the 4th bit (D4) is set to the payout sensor 1 signal, the 5th bit (D5) is set to the insertion sensor 2 signal, and the 6th bit (D6) is set to the insertion sensor 1 signal. A selector passage sensor signal is set in the seventh bit (D7). In each of the D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, and D7 bits, 0 indicates OFF, and 1 indicates ON.

When the various main switches are operated, the sensors provided in the various main switches detect the operation of the various main switches, and when the sensors of the various main switches detect the operation of the various main switches, 1 is entered in the corresponding bit of the corresponding input port. Then, the input port is checked for each interrupt processing of the main control means, and the processing based on the various main switches corresponding to the input port 1 is executed.

Further, when various main switches are operated, there are cases where predetermined processing is executed, and each main switch is provided with a valid period during which the predetermined processing can be executed (conversely, a period during which the predetermined processing cannot be executed is called an invalid period). For example, the effective period of the start switch is a state in which a specified number of bets are made after all the reels have stopped (referred to as a start switch operation waiting state in this embodiment), and when the start switch sensor detects that the start switch has been operated in the start switch operation waiting state, internal lottery processing and reel rotation processing can be executed. When the start switch sensor detects that the start switch has been operated in a state other than the start switch operation waiting state, internal lottery processing and reel rotation processing are not executed.

In this way, when the sensor of the main switch detects the operation of the main switch, a predetermined process (for example, internal lottery processing or reel rotation processing in the case of the start switch) is executed. is called invalid detection.

A state in which the main switch is operated (ON state) during the valid period is called a valid detection state, and a state in which the main switch is operated (ON state) during the invalid period is called an invalid detection state.

Next, the effective period of various main switches will be described. The effective period of the MAX bet switch is a state in which all the reels are stopped, credits are stored at a maximum prescribed number or more (3 or more and 50 or less in this embodiment), and the bet number is less than the maximum prescribed number (0 or more and less than 3 in this embodiment).

In addition, the valid period of the start switch is the state in which the number of bets is set to a specified number (including bets made in the automatic betting process), the valid period of the left stop switch is the state in which the left reel is rotating at a constant speed (constant speed state), the valid period of the middle stop switch is the state in which the middle reel is rotating at a constant speed (constant speed state), the valid period of the right stop switch is the state in which the right reel is rotating at a constant speed (constant speed state), and the valid period of the checkout switch is the state in which the reel is rotating at a constant speed (constant speed state). It is a state in which all are stopped and one or more credits are stored, and the valid period of the reset switch is a state in which an error is detected and an error flag is set (the valid period may also be set during the setting change mode).

Next, the predetermined processing executed by various main switches will be described. The predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the effective period of the MAX bet switch is 3 bet processing, etc. The predetermined processing based on the start switch when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch includes internal lottery processing, reel rotation processing, etc. The predetermined processing based on the left stop switch when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch is the left reel stop control. The predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch is the stop control processing of the middle reel, etc. The predetermined processing based on the right stop switch when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch is the stop control processing of the right reel, etc. The predetermined processing based on the settlement switch when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch is settlement processing. (payment processing) and the like, and the predetermined processing based on the reset switch when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch is error cancellation processing and the like.

When a plurality of main switches among various main switches are operated at the same time, the processing based on the operated main switch may not be executed. The operation when such a plurality of main switches are simultaneously operated (all of the plurality of main switches are ON) will be described in detail below.

(Process 1 of other main switches when MAX bet switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the MAX bed switch is in an invalid detection state, if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not performed; if the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not performed; A predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed when the switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is not executed when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, and a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch.

With this configuration, when the MAX bet switch is always ON (the level data of the MAX bet switch sensor is always 1) regardless of whether or not the player operates the MAX bet switch due to the failure of the MAX bet switch, the failure of the MAX bet switch can be easily detected because the predetermined processing based on other main switches (excluding the reset switch) is not executed. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the MAX bet switch fails due to fraud, and to prevent illegal profit exploitation of the game parlor. Furthermore, since the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed, when errors occur simultaneously, the error can be canceled and the warning sound can be stopped, so that the operation of the game hall can be prevented.

(Other main switch processing 2 when MAX bet switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the MAX bed switch is in an invalid detection state, if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not performed; if the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not performed; A predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed when the switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, and a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch.

With such a configuration, when the MAX bet switch is always ON due to a failure, predetermined processing based on other main switches (excluding the settlement switch and the reset switch) is not executed, so that the failure of the MAX bet switch can be easily detected. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed, when errors occur simultaneously, the error can be canceled and the warning sound can be stopped, so that the operation of the game hall can be prevented.

(Other main switch processing 3 when MAX bet switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the MAX bed switch is in an invalid detection state, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, predetermined processing based on the start switch is performed; when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is performed; when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, predetermined processing is performed based on the middle stop switch; A predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed when operation of the right stop switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the adjustment switch is executed when the adjustment switch sensor detects operation of the adjustment switch during the effective period of the adjustment switch, and a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed when the reset switch sensor detects operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch.

With such a configuration, the game can be progressed even when the MAX bet switch is always ON due to failure, so that the game can be completed even if the MAX bet switch fails at any timing during the game. As a result, since the game can be executed for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. Also, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since the prescribed processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the MAX bet switch is always ON due to a failure and prescribed errors are occurring at the same time, the prescribed error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound associated with the prescribed error can be stopped, so that the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players are not disturbed.

(Process 4 of other main switches when the MAX bet switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the MAX bed switch is in an invalid detection state, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, predetermined processing based on the start switch is not performed, when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is performed, when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is performed, and during the effective period of the right stop switch, the right stop switch sensor performs predetermined processing. When the sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, when the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch during the valid period of the adjustment switch, the predetermined process based on the adjustment switch is not performed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is performed.

With such a configuration, even if the MAX bet switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can be progressed during the game (for example, if the reel is rotating, the operation of the stop button is effective, so that the rotation of the reel can be stopped), so that the game can be completed even if the MAX bet switch fails at any timing during the game, and the game can be executed for the bet used by the player at the start of the game, so that trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. Further, since a new game cannot be started while the MAX bet switch is out of order, it is possible to prevent troubles between the player and the game hall. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the MAX bet switch fails due to fraud, and to prevent illegal profit exploitation of the game parlor. Furthermore, since the prescribed processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the MAX bet switch is always ON due to a failure and a prescribed error occurs, the prescribed error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound associated with the prescribed error can be stopped, so that the business of the game parlor and the games of other players are not disturbed.

(Processing 1 of other main switches when the start switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the start switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the start switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, then predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is not performed, if the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not performed, and if the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is not performed and the right stop switch is not performed. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of (1), the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is performed.

With such a configuration, when the start switch is always turned on due to failure, predetermined processing based on other main switches (excluding the reset switch) is not executed, so that the failure of the start switch can be easily detected. In addition, by not executing the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent the settlement when the start switch fails due to fraud, and to prevent the illegal exploitation of the profit of the game parlor. Furthermore, since the prescribed processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the start switch is always turned on due to a failure and a prescribed error occurs, the prescribed error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound associated with the prescribed error can be stopped, so that the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players can be prevented.

(Processing 2 of other main switches when the start switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the start switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the start switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the valid period of the MAX bed switch, then predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is not performed, if the left stop switch sensor detects operation of the left stop switch during the valid period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not performed, and if the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is not performed and the right stop switch is not performed. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of (1), predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is performed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, predetermined processing based on the reset switch is performed.

With this configuration, when the start switch is always turned on due to failure, predetermined processing based on other main switches (excluding the adjustment switch and the reset switch) is not executed, so that the failure of the start switch can be easily detected. Also, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since the prescribed processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the start switch is always turned on due to a failure and a prescribed error occurs, the prescribed error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound associated with the prescribed error can be stopped, so that the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players can be prevented.

(Process 3 of other main switches when the start switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the start switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the start switch is in the invalid detection state, when the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is performed, when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is performed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is performed, and during the effective period of the right stop switch. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, when the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch during the effective period of the adjustment switch, the predetermined process based on the adjustment switch is performed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is performed.

With such a configuration, the game can be progressed even when the start switch is always turned on due to failure, so that the game can be completed even if the start switch fails at any timing during the game. As a result, since the game can be executed for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. Also, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since the prescribed processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the start switch is always turned on due to a failure and a prescribed error occurs, the prescribed error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound associated with the prescribed error can be stopped, so that the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players can be prevented.

(Process 4 of other main switches when the start switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the start switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the start switch is in an invalid detection state, when the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is not performed; when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is performed; When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the period, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is executed, when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the effective period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed.

With such a configuration, even if the start switch is always turned on due to a failure, the game can be continued during the game (for example, if the reel is rotating, the operation of the stop button is valid and the rotation of the reel can be stopped). Therefore, even if the start switch fails at any timing during the game, the game can be completed, and the game can be executed for the bet used by the player at the start of the game, so that trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. In addition, since a new bet cannot be made while the start switch is out of order, it is difficult to start the game, thereby preventing troubles between the player and the game hall. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the MAX bet switch fails due to fraud, and to prevent illegal profit exploitation of the game parlor. Furthermore, since the prescribed processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the start switch is always turned on due to a failure and a prescribed error occurs, the prescribed error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound associated with the prescribed error can be stopped, so that the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players can be prevented.

(Process 1 of other main switches when the left stop switch is invalid detection)
The processing when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, the prescribed processing based on the MAX bed switch is not executed; if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the prescribed processing based on the start switch is not executed; When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the effective period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed.

With such a configuration, when the left stop switch is always turned on due to a failure, predetermined processing based on other main switches is not executed, so that the failure of the left stop switch can be easily detected. In addition, by not executing the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent the settlement when the left stop switch fails due to fraudulence, thereby preventing the illegal profit exploitation of the game parlor. Furthermore, since the predetermined processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, so that the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players can be prevented.

(Processing 2 of other main switches when the left stop switch is invalid detection)
The processing when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, the prescribed processing based on the MAX bed switch is not executed; if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the prescribed processing based on the start switch is not executed; A predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is performed when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, and a predetermined process based on the reset switch is performed when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch.

With such a configuration, when the left stop switch is always turned on due to a failure, predetermined processing based on other main switches is not executed, so that the failure of the left stop switch can be easily detected. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since the predetermined processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, so that the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players can be prevented.

(Processing 3 of other main switches when the left stop switch is invalid detection)
The processing when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state, when the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is performed; when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, predetermined processing based on the start switch is performed; when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is performed; When the sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, a predetermined process is executed based on the right stop switch, when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, the predetermined process is executed based on the settlement switch, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed.

With such a configuration, the game can be progressed even when the left stop switch is always turned on due to failure, so that the game can be completed even if the left stop switch fails at any timing during the game. As a result, since the game can be executed for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since the predetermined processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, so that the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players can be prevented.

(Process 4 of other main switches when the left stop switch is invalid detection)
The processing when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state, when the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is performed; when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, predetermined processing based on the start switch is performed; when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is not performed; A predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed when the switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, and a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch.

With such a configuration, when the left stop switch is always turned on due to a failure, predetermined processing based on the middle and right stop switches is not executed, so that the failure of the left stop switch can be easily detected. Also, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since the predetermined processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, so that the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players can be prevented.

The processing of the other main switches when the middle stop switch is disabled and the processing of the other main switches when the right stop switch is disabled are the same as the processing 1 to 4 of the other main switches when the left stop switch is disabled, so the description is omitted.

(Process 1 of other main switches when settlement switch detects invalidity)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the settlement switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues. When the settlement switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the effective period of the MAX bet switch, predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not performed; if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, predetermined processing based on the start switch is not performed; if the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not performed; When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is not executed, when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed.

With such a configuration, when the settlement switch is always turned on due to failure, predetermined processing based on other main switches is not executed, so that it is easy to perceive that the settlement switch is out of order. In addition, by not executing the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent the settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraud, and to prevent the game parlor from being illegally exploited. Furthermore, since the prescribed processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the settlement switch is always on due to failure and a prescribed error occurs, the prescribed error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound associated with the prescribed error can be stopped, so that the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players are not disturbed.

(Process 2 of other main switches when settlement switch detects invalidity)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the settlement switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues. When the settlement switch is in an invalid detection state, when the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is performed; when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, predetermined processing based on the start switch is performed; when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is performed; When the switch sensor detects operation of the middle stop switch, predetermined processing is executed based on the middle stop switch, when the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, predetermined processing is executed based on the right stop switch, and when the reset switch sensor detects operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed.

With this configuration, the game can be progressed even when the settlement switch is always turned on due to failure, so that the game can be completed even if the settlement switch fails at any timing during the game. As a result, since the game can be executed for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, trouble between the player and the game parlor can be prevented. Furthermore, since the prescribed processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the settlement switch is always on due to failure and a prescribed error occurs, the prescribed error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound associated with the prescribed error can be stopped, so that the business of the game parlor and the games of other players are not disturbed.

(Process 3 of other main switches when settlement switch detects invalidity)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the settlement switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues. When the settlement switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, then predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not performed; if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, predetermined processing based on the start switch is not performed; if the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is performed; When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch, predetermined processing is executed based on the middle stop switch, when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, predetermined processing is executed based on the right stop switch, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed.

With such a configuration, even if the settlement switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can be progressed during the game (for example, the rotation of the reel can be stopped because the operation of the stop button is effective during the reel rotation), so that the game can be completed even if the settlement switch fails at any timing during the game, and the game can be executed for the amount of bets used by the player at the start of the game, so that trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. In addition, since a new bet is not made while the settlement switch is out of order, it is difficult to start a new game, thereby preventing troubles between the player and the game hall. Furthermore, since the prescribed processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even when the settlement switch is always on due to failure and a prescribed error occurs, the prescribed error can be canceled by operating the reset switch, and the output of the warning sound associated with the prescribed error can be stopped, so that the business of the game parlor and the games of other players are not disturbed.

(Process 1 of other main switches when the reset switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the reset switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects an operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, then predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is not performed; if the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, predetermined processing based on the start switch is not performed; if the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not performed; When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is not executed, when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the settlement switch sensor detects the settlement switch operation during the valid period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed.

With such a configuration, when the reset switch is always ON due to a failure, predetermined processing based on other main switches is not executed, so that the failure of the reset switch can be easily detected. Further, by not executing the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent the settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraud, and to prevent the game parlor from being illegally exploited. Furthermore, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions that use fraudulent means to reset the error.

(Processing 2 of other main switches when the reset switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the reset switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, the prescribed processing based on the MAX bed switch is not executed, if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the prescribed processing based on the start switch is not executed, if the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, the prescribed processing based on the left stop switch is not executed, and during the effective period of the middle stop switch. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is not executed, when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is executed.

With such a configuration, when the reset switch is always turned on due to failure, predetermined processing based on other main switches (excluding the settlement switch) is not executed, so that the failure of the reset switch can be easily detected. Also, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions that use fraudulent means to reset the error. Furthermore, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions that use fraudulent means to reset the error.

(Process 3 of other main switches when the reset switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the reset switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, when the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is performed; when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, predetermined processing based on the start switch is performed; when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is performed; When the sensor detects operation of the middle stop switch, predetermined processing is executed based on the middle stop switch, when the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, predetermined processing is executed based on the right stop switch, and when the payment switch sensor detects operation of the payment switch during the effective period of the payment switch, predetermined processing is executed based on the payment switch.

With such a configuration, the game can be progressed even when the reset switch is always turned on due to failure, so that the game can be completed even if the reset switch fails at any timing during the game. As a result, since the game can be executed for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, trouble between the player and the game parlor can be prevented. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions that use fraudulent means to reset the error.

(Process 4 of other main switches when the reset switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the reset switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, when the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the effective period of the MAX bed switch, predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is not performed, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, predetermined processing based on the start switch is performed, when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is performed, and the middle stop is performed during the effective period of the middle stop switch. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch, a predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is executed, when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed.

With such a configuration, the game can be progressed even when the reset switch is always ON due to a failure (for example, the rotation of the reel can be stopped because the operation of the stop button is effective during reel rotation), so that the game can be completed even if the reset switch fails at any timing during the game. However, even if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch, it does not execute a predetermined process, making it difficult to start a new game. Further, by not executing the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent the settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraud, and to prevent the game parlor from being illegally exploited. Furthermore, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions that use fraudulent means to reset the error.

When an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be canceled because the error is canceled based on the rise signal of the reset switch signal. In addition, when the error is canceled based on the falling signal instead of the rising signal (error is canceled by OFF→ON→OFF), the reset switch must be turned ON and OFF when the error is canceled by an illegal operation, so the error cancellation can be made more difficult.

(Processing of other main switches when the MAX bet switch is effective detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the MAX bet switch is detected valid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. Among the other main switches, the start switch, the adjustment switch, or the reset switch can be effective when the MAX bet switch is detected to be effective. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch when the MAX bed switch is in the effective detection state, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the process 3 of the other main switch when the MAX bed switch is invalid detection, when the MAX bed switch is in the invalid detection state, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the MAX bed switch is in the effective detection state, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the MAX bet switch from progressing the game. In other words, a state in which the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the progress of the game is disabled.

Also, when the MAX bet switch is in the effective detection state, when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 2 or 3 of the other main switch when the MAX bed switch detects invalidity, when the MAX bed switch is in the invalid detection state, when the payment switch sensor detects the operation of the payment switch during the valid period of the payment switch, a predetermined processing based on the payment switch is performed, and when the MAX bed switch is in the effective detection state, when the payment switch sensor detects the operation of the payment switch during the valid period of the payment switch, the predetermined processing based on the payment switch is not performed. becomes.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent settlement of the game due to fraudulent operation of the MAX bet switch. In other words, a state in which the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the settlement of the game is disabled, and a state in which the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid is regarded as having a low possibility of fraud, and the game can be settled.

In addition, when the MAX bed switch is in the effective detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch sensor during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, 3, or 4 of the other main switches when the MAX bet switch is invalid detection, when the MAX bet switch is in the invalid detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is not performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraud in which an error is canceled by an unauthorized operation of the MAX bet switch. In other words, a state in which the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, making error cancellation impossible, and a state in which the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is invalid is detected to be less likely to be fraudulent, enabling error cancellation.

(Processing of other main switches when the start switch is valid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the start switch is valid and this state continues. Of the other main switches, the stop switch (left stop switch, middle stop switch, right stop switch) or reset switch can be effective when the start switch is detected to be effective. When the start switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the stop switch is not executed. By combining this configuration with the processing 3 or 4 of the other main switch when the start switch is disabled, when the start switch is in the disabled detection state, when the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch, a predetermined process based on the stop switch is executed, and when the start switch is in the effective detection state, when the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the stop switch is not performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the start switch from progressing the game. In other words, a state in which the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the progress of the game is disabled.

Further, when the start switch is in the effective detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed. By combining this configuration with the processing 1, 2, 3, or 4 of the other main switches when the start switch is in the invalid detection state, when the start switch is in the invalid detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the start switch is in the effective detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the start switch from progressing the game. That is, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and error cancellation is disabled, and the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be invalid is regarded as having a low possibility of fraud, and error cancellation is enabled.

Further, when the start switch is in the effective detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch, a predetermined process based on the stop switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1 or 2 of the other main switch when the start switch is invalid detection, when the start switch is in the invalid detection state, if the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the stop switch is not executed, and when the start switch is in the effective detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the stop switch is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be effective is highly likely to be the operation of the start switch operated by the player, so that the operation of each stop switch is enabled to finish the game, and the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be invalid is highly likely to be the operation of the start switch due to factors other than the player's operation (illegal or malfunction), and the operation of each stop switch is disabled so as not to end the game to the end.

(Processing of other main switches when the stop switch is valid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the stop switch has been detected to be effective and this state continues. Among the other main switches whose operation can be valid when the stop switch is detected to be valid, the stop switch (not operated stop switch) or the reset switch corresponds. When the left stop switch is in a valid detection state in a state in which all the reels are rotating, when the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch during the effective period of the middle or right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle or right stop switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 3 of the other main switch when the left stop switch is invalid detection, when the left stop switch is in the invalid detection state, the middle or right stop switch is executed during the effective period, or when the right stop switch sensor is in the middle or when the right stop switch operation is detected, a predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch is executed, and when the left stop switch is in the effective detection state, the middle or right stop switch sensor is in the effective period or the right stop switch sensor detects the middle or right stop switch operation. When the middle or right stop switch is activated, the predetermined processing is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the left stop switch from progressing the game. In other words, the state in which the left stop switch is continuously operated after detecting the validity of the left stop switch is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the progress of the game is disabled.

In addition, when the left stop switch is in the effective detection state while all the reels are rotating, when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed. By combining this configuration with the processing 1, 2, 3, or 4 of the other main switch when the left stop switch is disabled, when the left stop switch is in the disabled detection state, a predetermined processing based on the reset switch is performed when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, and when the left stop switch is in the valid detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the left stop switch to cancel the error. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the left stop switch is detected to be valid, the possibility of illegality is high, and the error cannot be canceled.

Further, when the left stop switch is in an effective detection state while all the reels are rotating, and the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch during the effective period of the middle or right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, or 4 of the other main switch when the left stop switch is invalid detection, when the left stop switch is in the invalid detection state, the middle or right stop switch is in the effective period, or the right stop switch sensor is in the middle, or when the right stop switch operation is detected, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch is in the effective detection state, the middle or the right stop switch is in the effective period, or the right stop switch sensor is in the middle or the right stop. When the operation of the switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the left stop switch is detected to be valid, it is highly likely that the left stop switch is operated by the player, and the remaining stop switches are allowed to be operated in order to finish the game. I'm doing

(Processing of other main switches when settlement switch is valid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the checkout switch has been detected to be valid and this state continues. Among the other main switches, the MAX bet switch or the reset switch can be activated when the checkout switch is activated. When the settlement switch is in the effective detection state, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch. By combining such a configuration with the processing 2 of the other main switch when the settlement switch detects invalidity, when the settlement switch is in the invalid detection state, when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is performed, and when the settlement switch is in the valid detection state, when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not performed. This is the configuration.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegality of the game from progressing due to the illegal operation of the settlement switch. In other words, a state in which the switch is continuously operated after the settlement switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the progress of the game is disabled. The situation in which the MAX bet switch can be operated in the effective detection state of the settlement switch corresponds to the state in which only the bet amount is settled when the bet is made as settlement processing, or the state in which the bet amount is first settled and then the credit amount is settled after the bet amount is settled until the credit amount is settled.

Further, when the settlement switch is in the effective detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, or 3 of the other main switch when the adjustment switch detects invalidity, when the adjustment switch is in the invalid detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the adjustment switch is in the effective detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraud in which an error is cleared by an unauthorized operation of the settlement switch. That is, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the settlement switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, making it impossible to cancel the error, and the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the settlement switch is detected to be invalid is regarded as having a low possibility of fraud, so that the error can be released.

(Processing of other main switches when the reset switch is valid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the reset switch is valid and this state continues. Among the other main switches, the MAX bet switch, the start switch, the stop switch, or the checkout switch can be effective when the reset switch is detected to be effective. When the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the process 3 of the other main switch when the reset switch is invalid detection, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is performed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state, when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not performed. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the reset switch from progressing the game. That is, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the progress of the game is disabled.

Further, when the reset switch is in the effective detection state, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch. By combining this configuration with the processing 3 or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch detects invalidity, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the reset switch from progressing the game. In other words, a state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be illegal, and the game is disabled, and a state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid is considered to be less likely to be illegal, and the game is allowed to proceed.

Further, when the reset switch is in the effective detection state, when the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the stop switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 3 or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch is invalid detection, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, when the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, a predetermined process based on the stop switch is performed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the stop switch is not performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the reset switch from progressing the game. That is, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the progress of the game is disabled.

In addition, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 2 or 3 of the other main switch when the reset switch detects invalidity, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, a predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent settlement of the game due to fraudulent operation of the reset switch. In other words, a state in which the reset switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the settlement of the game is disabled, and a state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid is regarded as a low possibility of fraud, and the game settlement is enabled.

Further, when the reset switch is in the effective detection state, when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the effective period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch detects invalidity, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch. is configured to execute

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be a normal reset switch operation, and the game is allowed to proceed, while the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid is highly likely to be an abnormal (unauthorized) reset switch operation, and the game is not allowed to proceed. In addition, when the progress of the game is allowed, at least the game can be terminated, and control may be executed to prohibit the game from the next game, or the failure does not interfere with the game, so the game may be progressed until an error occurs (because cancellation is difficult when an error occurs).

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed. By combining this configuration with the processing 1 or 2 of the other main switch when the reset switch detects invalidity, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and when the reset switch is in the effective detection state, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be a normal reset switch operation, and the game is allowed to proceed, while the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid is highly likely to be an abnormal (unauthorized) reset switch operation, and the game is not allowed to proceed. In addition, when the progress of the game is allowed, at least the game can be terminated, and control may be executed to prohibit the game from the next game, or the failure does not interfere with the game, so the game may be progressed until an error occurs (because cancellation is difficult when an error occurs).

Further, when the reset switch is in the effective detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch, a predetermined process based on the stop switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1 or 2 of the other main switch when the reset switch is invalid detection, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, if the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the stop switch is not executed, and when the reset switch is in the effective detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the stop switch is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be a normal reset switch operation, and the game is allowed to proceed, while the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid is highly likely to be an abnormal (unauthorized) reset switch operation, and the game is not allowed to proceed. When the progress of the game is allowed, at least the game can be terminated, and control may be executed to prohibit the game from the next game, or the failure does not hinder the game, so the game may be progressed until an error occurs (because cancellation is difficult when an error occurs).

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the effective period of the settlement switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1 or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch detects invalidity, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, when the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch during the valid period of the adjustment switch, the predetermined processing based on the adjustment switch is not performed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch during the valid period of the adjustment switch, the predetermined processing based on the adjustment switch is performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be a normal reset switch operation, so that the settlement of the game is possible, and the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid is highly likely to be an abnormal (unauthorized) reset switch operation, thereby making the game settlement impossible. In addition, when the settlement of the game is enabled, at least the settlement of the game can be executed, and the control may be executed to prohibit the game from the game after the settlement, or the game may be progressed until an error occurs because the failure does not interfere with the game (because it is difficult to cancel when the error occurs).

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, all of the configurations of the MAX bet switches can be replaced with 1 bet switches. Furthermore, when the replay symbol combination of the replay winning game is displayed (more specifically, during the period from the reception of the third stop to the execution of the automatic betting process), when various main switches detect invalidity, the automatic betting process is executed even if the prescribed process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed. This is to prevent the game from being finished if the automatic betting process is stopped, and even if the settlement switch is enabled, the period of validity of the settlement switch cannot be changed and the settlement processing cannot be executed.

Also, in the processing of the various main switches described above, both the MAX bet switch and the 1 bet switch may be provided, or only the MAX bet switch may be provided. If only the MAX bet switch is provided, processing related to 1 bet cannot be executed by the main switch, but can be realized by manually inserting one medal.

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, the settlement switch and the 1-bet switch may also be used as switches. In this case, the function of a 1-bet switch is executed in the case of a single push, and the function of a settlement switch is executed in the case of a long push. A single press means that the settlement/1 bet switch is released (turned OFF) within 894 ms (equivalent to the settlement/1 bet switch being ON continuously 400 times in interrupt processing) in the input port check performed for each interrupt process. was continued).

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, even if the processing based on the operation of the bet switch is invalidated, it may be possible to insert medals for maintenance. With this configuration, the blocker is not operated by the operation of various main switches, so that wear of the blocker motor due to the player's arbitrary triggering of the blocker can be reduced. In addition, even when three cards are inserted (thrown in a specified number) for maintenance, the progress of the game can be stopped by invalidating the operation of the start switch.

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, even if the processing based on the operation of the bet switch is disabled, the automatic betting processing may be enabled. With this configuration, even if any one of the various main switches detects invalidity and the predetermined processing based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (disabled) during the period from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the replay symbol combination is stopped until the reels are stopped (more specifically, before the winning determination processing), the automatic betting processing is executed, so the state of the switch does not need to be determined before the automatic betting processing is executed, so the program capacity can be reduced. Further, even when the automatic bet processing is performed, the progress of the game can be stopped by invalidating the operation of the start switch. In the case of such a configuration, if any one of the various main switches detects invalidity and a predetermined process based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (became invalid) during the period from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the minor combination is won and the symbol combination of the minor combination is stopped until the reels are stopped (more specifically, before the winning determination process), the payout process can also be executed. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if any one of the various main switches detects invalidity during the period from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination of the predetermined combination (replay, small combination, bonus, etc.) is stopped until the reels are stopped (more specifically, before the winning determination process), the slip control is executed, and then the progress of the game is stopped after the winning determination process.

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, when the processing based on the operation of the bet switch is disabled, the automatic betting processing may also be disabled. By configuring in this way, when any one of the various main switches detects invalidity and a predetermined process based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (disabled) during the period from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the replay symbol combination is stopped until the reels are stopped (more specifically, before the winning determination process), the automatic bet process is not executed, so the progress of the game can be stopped. As a result, the progress of the game can be stopped when the main switch is illegally operated, and damage to the game hall can be suppressed. In the case of such a configuration, if any one of the various main switches detects invalidity and a predetermined process based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (disabled) during the period from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the minor combination is won and the symbol combination of the minor combination is stopped until the reels are stopped (more specifically, before the winning determination process), the payout process is also impossible to execute. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if any one of the various main switches is detected to be invalid during the period from reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination (replay, small combination, bonus, etc.) is stopped until the reels are stopped (more specifically, before the winning determination process), the slip control is executed, and then the progress of the game is stopped before the winning determination process.

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, when the validity of each main switch is detected and another main switch is operated, it may be validated only once (predetermined processing based on the other main switch can be executed). For example, when the reset switch is validly detected and a start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch can be executed, but the predetermined processing based on the operation of the stop switch in the game is disabled. With this configuration, when the start switch sensor picks up noise, even if the continuous ON state occurs for a minimum period, the next operation is effective only once, so the game can be progressed. If there is noise, the continuous ON state is canceled and the predetermined processing based on the next operation (the stop switch in the above example) can be executed, making it possible to proceed with the game. As a result, the game can be played smoothly even if noise occurs.

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, the valid period during which the reset switch is valid may be the door open detection state and the error detection state (during error occurrence). That is, when the reset switch is turned ON in the door opening detection state and the error detection state, the reset switch is detected valid, and when the reset switch is turned ON in the door closing detection state and the error detection state, the reset switch is disabled.

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, even during the effective period of a certain main switch, if the input of a certain main switch and another main switch are detected at the same time and the operation reception of a certain main switch becomes invalid, the predetermined process may not be executed even during the effective period. For example, a state in which a specified number of bets is placed is the effective period of the start switch, but in a state in which a specified number of bets have been placed and the bet switch is detected to be invalid, acceptance of the operation of the start switch may become invalid (for example, processes 1, 2, and 4 of other main switches when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid). Even in such a case, when the bed switch is no longer detected, the reception of the operation of the start switch becomes effective, so the effective period of the start switch is set. In other words, the "effective period" does not indicate the period during which the operation of the main switch is effective in any state, but is used as the period during which the operation of the main switch alone is effective. In addition, although an example of the effective period of the start switch has been described above, the effective period of the other main switches (MAX bet switch, left stop switch, middle stop switch, right stop switch, settlement switch, reset switch) is also used with the same intention.

<Structure Regarding Passage of Medals Applicable to this Example>
(Structure of Medal Selector)
The structure of the medal selector will be explained. The medal selector is provided for switching between guiding the medals inserted from the medal slot into the game machine (inside the hopper) or out of the game machine (receptacle). In addition, a plurality of sensors for detecting passing medals are provided in the medal selector, and the medals inserted from the medal insertion port pass through the path sensor, the insertion sensor 1, and the insertion sensor 2 in this order from upstream. Further, a blocker is provided between the path sensor and the input sensor 1, and guides the inserted medals into the game machine when the blocker is ON, and guides the inserted medals out of the game machine when the blocker is OFF. When the medals are led out of the gaming machine, the medals cannot be stored (the credit storage limit is (50) and the maximum bet is placed (3)), the medals outside the standard are inserted (including non-medal medals), the game is in progress (from the reception of the start switch to the end of the game after all reels stop), an error is in progress, settings are being checked, or settlement is in progress.

When the path sensor detects medals (turns from OFF to ON), 1 is added to the insertion monitoring counter. Also, the value of the input monitoring counter is cleared (set to 0) when turning the blocker from OFF to ON. Also, the value of the input monitoring counter is decremented by 1 when the input sensor 2 changes from ON to OFF if the passage time and passage order of the input sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 are normal. That is, the value of the insertion monitoring counter when a normal medal is inserted and led into the game machine is 0 because 1 is added when the passage sensor is detected and 1 is subtracted when the insertion sensor 2 is detected. Then, if the value of the insertion monitoring counter is within the range of 0 to 2, it is assumed that the game medals have passed normally, and the processing of lighting the inserted number display LED is executed. However, when the replay is won and the automatic betting process is being executed, the addition process (including the addition display process) to the credit number display is executed without newly executing the process of lighting the input number display LED (when the credit is less than 50). The input monitoring counter is incremented when the blocker is OFF, but is cleared when the blocker is ON.

When the insertion sensor 1 detects medals (changes from OFF to ON), measurement of passing time is started until the insertion sensor 1 stops detecting medals (turns from ON to OFF). If this passage time is within the threshold, it is normal, but if it exceeds the threshold, it is determined that there is a medal retention error, and medal retention error processing is executed. The threshold from when the insertion sensor 1 is turned ON to when the insertion sensor 1 is turned OFF is set to 4 ms or more and 200 ms or less in consideration of the passage speed of medals.

When the insertion sensor 2 detects medals after the insertion sensor 1 detects the medals (from OFF to ON to OFF), when the insertion sensor 2 detects medals (turns from OFF to ON), measurement of passing time is started until the insertion sensor 1 stops detecting medals (from ON to OFF). If this passage time (the time from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned ON until the insertion sensor 1 is turned OFF) is within the threshold, it is normal, but if it exceeds the threshold, it is judged as a medal retention error, and medal retention error processing is executed. The threshold from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned ON until the insertion sensor 1 is turned OFF is set to 2 ms or more and 120 ms or less in consideration of the passing speed of medals.

When the insertion sensor 2 detects medals after the insertion sensor 1 detects the medals (from OFF to ON to OFF), when the insertion sensor 2 detects the medals (from OFF to ON), measurement of passing time is started until the insertion sensor 2 stops detecting the medals (from ON to OFF). If this passage time (the time from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned ON until the insertion sensor 2 is turned OFF) is within the threshold, it is normal, but if it exceeds the threshold, it is determined as a medal retention error, and medal retention error processing is executed. The threshold from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned ON to when the insertion sensor 2 is turned OFF is set to 4 ms or more and 200 ms or less in consideration of the passage speed of medals.

When the insertion sensor 2 detects medals (before switching from OFF to ON) before the insertion sensor 1 detects the medals (when switching from OFF to ON), it is determined that there is a medal backflow error, and medal backflow error processing is executed.

The throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 are arranged so as to have a case where both are turned ON when one medal passes (the distance between the throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 is shorter than the diameter of the medal), and error processing can be executed according to the passing time of the medal.

When a medal is inserted from the medal slot, it passes through the passage in the selector and is led to the hopper by free fall. If the time from when the medal is inserted until it is led to the hopper is too short, the blocker will not be turned on in time, and the inserted medal will be led to the return passage. In addition, if the time from when the medals are inserted to when they are led to the hopper is too long, the time for inserting the medals to start a game becomes longer than necessary, so it is necessary to set the passing time of the medals led to the hopper after the medals are inserted to an appropriate time. Various actions of inserting medals from the medal insertion slot are conceivable, but as shown in FIG. 51, a medal is set in the upper part of the medal insertion slot (the initial velocity when the medal is set is 0), and the action of allowing the medal to fall freely without applying artificial acceleration will be described as a general medal insertion operation in this embodiment. Also, after the medal is free-falling, it may collide with various parts in the selector, but the deceleration due to this collision is included in the term free fall.

One condition for turning the blocker from OFF to ON is after one game is finished. More specifically, after the winning process is executed by stopping all the reels and releasing all the stop switches in the previous game, the blocker is turned ON after initializing the storage area of the RWM related to the game start display LED (start lamp), the insertion display LED (1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, 3-bet lamp) and the re-game display LED (replay lamp), which are the information of the previous game.

Here, when the player aims to play the game to the maximum extent possible within the operating hours of the game parlor in which the player is playing, it is conceivable to perform an operation for executing the next game immediately after finishing the game in order to continuously execute the game. As this operation, when medals are stored in the credit, the bet switch (MAX bet switch) is operated and then the start switch is operated, and when medals are not stored in the credit, the start switch is operated after inserting a specified number of medals (three in this embodiment) from the medal slot. Since the shorter the time for performing this operation, the more games can be performed, if the inserted medals are not guided to the hopper but are guided to the return passage, the time until the next game is executed becomes longer, which may make the player feel poor operability and reduce the interest in the game.

In order to solve the above-described problem, it is preferable to guide the medals to the hopper as much as possible when the medals are inserted through the medal insertion opening.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present example, when the last reel out of a plurality of reels (three reels in this embodiment) is rotating and the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the last reel is valid, the stop switch sensor is operated so that the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last reel detects the operation of the stop switch, starts the process of stopping the last reel, and when the stop switch sensor stops detecting the operation of the stop switch after that, when the medal is inserted from the medal slot, the medal is inserted. It is configured so that the medals that have been collected may be guided to the hopper (processing is executed to turn the blocker from OFF to ON).

As a result, medals can be inserted after the end of the game, and the timing at which the medals can be inserted can be easily understood by the player (the medals can be inserted at the moment the last stop switch is released), so that the operation of the game can be quickly executed.

In order not to make the description redundant, the time from when the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last stop switch is turned OFF until the blocker is turned ON will be described as "T1", and the time from when the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot (from the state where the lower chord of the medal matches the upper part of the medal insertion slot when the medal insertion slot is viewed from the front (a state directly above the medal insertion slot and the entire medal can be seen)) until it reaches the blocker will be described as "T2".

In addition, in the case where loss (including a drop in the winning order), 1-card hand, 10-card hand, replay, or bonus can be selected as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means, the medals may be led to the hopper when the medals are inserted at the moment the last stop switch is released, regardless of which internal lottery results.

In this case, T1 including the processing time of payout processing (processing of awarding medals to the player), automatic betting processing (automatic betting processing when replay symbol combination is displayed), or display freezing processing (freezing processing after bonus symbol combination is displayed) executed after the last stop switch is released is made shorter than T2 (T1<T2).

By constructing in this manner, the medal insertion timing guided to the hopper becomes the same regardless of the result of the internal lottery, and the game can be executed without hindering the tempo of the game of the player.

In a game that results in an internal lottery with 10 tokens, when the last stop switch is pressed (accepts the operation) and then continues to be pressed, it may be configured such that "the last stop switch is pressed → the last reel is stopped → 10 game medals are paid out". That is, instead of executing the payout of game medals based on the stopped symbol combination by releasing the stop switch, the game medals may be paid out based on the stopped symbol combination by pressing the stop switch (receiving the operation), and in such a configuration, the medals may be guided to the hopper when the medals are inserted at the moment the stop switch is pressed (the operation is accepted).

Further, it may be configured such that when a loss (including a small winning combination in the order of pushing), 1-card hand, 10-card hand, replay, or bonus can be selected as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means, medals may be led to the hopper when a lose or 1-card hand is selected and medals are inserted at the moment the last stop switch is released.

In this case, T1a, which is the time from the moment the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last stop switch turns OFF until the blocker is turned ON, including the processing time of the payout process (the process of awarding one medal to the player) executed after the last stop switch is released, is made shorter than T2 (T1a<T2), and the final stop including the processing time of the automatic betting process (automatic betting process when displaying a replay symbol combination) or the display freeze process (freezing process after displaying a bonus symbol combination). T1b, which is the time from the moment when the stop switch sensor corresponding to the switch is turned off until the blocker is turned on, is made longer than T2 (T1b>T2).

This is because if the medals are led to the hopper when the last stop switch is released in the result of all the internal lotteries, the time design is the same regardless of whether the number of coins to be paid out is 1 or 10, resulting in loss of time when the number of coins to be paid out is 1. Therefore, only when the payout number is 1 and the processing is short (no payout), time loss can be reduced by forming T1a<T2, and the playing time of the player can be shortened.

In addition, when a loss (including a small winning combination in the order of pushing), 1-card hand, 10-card hand, replay or bonus can be selected as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means, the selection probability of the loss or 1-card hand is designed to be higher than the selection probability of the 10-card hand, replay or bonus as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means. Then, the medals may be guided to the hopper when the medals are inserted at the instant when the last stop switch is released only when the winning or one-piece hand is selected.

This is an event with a high probability of encounter (a combination with a high probability of winning) while the player is playing the game, and by designing T1<T2 for the results of the internal lottery with a short processing time for winning processing, the number of games can be efficiently executed in view of the business hours of the game parlor.

As a specific example of T1 and T2 described above, when the average speed of medals (25 mm in diameter, 5 g in weight) inserted from the medal slot and passing through the selector is set to about 0.6 mm/ms, when the medals inserted into the medal slot are guided to the hopper, the distance from the medal slot to reach the blocker is designed to be about 60 mm, and the time from the medal slot to reach the blocker is designed to be about 90 ms. When designed in this way, it is desirable to design T2 to be 90 ms and T1 to be less than 90 ms. However, the design value of T2 may be changed by adjusting the distance in the selector or the speed at which the medal passes through the selector, and the design value of T1 may be changed accordingly.

In addition, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the operation of the start switch is accepted, and if the internal lottery results in a loss (including a dropout in a small role in the order of pushing), and a 1-piece hand, a 10-card hand, a replay, or a bonus is won, the stop switch sensor corresponding to the final stop operation receives the operation of the stop switch when it detects the operation of the stop switch as described above. However, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the operation of the start switch is accepted, and the internal lottery loses (including a drop in a small role in the pushing order), 1-piece hand, 10-hand hand, replay, or bonus is won. If a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot at the timing when the reel rotation start processing (processing to rotate all reels) is started, the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot. Since the state of the blocker is OFF, even if the stop switch is operated earliest in terms of design after the medals are inserted at the relevant timing, the medals reach the blocker before the blocker is turned ON, and the medals are led out of the game machine (receptacle).

<Structure related to reel unit applicable to this example>
A reel unit R008 applicable to this example will be described with reference to FIG. The reel unit R008 is mainly composed of a reel frame R001, a left reel R002, a middle reel R003 and a right reel R004. The left reel R002, middle reel R003 and right reel R004 are fixed to the reel frame R001 via lower reel screws R006. After the reel unit R008 is installed on the reel mounting portion of the housing, the reel unit lower screw R005 and the reel unit upper screw R007 are fixed vertically.

Further, each reel (left reel R002, middle reel R003, right reel R004) may be configured to be vertically fixed to the reel frame R001. In this case, each reel may be configured to be fixed to the reel frame R001 by the reel lower screw R006 and the reel unit upper screw R007.

In addition, a reel upper screw (not shown) is provided separately from the reel unit upper screw R007, and when each reel is fixed to the reel frame R001, it is fixed with the reel lower screw R006 and the reel upper screw (not shown).

Since the rightmost reel lower screw R006 in a front view is more susceptible to the impact of closing the door than the other reel lower screws R006, the right reel lower screw R006 is arranged directly above the flow path leading from the hopper to the auxiliary tank while the right reel lower screw R006 is fixed to the reel unit R008 so that the right reel lower screw R006 does not enter the hopper when it falls off. That is, if the right reel lower screw R006 comes off for some reason, the right reel lower screw R006 drops from the hopper into the flow path leading to the auxiliary tank.

As a result, the failure of the hopper caused by the entry of the right reel lower screw R006 into the hopper can be suppressed, and the loss of the right reel lower screw R006 can be reduced because the right reel lower screw R006 flows into the auxiliary tank when the right reel lower screw R006 falls off.

Also, the rightmost reel unit upper screw R007 in the front view is more likely to fall off because the impact due to the closing of the door is transmitted more easily than the other reel unit upper screws R007. For this reason, the width of the space generated between the upper part of the right reel R004 and the lower part of the reel frame R001 (corresponding to A in FIG. 52) is made shorter than the length of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the longitudinal direction (corresponding to B in FIG. 52) so that the right reel unit upper screw R007 does not enter the inside of the reel unit R008 when it falls off (the relation between A and B in FIG. 52 is A<B). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the right reel unit upper screw R007 to enter the inside of the reel unit R008 when it falls off.

The relationship described above is not limited to the right reel, and is common to the middle reel and the left reel, and although the ease with which the reel unit upper screw comes off differs for each reel unit upper screw, after the reel unit upper screw actually comes off, any reel and the reel unit upper screw will have a common configuration and effect.

This can prevent the right reel unit upper screw R007 from entering the inside of the reel unit R008 when it falls off. If the upper screw R007 on the right side enters the reel unit R008, it will affect the rotation of the reel (the reel unit on the right reel unit is damaged or the rotation of the reel is inhibited), so immediately from the reel unit Real. It is necessary to extract the screw R007 on the top of the knit, but since the reel unit R008 is fixed to the housing, the reel unit R008 must be removed from the housing to work. In this way, when the reel unit upper screw R007 on the right side enters the inside of the reel unit R008, it takes a long time to restart the game.

In addition, the length of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the lateral direction (corresponding to C in FIG. 52) may be longer than the width A of the space formed between the upper part of the right reel R004 and the lower part of the reel frame R001.

In the state where each reel is installed in the reel unit R008, the front part of each reel (the part closest to the player) protrudes toward the front side than the front part (the part closest to the player) of the reel frame R001. Therefore, when the reel unit upper screw R007 comes off, the reel unit upper screw R007 comes into contact with the upper surface of the reel. If the reel unit upper screw R007 contacts the upper surface of the reel, the reel unit upper screw R007 may rebound and enter the reel unit R008 and go behind the reel unit R008. In particular, when the reel unit upper screw R007 contacts the upper surface of the reel during reverse rotation (reel rotates from bottom to top), the possibility of the reel unit R008 jumping to the rear increases. In order to prevent such a situation, the configuration described above makes it difficult for the reel unit upper screw R007 to enter the inside of the reel unit R008.

Even when the width of the space generated between the upper part of the right reel R004 and the lower part of the reel frame R001 (corresponding to A in FIG. 52) is set shorter than the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (corresponding to B in FIG. 52) so that the right reel unit upper screw R007 does not enter the inside of the reel unit R008 when it falls off (relationship between A and B in FIG. 52 is A<B), the reel unit upper screw R007 does not enter the reel unit R008 may get inside the Even in this case, the reel R002 is configured so as not to be damaged by rotating the reel R002 while the reel unit upper screw R007 remains inside the reel unit R008.

FIG. 53 is a view of the reel unit R008 as viewed from the right side. The reel R002 is attached to the reel unit R008, the reel unit R008 is fixed to the housing, and the front panel R013 is closed.

In this state, if the reel unit upper screw R007 drops and enters the reel unit R008, the dropped reel unit upper screw R007 rolls on the reel R002. The reel unit upper rear opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010 are provided below the highest peak of the reel R002, and the length in the vertical direction of the openings of the reel unit upper rear opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010 (corresponding to E and F in FIG. 53) is longer than the longitudinal length of the reel unit upper screw R007 (corresponding to FIG. 53B), so that the reel unit upper screw rolls on the reel R002. The R007 is ejected to the outside of the reel unit R008 from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 or the reel unit rear lower opening R010 (it is configured to be easily discharged). As a result, the reel unit upper screw R007 does not remain inside the reel unit R008, thereby preventing damage to the reel R002.

Regarding the lengths of the reel unit upper rear opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010, the length in the lateral direction is longer than the length of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the longitudinal direction (corresponding to B in FIG. 53), so that the reel unit upper screw R007 is easily ejected from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010.

Also, the size of the opening of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010 may be larger, and if B<E and B<F are established, any of B<E<F, B<F<E, and B<E=F may be used. The B and F may be the length in the vertical direction, the length in the horizontal direction, or the area of the openings of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010.

The shortest distance (corresponding to D in FIG. 53) between the foremost part of the reel R002 and the front panel R013 is longer than the length B of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the longitudinal direction. As a result, when the reel unit upper screw R007 drops forward of the reel, it falls downward without being caught between the reel R002 and the front panel R013, so that the reel unit upper screw hardly damages the reel R002 when dropped. In particular, when the reel R002 rotates, a strong force is applied, so even if the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off in such a case, the reel unit upper screw hardly damages the reel R002, and the rotation of the reel R002 can be prevented.

In addition, the relationship between the frontmost part of each reel and the frontmost part of the hopper installed at the bottom of the housing is such that the frontmost part of each reel protrudes forward from the frontmost part of the hopper, so even if the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off and rolls in front of the reel unit R008 and is guided toward the lower part of the housing, it is difficult to enter the hopper. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the hopper from malfunctioning due to the reel unit upper screw R007 entering the hopper.

A central display substrate R011 is attached behind the front panel R013. The central display board R011 is controlled by the main control board, and controls the display of various front-side main controllers (1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, 3-bed lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, medal input lamp, credit display, payout display) attached to the front of the front panel R013 and rear-side main controller (set value display) attached to the rear of the front panel R013.

A central display substrate protective cover R012 for protecting the central display substrate R011 is attached to the central display substrate R011. The central display substrate protective cover R012 is made of a transparent resin to ensure the visibility of the central display substrate R011.

The upper portion of the central display board protection cover R012 slopes downward toward the rear. When the front panel R013 is closed, the shortest distance between the reel R002 and the top of the central display board protection cover R012 (corresponding to G in FIG. 54) is longer than the length B of the reel unit top screw R007 in the longitudinal direction (relationship B<G).

With these configurations, when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off and rolls forward, the central display board protection cover R012 protects the central display board R011, thereby preventing the reel unit upper screw R007 from damaging the central display board R011. In addition, since the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 is inclined, the reel unit upper screw R007 can be guided downward, and the reel R002 and the central display board protective cover R0 can be guided downward. 12 is longer than the length B of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the longitudinal direction, the reel unit upper screw R007 can guide the reel R002 downward without damaging it.

The shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 is shorter than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (relationship B>G), but the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 may be longer than the length C in the lateral direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (relationship C<G). In this case, since the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protection cover R012 is shorter than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007, there is a possibility of being caught. Therefore, even when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, the reel unit upper screw R007 is less likely to damage the reel R002, and it is possible to guide the reel unit upper screw R007 to the lower part of the housing while preventing damage.

The shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 may be shorter than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (relationship B>G), and the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 may be shorter than the length C in the lateral direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (relationship C>G). In this case, when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, the reel unit upper screw R007 is sandwiched between the reel R002 and the central display board protective cover R012 and stops. Therefore, the reel unit upper screw R007 can be visually recognized when the door is closed, making it easy to see that the reel unit upper screw R007 has fallen off.

Further, a plurality of reel unit rear upper openings R009 and reel unit rear lower openings R010 may be provided corresponding to each reel. In other words, the left reel has a left reel unit rear top opening and a left reel unit rear bottom opening, the middle reel has a middle rear top opening and a middle rear reel unit rear opening, and the right reel has a right rear top opening and a right rear bottom opening. With such a configuration, a reel unit upper rear opening R009 and a reel unit rear lower opening R010 corresponding to the dropout of the reel unit upper screw R007 corresponding to each reel are provided. Even if any reel unit upper screw R007 falls off and enters the reel unit R008, it can be discharged to the outside of the reel unit R008 from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 or the reel unit rear lower opening R010.

Also, the rear side of the reel unit R008 may be fully open. With such a configuration, even if the reel unit upper screw R007 rolls to the rear inside the reel unit R008, the rear of the reel unit R008 is not closed.

<Configuration for display of instruction information applicable to this example>
In an advantageous section, an AT lottery is executed as a process related to an instruction function, and when the AT lottery is won and the AT becomes executable, when the first stop left reel correct answer and the second stop reel correct answer (hereinafter referred to as the left middle right push order role) are won as a result of the internal lottery, a process for informing the player of the push order corresponding to the left middle right push order is executed. In addition, if the left, middle, right push order is operated in the correct order, the correct symbol combination (which may be composed of a plurality of symbol combinations) is always displayed, and an advantageous payout (for example, 10 coins) can be given to the player. Win or lose symbol combination is displayed and no payout is given to the player).

The notification processing when the left, middle, right push order is won is roughly divided into four notification means, and the notification is executed. The first is an instruction monitor (displaying the pressing order on the obtained number display 27 shown in FIG. 21), the second is a liquid crystal (display device 32 shown in FIG. 21), the third is a lamp (left operation instruction lamp 24a, middle operation instruction lamp 24b, and right operation instruction lamp 24c shown in FIG. 21), and the fourth is a speaker (speaker S shown in FIG. 21).

The instruction monitor has the contents described above, and the main control means uses the 7-segment display to notify the pressing order. The instruction monitor performs dynamic lighting control, digit 1 is the stored number display LED (upper digit) and ratio display LED (1000th digit), digit 2 is the stored number display LED (lower digit) and ratio display LED (100th digit), digit 3 is the acquired number display LED (upper digit) and ratio display LED (10th digit), and digit 4 is the acquired number display LED (lower digit), ratio display LED (1st digit) and advantageous section display LED. and the digit 5 is an input number display LED, a game start display LED, an input display LED, a replay display LED, and a setting display LED. Since the instruction monitor in this embodiment is also used as a display for the number of winnings, it is displayed when the digit is 4 (when displaying "=", it is displayed when the digit is 3).

Lighting of each digit is switched for each interrupt process, and when digit 4 is lighted after digit 4 is lighted, it is after 5 interrupts (11.175 ms later). In other words, a different location is lit for each interrupt. Since the lights are blinking at a high speed, the afterimages can make it appear to the player that the lights are always on.

As for the case of notifying the pressing order by the liquid crystal, under the condition that all the reels are rotating when the left, middle, right pressing order is won in the advantageous section, the image is displayed as ``123'', after that, after the left stop switch is operated, the image is displayed as ``_23'' (_ is blank), and after that, after the middle stop switch is operated, the image is displayed as ``__3'' (_ is blank). When ``123'' is displayed to emphasize the information corresponding to the stop switch to be operated now, ``1'' is displayed larger than ``2'' and ``3'' to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Similarly, for "__23" and "__3", the image display corresponding to the stop button to be operated at present is displayed in a large size. In addition, when the left stop switch is operated in a situation where the image "123" is displayed and the image is displayed as "_23" (_ is blank), the image display corresponding to the left stop button changes from "1" to blank.

In addition, the liquid crystal is controlled by the sub control board, and when the sub control board receives the pressing order information command related to the left, middle, right pressing sequence sent from the main control board, the command is acquired by the reception interrupt processing, and the acquired command is analyzed by the command analysis processing of the main loop processing of the sub control board. running. The sub-control board and the image control board may be composed of one board, but even in this case, the control section corresponding to the sub-control board and the control section corresponding to the image control board communicate information via commands.

As for the lamps, the middle panel lamp covering the front of the reel and the frame lamp on the upper part of the front panel correspond. As for the middle panel lamps, each reel is provided above, below, or both above and below, and under the condition that all the reels are rotating when the left, middle, right pushing order is won in an advantageous section, the middle panel lamp L corresponding to the left reel is lit, after that, after the left stop switch is operated, the middle panel lamp C corresponding to the middle reel is lit, and after that, after the middle stop switch is operated, the middle panel lamp R corresponding to the right reel is lit. In this way, by notifying the reel to be stopped now, the corresponding stop switch can be stopped. The shape and position of the middle panel lamp can be changed as appropriate, and the lighting mode can also be changed. It is sufficient if the player can recognize that the lamp corresponding to the left reel is lit when the middle panel lamp L is lit (the same applies to the middle panel lamp C and middle panel lamp R).

As for the frame lamps, the frame lamp L on the left side of the housing, the frame lamp C on the upper center of the housing, and the frame lamp R on the right side of the housing correspond to the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch, respectively.

In addition, the middle panel lamp and the frame lamp are controlled by the sub control board. When the sub control board receives a pressing order information command related to the left, middle, right pressing order transmitted from the main control board, the command is acquired by the reception interrupt processing, and the acquired command is analyzed by the command analysis processing of the main loop processing of the sub control board. The lamp substrate executes lighting control according to the lighting data.

As for speakers, an upper speaker L on the upper left side of the housing, an upper speaker R on the upper right side of the housing, and a lower speaker on the lower side of the housing are provided. When the left, middle, right correct answer pressing order is won, a process of outputting a voice "Left" from the upper speakers L and R is performed before the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. Then, after the left stop switch is performed by the player, a process of outputting a voice saying "I'm in the middle" is performed. Then, after the middle stop switch is performed by the player, a process of outputting a voice saying "right" is performed.

In addition, the middle panel lamp and the frame lamp are controlled by the sub-control board. When the sub-control board receives a push order information command related to the left, middle, right push sequence sent from the main control board, it acquires the command through reception interrupt processing, analyzes the acquired command by command analysis processing in the main loop processing of the sub-control board, and if it is determined to be a push order command as a result of the command analysis, acquires the corresponding voice data from the voice table, and transmits the acquired voice data command to the voice board that controls the speaker, thereby outputting voice from the speaker. running

The interrupt processing executed by the sub control board is executed every 1 ms, and is executed at an interval shorter than the interval 2.235 ms of the interrupt processing of the main control board. Also, when a command is received from the main control board, the command is obtained preferentially by generating a reception interrupt. As a result, it is possible to control the performance without missing commands from the main control board.

(Regarding the processing of various notification means when the push order is incorrect)
As for the instruction monitor, when the middle stop switch is first stopped under the condition that the left, middle, right pushing order is won and the pushing order is displayed on the instruction monitor (for example, '=1' is displayed on the instruction monitor), the display of the instruction monitor is continued, and when the last stop switch is released after all the reels are stopped, the display is initialized (becomes non-lighting) when the stop switch different from the correct pushing order is operated. After that, when an incorrect combination of symbols is displayed, "1" is displayed, which means the number of payouts. That is, when the left-middle-right pushing order is won and "=1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, when the left stop switch, which is the correct stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, the display of the instruction monitor maintains "=1" thereafter, and when the middle stop switch, which is the incorrect stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, the display of the instruction monitor maintains "=1" thereafter.

Concerning the liquid crystal, when the middle stop switch is stopped first under the condition that the left, middle, right pushing order is won and the pushing order is displayed on the liquid crystal (for example, '123' is displayed on the liquid crystal), control is performed not to display the full pushing order information on the liquid crystal at that point. That is, when the left-middle-right pushing order is won and "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal, if the left stop switch that is the correct stop operation for the first stop is operated to stop, then the display on the liquid crystal becomes "_23".

Regarding the lamp, when the middle stop switch is stopped first under the condition that the left, middle, right pushing order is won and the pushing order is displayed on the lamp (for example, the middle panel lamp L or the frame lamp L is lit), the middle panel lamp L or the frame lamp L is not lit at that time. That is, when the middle panel lamp L is turned on (or the frame lamp L is turned on) by winning the left-middle-right push-up order, if the left stop switch that is the correct stop operation for the first stop is operated to stop, then the middle panel lamp C is turned on (or the frame lamp C is turned on).

Regarding the speaker, after the left, middle, right push order is won and the push order is notified by voice, the push order is not repeatedly reported, so even when the middle stop switch is stopped first after that, the voice is not newly output. That is, when the left-middle-right pushing order is won, when the stop operation of the left stop switch which is the correct stop operation for the first stop is performed, the sound of ``middle'' is output from the speaker thereafter, while when the stop operation of the middle stop switch which is the incorrect stop operation which is the first stop is performed, the sound regarding the pushing order is not output from the speaker after that.

(Press order notification timing based on reception of start switch operation)
As a result of the internal lottery executed based on the acceptance of the operation of the start switch, the left, middle, right pressing order is won, and as the timing for displaying the pressing order information on the instruction monitor after that, it is conceivable to perform the display processing immediately before the reel rotation start processing (acceleration processing for all reels). With such a configuration, the acceleration process is executed as the drum rotation start process, and then the constant speed process is executed, after which the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, so that the pressing order information can be displayed before the player operates the stop switch.

Informing the pressing order by means of the liquid crystal, lamp, or speaker cannot be executed unless information is received from the main control board. Therefore, it is necessary to start the execution of the informing process before the process of starting the rotation of the barrel. Specifically, after winning the pushing order, the setting processing of the pushing order command is executed by the processing of the main control board, then the pushing order command is transmitted, and the sub control board executes it based on the reception of the pushing order command.

In this way, the processing timing of executing the drum rotation start processing as the processing of the main control board which is the starting point of notification on the instruction monitor, which is the starting point of the processing related to the notification of the pressing order, is later than the execution of the pressing order command setting processing as the processing of the main control board which is the starting point of notification in various effect devices (liquid crystal, lamp, or speaker). However, in reality, the process executed by the main control board takes less overall processing time than the process executed by the sub-control board after the pushing order command is transmitted to the sub-control board. Therefore, if the start switch is operated after the wait period has elapsed, the pressing order can be reported to the instruction monitor more quickly than the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker. With this configuration, the most reliable pressing order information managed by the main control board can be reported first, and then the pressing order information managed by the sub-control board can be reported as supplementary information, so that the player can easily recognize the pressing order information managed by the most reliable main control board, and the possibility that the player's operation will make the pressing order incorrect can be reduced.

(When the start switch is operated after the wait period has passed)
Next, a detailed description will be given of a situation in which the start switch is operated after the wait period has elapsed and the left-middle-right push order win is won.

When the left-middle-right pushing order is won as a result of the internal lottery executed based on the reception of the start switch operated after the wait period measured from the previous game has passed (4.1 seconds have passed) during the advantageous section, the command corresponding to the left-center-right pushing order is won in the command buffer by the main loop processing of the main control board, and the command stored in the command buffer is transmitted at any time by the command transmission processing executed in the interrupt processing of the main control board.

In the main loop processing of the main control board, after the command corresponding to the left, middle, right push order is stored in the command buffer, it is determined whether or not the wait time has passed (it is determined that the wait time has passed because the wait time has passed in this situation), and when it is determined that the wait period has passed, the command number to be displayed on the command monitor is stored in the corresponding address of the RWM, and in the command monitor lighting process executed in the interrupt processing of the main control board, the RWM address in which the command number is stored is acquired, and the command monitor is turned on. light up. After the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor in the main loop processing of the main control board is stored in the corresponding address of the RWM, the processing for accelerating all the reels is executed.

With such a configuration, even if the lighting control of the instruction monitor is executed after storing the command corresponding to the left, middle, right push order in the command buffer, if the wait period has passed (or the remaining wait period is extremely short), the push order display on the instruction monitor can be notified prior to the push order display on the other sub-control boards.

(If the start switch is operated before the wait period has elapsed)
Next, a detailed description will be given of a situation in which the start switch is operated before the wait period elapses and the left-middle-right push order win is won.

When the left-middle-right push order is won as a result of an internal lottery executed based on the reception of the start switch operated before the wait period measured from the previous game has passed in the advantageous section, a command corresponding to the left-middle-right push order is won in a command buffer by the main loop processing of the main control board, and the command stored in the command buffer is transmitted at any time by command transmission processing executed by the interrupt processing of the main control board.

In the main loop processing of the main control board, after storing the command corresponding to the left, middle, right push order in the command buffer, it is determined whether or not the wait time has passed (in this situation, the wait time has not passed, so it is determined that it has not passed), and then the determination process is repeatedly executed until the wait period has passed. Get the RWM address where the number is stored and turn on the instruction monitor. After the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor in the main loop processing of the main control board is stored in the corresponding address of the RWM, the processing for accelerating all the reels is executed.

With such a configuration, even if the lighting control of the instruction monitor is executed after the command corresponding to the left, middle, right push order is stored in the command buffer, the push order display on the other sub-control board can be notified prior to the push order display on the instruction monitor in the situation before the wait period elapses.

This is based on the fact that it is better to notify the display of the instruction monitor as early as possible, but if it is too early, the expectation after the start switch is operated will be lost (the player operates the start lever in anticipation of the winning combination for the AT lottery, but the lottery for the AT will not be performed immediately (because it will be known that the winning combination is low), so it is more effective to notify after a certain period of time from the operation of the start switch to improve the interest of the game. For this reason, the instruction monitor is configured to be displayed in accordance with the spinning start processing (acceleration processing of all reels), but if the notification of the pressing order is too late, there is a possibility that the player will operate in a different pressing order than the pressing order notified by the game machine.

As processing in the sub-control board, when a left-center-right push order command is transmitted from the main control board, it is stored in the command reception buffer of the sub-control board. When the left-middle-right push order command is stored in the command reception buffer, reception interrupt processing occurs, the received command is analyzed, and the analyzed command is saved (in this example, the left-middle-right push order command is saved). It takes about 16ms from the time the command is received until the command is saved.

When the left, middle, right correct image is displayed by the liquid crystal, the left, middle, right push order command (a modified command may be used, but in this example, it is transmitted as it is) is transmitted to the image control board in the interrupt processing of the sub control board. Since the drawing process in this embodiment is executed at 30 fps, the drawing speed per sheet is about 3.3 ms. Further, the period until the data (left, middle, right pressing order command) stored in the sub control board is transmitted to the image control board is 1 ms.

When the left correct information is to be notified by the lamp, a lamp pattern corresponding to the left, middle, right pressing order command is selected from the lamp data table stored in the sub control board, and transmitted to the corresponding lamp board to perform lighting control. Alternatively, a left, middle, right push order command is transmitted to the lamp board in interrupt processing in the sub control board, and when the lamp board receives the left, middle, right push order command, a lamp pattern corresponding to the left, middle, right push order command is selected from a lamp data table stored in the lamp board, and lighting control is executed. It takes about 1 ms to turn on the lamp after the lamp pattern is selected. In addition, the period until the data (lamp pattern or left-center-right pressing order command) stored in the sub-control board is transmitted to the lamp board is 1 ms.

In the case of executing the left correct answer notification by the speaker, a sound pattern corresponding to the left, middle, right pressing order command is selected from the sound data table stored in the sub control board, and transmitted to the corresponding speaker board to execute the sound output control. Alternatively, a left, middle, right push order command is transmitted to the speaker board in interrupt processing in the sub control board, and when the speaker board receives the left, middle, right push order command, a voice pattern corresponding to the left, middle, right push order command is selected from a voice data table stored in the speaker board, and voice output control is executed. It takes about 1 ms after the voice pattern is selected until the voice is output. In addition, the period until the data (audio pattern or left-center-right pressing order command) stored in the sub-control board is transmitted to the speaker control board is 1 ms.

Due to the processing on the sub-control board side described above, the pressing order notification order on the sub-control board side is the order of the lamp, the speaker, and the liquid crystal. The notification processing timings of the lamp and the speaker are substantially the same, but due to the relationship between the speed of light and the speed of sound, it is often the order of the lamp and the speaker that is easily recognized by the player.

With such a configuration, the player can easily concentrate on the game at the start of the game, the notification by the lamp can be performed at the fastest speed, and then the speaker and the liquid crystal can be used to make the pressing order easy to understand and prevent the player from making a mistake in the pressing order.

(Press order notification timing based on stop switch operation reception)
As a result of the internal lottery executed after the operation of the start switch is accepted, the right-middle-right pushing order is won, and information on the correct operation mode regarding the left-middle-right pushing order is reported by the instruction monitor, the liquid crystal, the lamp and the speaker, and when the correct first stop operation (left stop switch first stop in this example) is accepted, the display of the instruction monitor does not change, but the pushing order information mode by the liquid crystal, the lamp and the speaker changes.

As a result of the internal lottery executed after the start switch operation is accepted, the left-middle-right pushing order is won, and under the condition that the correct operation mode information regarding the left-middle-right pushing order is reported by the instruction monitor, the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker, when the correct first stop operation (in this example, the left stop switch first stop) is accepted, the left stop switch reception command is stored in the command transmission buffer of the main control board. A left stop switch acceptance command is transmitted to the sub control board in the interrupt processing of the main control board that occurs thereafter. When the sub-control board receives the left stop switch acceptance command, it generates a reception interrupt process, analyzes the received command, and saves the analyzed command (in this example, the left stop switch acceptance command is saved). It takes about 16ms from the time the command is received until the command is saved.

When the middle second stop image (“2” is highlighted in “_23”) is displayed by the liquid crystal, the left stop switch reception command (the command may be processed but is transmitted as it is in this example) is transmitted to the image control board in the interrupt processing in the sub control board. Since the drawing process in this embodiment is executed at 30 fps, the drawing speed per sheet is about 3.3 ms. Further, the period until the data (left stop switch reception command) stored in the sub control board is transmitted to the image control board is 1 ms.

When executing middle second stop notification (turning off the left lamp and turning on the middle lamp) by the lamp, a lamp pattern corresponding to the left stop switch reception command is selected from the lamp data table stored in the sub control board and transmitted to the corresponding lamp board to execute lighting control. Alternatively, a left stop switch acceptance command is transmitted to the lamp board in interrupt processing in the sub control board, and when the lamp board receives the left stop switch acceptance command, a lamp pattern corresponding to the left stop switch acceptance command is selected from a lamp data table stored in the lamp board to execute lighting control. It takes about 1 ms to turn on the lamp after the lamp pattern is selected. Also, the period until the data (ramp pattern or left stop switch reception command) stored in the sub-control board is transmitted to the lamp board is 1 ms.

In the case of executing middle second stop notification (outputting a voice saying "it's in the middle") by a speaker, a voice pattern corresponding to a left stop switch reception command is selected from a voice data table stored in a sub control board and transmitted to the corresponding speaker board to execute voice output control. Alternatively, the left stop switch reception command is transmitted to the speaker board by interrupt processing in the sub control board, and when the speaker board receives the left stop switch reception command, a sound pattern corresponding to the left stop switch reception command is selected from a sound data table stored in the speaker board to execute sound output control. It takes about 1 ms after the voice pattern is selected until the voice is output. Also, the period until the data (audio pattern or left stop switch reception command) stored in the sub-control board is transmitted to the speaker control board is 1 ms.

Due to the processing on the sub-control board side described above, the pressing order notification order on the sub-control board side is the order of the lamp, the speaker, and the liquid crystal. The notification processing timings of the lamp and the speaker are substantially the same, but due to the relationship between the speed of light and the speed of sound, it may be configured so that the order of the lamp and the speaker is easily recognized by the player, or the order of the speaker and the lamp may be configured.

With such a configuration, the player can easily focus on the start of the second stop operation, the notification by the lamp can be performed at the fastest speed, and then the speaker and the liquid crystal can be used to make the pressing order easy to understand and prevent the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. In this example, the configuration related to the notification by the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker in the first stop operation and the second stop operation is described in detail, but it is not limited to this, and the same configuration as the second stop can be applied to the third stop.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the buttons used for effects such as the effect button P381 and the sub-switch 20 briefly explained in FIG.

The basic structure of the effect input button 1000 is roughly divided into three parts: a push-down part 1010, an outer wall part 1020, and an internal structure part 1030. As other structures, there are a fixing part (not shown) for fixing the effect input button 1000 to the game machine P, and a vibration generating part (not shown) for vibrating the entire effect input button, but the description in this embodiment is omitted.

The outer wall portion 1020 has, for example, an engine cylinder-like cylindrical structure inside, and the inner diameter portion 2022 is configured with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the push-down portion 1010 so that the piston can move smoothly after the push-down portion 1010 is mounted. In particular, when a vibration generating portion is provided, the clearance between the inner diameter portion 1022 and the push-down portion 1010 is set to be large in order to positively vibrate the push-down portion 1010 .

The push-down portion 1010 has a cylindrical shape with a hollowed-out interior, for example, like an engine piston.

The internal structural portion 1030 is mainly composed of a spring member (not shown) that biases and holds the push-down portion 1010 at an unoperated position and expands and contracts according to the player's push-down operation, an operation detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the operation detection unit has moved to a predetermined position due to the player's push-down operation, and a light emitting portion 1034 having a plurality of light sources k for illuminating the push-down surface 1011.

The operation of the effect input button 1000 will be explained based on the operation explanatory cross-sectional view 1 of the effect input button whose pressing part is flat in FIG. 57 and the operation explanatory cross-sectional view 2 of the effect input button whose pressing surface is curved in FIG. , 1072 along the walls. At this time, the distances between the light-emitting portions 1034 and 1084 of the internal structural portions 1030 and 1080 and the back surfaces of the pressing surfaces 1011 and 1061 become closer. Further, when the player stops operating the pressing surfaces 1011 and 1061, the pressing portions 1030 and 1060 are biased and held at the initial positions using the repulsive force of the spring members.

In recent years, the sizes of the effect button P381 and the subswitch 20 have gradually increased, and the effect input button 1000 having large pressing surfaces 1011 and 1061 and a plurality of light sources k has been adopted. However, if the size of the effect input button 1000 is increased, there is a possibility that a problem that does not occur with the normal size effect input button 1000 will occur.

First, the first possible problem will be explained based on the effect input button problem explanatory diagram No. 1 in FIG. 59 . A light emitting part 1034 for illuminating the whole of the pressing part 1010 with the pressing surface 1011 as the center is provided at the bottom of the back surface of the pressing surface 1011 of the normal effect input button 1000 . In addition, when the stroke of the pressing part 1010 is long, it is necessary to sufficiently illuminate the pressing surface with the light of the light emitting part even when the pressing operation is not performed. However, as the size of the effect input button 1000 increases, the area of the pressing surface 1011 increases, and when operated with a strong force, the curvature of the central portion of the pressing surface 1011 increases and there is a risk of contact destruction of the light source k (e.g., LED) mounted in the center of the light emitting part 1034. - 特許庁

Next, the second conceivable problem will be explained based on the effect input button problem explanatory diagram No. 2 in FIG. 60 . As a normal operation, the pressing portion 1060 of the effect input button 1000 performs reciprocating motion by the player's operation, but especially in the case of the effect input button 1000 equipped with the vibration generator, the clearance between the inner diameter portion 1072 of the outer wall portion 1070 and the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion 1060 is large, so eccentric movement as shown in FIG. 60 may occur. At this time, the inner diameter portion 1072 of the outer wall portion 1070 may be damaged, and the light source k arranged around the light emitting portion 1084 may collide with the back side of the pressing surface 1061 and be destroyed. The eccentric movement means that the player normally pushes down the center of the push-down surface 1061, but the push-down part 1060 moves not in the vertical direction but in the oblique direction due to repeated hits or the push-down part deviating from the center and pushing down.

In the event that the component parts of the push-down portion 1060 collide with the light source k due to the eccentric movement described above and are destroyed, once damage occurs in the inner diameter portion 1072 of the outer wall portion 1070 due to operational deterioration, the eccentric movement will continue to occur, and furthermore, the malfunction of the push-down mechanism will worsen, and there is a possibility that a large number of light sources k in a wide range will be destroyed by contact.

Therefore, as countermeasures against the operation failure of the effect input button 1000, the first measure is to guard against the event that the component parts come into contact with the light source k, and the second measure is to destroy some of the multiple mounted light sources to generate an abnormality in the light emitting state and to recognize the defect of the effect input button mechanism at an early stage. In FIG. 60, the case where the pressing portion 1060 moves to the left side as viewed from the front is illustrated, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration shown in FIG.

As for the first countermeasure against light source destruction, an example of a countermeasure against the central portion of the pressing surface 1011 of the pressing portion 1010 of the effect input button 1000 being curved by the operation of the player and destroying the light source k will be described using the countermeasure explanatory diagram No. 1 of FIG. This embodiment is just an example, and the shape and arrangement of parts other than the main part can be changed as appropriate.

A performance input button 1000 is composed of an outer wall part 1020, a depression part 1010 and an internal structure part 1030, and a screw n having a higher screw head height than the light source is adopted in the vicinity of the light source k which is closest to the rear surface of the most depressed surface of the light source part 1034 constituting a part of the internal structure part 1030. - 特許庁By doing so, the pressing surface 1011 deformed into the screw head collides with the deformed pressing surface 1011 without colliding with the light source k. By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage to the light source k while fixing the light emitting section 1034 . In addition, by adopting a silver-colored screw n such as chrome plating for the protective plating of the screw n arranged near the light source k, the screw head diffusely reflects the light emitted from the light source k, and a brighter light emission mode can be expressed.

Next, the light source destruction countermeasures will be described based on FIG. 62, which is an arrangement example of the light source k mounted on the substrate 1111 of the light emitting units 1100A and 1100B, and positioning and fixing means such as bosses b and screws n, and FIG. This embodiment is just an example, and the shape and arrangement of parts other than the main part can be changed as appropriate. Also, the substrate of the light emitting portion is described using an ultra-thin film type substrate in the examples, and the notation of the thickness direction is omitted in the drawings. Of course, a conventional glass epoxy resin may be used for the substrate of the light emitting section of this embodiment.

The substrates of the light emitting units 1100A and 1100B have the same shape as the pressing surface 1061, and are provided mainly at the central portion and the peripheral portion of the substrate as the arrangement positions of the light sources k. As a method for fixing the light emitting portions 1100A and 1100B, fixing by positioning bosses b and screws n is used. At this time, a screw n and a boss b are provided near the light source k. In particular, in the case of the light source k arranged on the periphery, the positioning fixing means is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the light source k. By doing so, it is possible to avoid breaking the light source k at the constituent parts of the pressing portion 1060 due to the eccentric movement caused by the player pressing the peripheral portion of the pressing surface 1061 .

A modification of the structure of the inner diameter portion of the outer wall portion 1300 shown in FIG. 64 and a modification of the structure of the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion 1200 that contacts the inner diameter portion of the outer wall portion will be described. In this embodiment, an example in which a convex rail r having a semicircular cross section provided on the outer diameter portion 1262 of the push-down portion 1200 and a concave rail h having a semicircular cross section provided on the inner diameter portion 1372 of the outer wall portion 1300 are fitted together will be described.

As a modified example of the effect input button 1000, semicircular concave rails h are provided in the direction of 0 o'clock, 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock and 9 o'clock when the inner diameter part 1372 of the outer wall part 1300 is viewed from the plane, and the cross section of the inner diameter part 1372 that continues in the vertical direction forms a half-moon concave shape. In addition, semicircular convex rails r are provided in the 0 o'clock, 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, and 9 o'clock directions of the outer diameter portion 1262 of the push-down portion 1200 when viewed from the top, and the cross section of the outer diameter portion 1262 that continues in the vertical direction forms a half-moon convex rib shape. By interlocking these structures, eccentric movement is less likely to occur, and even if eccentric movement occurs, the frequency of eccentric movement in the 0 o'clock direction, 3 o'clock direction, 6 o'clock direction and 9 o'clock direction where each rail shape is applied increases.

With such a configuration, if the bosses b and screws n for fixing the substrate 1111 of the light source k are arranged in the 0 o'clock direction, 3 o'clock direction, 6 o'clock direction, and 9 o'clock direction, it is possible to efficiently prevent breakage of the light source k due to eccentric movement with a small configuration. In this embodiment, an example in which four concave rails h and four convex rails r are employed has been described, but the size and shape of the effect input button 1000 can be appropriately changed. Further, by arranging a positioning fixing means such as a boss b and a screw n for fixing the light emitting portion at a position overlapping with the location where the concave rail h and the convex rail r are provided, and mounting the light source k in the vicinity of the boss b and the screw n or on the inner peripheral side (toward the center of the substrate of the light emitting portion 1100), it is possible to effectively prevent the light source from being destroyed due to the eccentric movement of the push-down portion 1060. As a result, if the arrangement positions of the concave rail h and the convex rail r, the substrate fixing means of the light emitting unit 1100 and the light source mounting position are linked and set, the production input button 1000 suitable for cost can be provided.

In the above description, the boss b and the screw n are used as the substrate positioning and fixing means for the light emitting unit 1100. However, depending on the shape of the substrate 1110 of the light emitting unit 1100, the size of the substrate 1110, the mounting angle of the substrate 1110, and the frequency of occurrence of defects, the boss b may be used as a fixing means for the substrate 1110, and the portion for protecting the light source k may be selected for the boss b at the time of design.

Although the method for preventing the destruction of the light source k due to the defect of the effect input button 1000 has been explained so far, it is conceivable that the destruction of the light source k cannot be prevented depending on the inherent structure of the effect input button 1000 or the degree of the defect. Therefore, an embodiment in which the light irradiation ranges of the adjacent light sources k are overlapped with each other will be described with reference to FIG. 65 for explaining the LED irradiation ranges.

FIG. 65(A) shows areas w1 and w2, which are illuminated by the respective light sources k, with solid lines and alternate long and short dash lines, respectively. As shown in the figure, the light irradiation ranges of the two adjacent light sources k partly overlap to irradiate the pressed surface with light, and even if one of the light sources is destroyed, for example, the other light source k can irradiate the pressed surface with light, thereby making the light emission unevenness inconspicuous. FIG. 65(B) shows areas w3, w4, and w5 illuminated by a plurality of continuously arranged light sources k, respectively, with solid lines, one-dot chain lines, and two-dot chain lines. By illuminating the regions that illuminate the depressed surface 1011 in this way, it is possible to make the light emission unevenness caused by the breakage of the light source k less noticeable. FIG. 65(B) illustrates an example in which three light sources k arranged in a row overlap three regions for illuminating the depressed surface 1011, but it is also possible to achieve further effects by arranging a plurality of light sources k scattered over a wide area so as to illuminate the wide area overlappingly.

Next, as a second countermeasure for the operation failure of the effect input button 1000, a method of causing an abnormality in the light emitting state by destroying a part of the light source k mounted in a plurality and recognizing the defect of the effect input button mechanism at an early stage will be described. Similar to the effect input button shown in FIG. 58, the effect input button of this embodiment has a combination of an outer wall portion, a depressing portion, and an internal structural portion. However, the mounting position of the fixing means for mounting the substrate of the light-emitting portion of the internal component is different, and the structure is one step lower in the vertical direction, and the substrate has a similar structure. Note that descriptions of the same parts as those in the above-described configuration are omitted.

In general, for convenience of design, general resin is used as the material of the effect input button 1000, and a material suitable for abrasion resistance and slidability such as polyacetal resin is not used. Therefore, if a remarkably large stress or a continuous stress is continuously applied in the pressing direction different from the set operation direction of the pressing portion 1060, the structure of the effect input button 1000 will be defective, and abnormal behavior such as eccentric movement will be repeated. There is a possibility that it will develop into a serious problem such as not passing through.

Therefore, the present embodiment enables early detection of the mechanical failure of the effect input button 1000 by destroying the light source k. More specifically, it is possible to early detect a phenomenon in which the light source is repeatedly destroyed in a short period of time even if the light emitting part 1094 is replaced without knowing the cause of the failure, or a game machine P giving an unpleasant impression to the player due to the mechanical failure of the effect input button 1000.例文帳に追加

The process of defect detection will be described using the illustration of light source destruction caused by eccentric movement of the effect input button 1000 in FIG. The outer shape of the substrate of the light-emitting portion 1094 has the same shape as the pressing surface, and the light sources are mainly provided at the central portion and the peripheral portion of the substrate as positions for arranging the light sources. As a fixing method of the light emitting part 1094, fixing by a positioning boss b and a screw n is used. By doing so, the light source k is destroyed at the component of the pressing portion 1060 due to the eccentric movement caused by the player pressing the peripheral portion of the pressing surface.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to detect a mechanical failure of the effect input button 1000 at an early stage. Further, when one light source k is destroyed, a plurality of surrounding light sources may be configured not to emit light. Further, by making the light emission pattern and the lighting pattern of the light source k the same, the destruction of the light source k may be easily discovered early due to the fact that the light source k which should be lit is not lit.

Furthermore, the appearance frequency/execution frequency of the light emission pattern that makes the lighting pattern the same may be set to be the highest. By doing so, the game parlor manager can quickly discover the mechanical malfunction of the effect input button 1000 without touching the effect input button 1000. - 特許庁Further, if the above-described convex rail r and concave rail h are employed, the locations where damage is expected can be limited, and furthermore, by combining the light source k corresponding to the location where damage is expected with a relatively low unit price and a socket-type light source replaceable structure, it is possible not only to discover the malfunction of the effect input button 1000 at an early stage, but also to easily recycle the light emitting unit 1094, and to replace the light source k without submitting a notification of approval of change to the local police station.

(Part 1) A summary of the configuration for solving the above-described problem of the effect input button is as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the pressing portion at a predetermined position;
a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for emitting light is mounted inside the pressing portion;
a detection unit that detects the detection target portion;
A button unit comprising at least
The pressing surface and the light emitting unit are configured so that the distance between the pressing surface and the light emitting unit is reduced by the pressing operation,
The substrate is locked by a fixing means,
It is characterized in that the pressing surface and the light source are not in contact with each other when the pressing surface is pressed down and comes into contact with the fixing means.
For more information,
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the pressing portion at a predetermined position;
a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for emitting light is mounted inside the pressing portion;
a detection unit that detects the detection target portion;
A button unit comprising at least
The pressing surface and the light emitting unit are configured so that the distance between the pressing surface and the light emitting unit is reduced by the pressing operation,
When a central portion of the pressing surface is deformed due to a large stress applied to the pressing surface operated by the player, it is the fixing means of the substrate, which is larger than the light source in the height direction, first to come into contact with the back side of the pressing surface among the parts constituting the light emitting part.
As an effect, it is possible to prevent breakage of the light source because the pressing surface is deformed and does not come into contact with the light source.

(Part 2) A summary of the configuration for solving the above-described problem of the effect input button is as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
A button unit comprising at least a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position, a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for emitting light is mounted inside the push-down portion, and a detection portion for detecting the detection target portion,
The pressing surface and the light-emitting part are configured so that the distance between them narrows when the pressing operation is performed,
The substrate has a positioning portion,
When a pressing operation is performed on the pressing surface and the positioning portion is contacted, the pressing surface and the light source are not in contact with each other.
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
A button unit comprising at least a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position, a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for emitting light is mounted inside the push-down portion, and a detection portion for detecting the detection target portion,
The pressing surface and the light-emitting part are configured so that the distance between them is narrowed by the pressing operation, and when the central portion of the pressing surface is deformed due to excessive stress acting on the pressing surface operated by the player, the positioning means of the substrate, which is larger than the light source in the height direction, is the first to come into contact with the back side of the pressing surface among the parts constituting the light-emitting part.
As an effect, it is possible to prevent breakage of the light source because the pressing surface is deformed and does not come into contact with the light source.

(Part 3) The configuration for solving the problem of the effect input button described above is summarized as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
A button unit comprising: an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding an outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position;
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the peripheral edge of the substrate of the light emitting unit, and a fixing means for the substrate having a height direction larger than that of the light sources is provided at a portion further outside an imaginary line connecting the plurality of mounted light sources,
The substrate is locked by a fixing means,
The back surface of the pressing surface and the light source are not in contact with each other when the pressing surface is pressed down and comes into contact with the fixing means.
As an effect, when the push-down part is eccentrically moved, it is possible to prevent the light source from being damaged by placing the substrate fixing means on the outer peripheral side of the light source in order to prevent the push-down part from coming into contact with the light source of the light emitting part.

(Part 4) The configuration for solving the problem of the effect input button described above is summarized as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
A button unit comprising: an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding an outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position;
The substrate has a positioning portion,
It is configured such that when the pressing surface is pressed down and comes into contact with the positioning portion, the pressing surface and the light source are not in contact with each other.
For more information,
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
A button unit comprising: an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding an outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position;
The substrate has a positioning portion, a plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate peripheral portion of the light emitting portion, and a positioning means for the substrate that is larger than the light sources in the height direction is provided in a portion further outside an imaginary line connecting the plurality of mounted light sources.
As an effect, in order to prevent contact between the pressing part and the light source of the light emitting part when the pressing part is eccentrically moved, it is possible to prevent damage to the light source by placing the fixing means on the outer peripheral side of the light source.

(Part 5) The configuration for solving the above-described problem of the effect input button is summarized as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
A button unit comprising: an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding an outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position;
The substrate is locked by a fixing means,
It is configured such that when the pressing surface is pressed down and comes into contact with the light source, the rear surface of the pressing surface and the fixing means are not in contact with each other.
For more information,
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
A button unit comprising: an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding an outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position;
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting unit, and the distance between the back surface of the pressing surface and the arrangement position of the fixing means of the substrate is set to a position farther than the distance between the arrangement positions of the plurality of light sources and the back surface of the pressing surface.
As an effect, when the pressing part is eccentrically moved, the pressing part and the light source of the light emitting part come into contact with each other, and the light source stops emitting light.

(Part 6) Regarding the problem of the effect input button described above, the configuration to solve is summarized as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
A button unit comprising: an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding an outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position;
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting unit, and a plurality of types of light emission patterns are implemented by the plurality of light sources,
Among the light emission patterns executed during a predetermined game time, the plurality of light sources are characterized by having the highest rate of execution with the same light emission pattern.
As an effect, when a defect occurs due to the destruction of the light source, it can be easily found when the adjacent light source and the light emission pattern are the same. Therefore, if the same light emission pattern as that of the adjacent light source is frequently emitted, the defect of the light source can be found early.

(Part 7) Regarding the problem of the effect input button described above, the configuration for solving the problem is summarized as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
A button unit comprising at least a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position, a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for emitting light is mounted inside the push-down portion, and a detection portion for detecting the detection target portion,
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting unit, and the light irradiation ranges of the plurality of light sources are mounted so as to always overlap adjacent light sources.
As an effect, when a problem occurs due to the destruction of the light source, by overlapping the light irradiation range of the light source with the problem and the adjacent light source, it is possible to reduce the darkening of a part of the light irradiation area when all the lights are turned on.
<Sixth embodiment>

Next, the mechanism for transmitting vibration generated from the vibrating device provided for the effect button in the pachinko game machine will be described.

In the pachinko game machine, a configuration capable of executing button effects will be described in detail below. Here, the button effect in the pachinko game machine is to display an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the effect button at a predetermined timing during the pattern change, and perform a predetermined operation on the effect button during the button effective period during which the operation prompting image is displayed (a single press operation that turns ON→OFF within 0.3 seconds, a long press operation that turns ON→OFF for 0.3 seconds or more, a repeated operation that performs ON→OFF multiple times within 0.3 seconds, etc.). A series of effects in which the contents of the screen and the color of the characters suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit, etc.) are called button effects. When the button effective period ends without execution of a predetermined operation for the performance button during the button effective period, the post-operation effect may not be executed, or the post-operation effect may be executed at the end timing of the button effective period. Further, the button valid period may be set even during the period in which the operation prompting image is not displayed (a button effect in which the operation prompting image is not displayed may be executed).

Here, the predetermined button effect described in detail in this example is a effect mode in which the effect button vibrates while the operation prompting image is being displayed (or during the button valid period) to notify the player that the operation of the effect button is valid. Incidentally, the predetermined button effect is referred to as effect A in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, even if the operation of the effect button is accepted, the vibration of the effect button continues for a certain period of time. The magnitude of vibration is determined by the magnitude of vibration displacement (displacement width), the speed of vibration, the acceleration of vibration displacement, etc. However, in this embodiment, only the extent to which the magnitude of vibration displacement is transmitted between different members will be referred to. Note that the magnitude of displacement is, for example, the width between the highest position and the lowest position when the presentation A is executed and the presentation button vibrates up and down. Note that the direction of vibration is not limited to the vertical direction, and the maximum width in any linear direction may be taken as the magnitude of displacement.

In this embodiment, the effect button vibrates when the effect A is executed, and the displacement of the vibration of the effect button is 1 cm.

When playing a game with a pachinko game machine, the player plays the game while touching the handle, but if the displacement of the vibration of the performance button is transmitted to the handle without being damped, the player's operation of the shooting intensity is affected, and the game ball is shot with an unintended shooting intensity, resulting in an unexpected loss.

In FIG. 67, the parts that connect the effect buttons and the handle operated by the player are connected by one part (front member).
Further, when the Pachinko game machine is viewed from the front, in the straight line from the performance button to the handle, the portion where the performance button of the front member is connected and the portion where the handle is connected do not include either substantially right angle or substantially curved shape, and vibration can be transmitted linearly.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the performance button at this time is 1 cm as described above.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the front member which is a member different from the production button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the front member becomes 0.9 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front member to the handle, which is a member different from the front member. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.8 cm.
In this way, when the vibration of the effect button passes through only one component from the effect button to the handle, a large vibration is transmitted. Therefore, in this example, the configuration of the game machine in which the vibration generated in the effect button is difficult to be transmitted to the handle will be described in detail below.

In FIG. 68, the parts connecting the performance buttons and the handle operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, lower member), and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws.
When the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front, the upper plate, the upper member, and the lower member do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes in the straight line from the performance button to the handle.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the upper plate which is a member different from the production button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper plate becomes 0.9 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member becomes 0.7 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Furthermore, since the upper member and the lower member are connected with screws, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the lower member becomes 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the upper member and the lower member in the same figure, the screws also dampen the vibration, so the vibration can be damped more than when the two different members are joined. It should be noted that, as in the case of the upper plate and the upper member in the same figure, when no reference is made to the method of connecting two different members, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joining portion.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.2 cm.

Thus, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the performance button to the handle, the displacement of vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed from the performance button to the handle.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is possible to create a game machine that hardly affects the player's shooting operation and that the strength of the handle is hardly changed by the execution of the button presentation.

In FIG. 69, a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, and lower member) are used to connect the performance buttons and the handle operated by the player, and the upper member and the lower member are connected by fitting. The snap-in type means that at least a part of the joined members is snap-fitted so that the joining of two different members is not released even if force is applied in one direction, as described in the dotted circle in the figure.
When the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front, the upper plate, the upper member, and the lower member do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes in the straight line from the performance button to the handle.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the upper plate which is a member different from the production button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper plate becomes 0.9 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member becomes 0.7 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Further, since the upper member and the lower member are connected by fitting, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the lower member becomes 0.2 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by a fitting type, as in the case of the upper member and the lower member in FIG. 69, vibration is further damped by the fitting type joint as compared with a straight joint as shown in FIG.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.1 cm.

Thus, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the performance button to the handle, the displacement of vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed from the performance button to the handle.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is possible to create a game machine that hardly affects the player's shooting operation and that the strength of the handle is hardly changed by the execution of the button presentation.

In FIG. 70, the parts connecting the performance buttons and the handle operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, lower member), and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws.
When viewed from the front of the pachinko game machine, in the straight line from the performance button to the handle, the upper plate and the upper member do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes, and the lower member includes a substantially right-angled shape.

When the production A is selected and executed, the production button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the upper plate which is a member different from the production button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper plate becomes 0.9 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member becomes 0.7 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Furthermore, since the upper member and the lower member are connected with screws, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the lower member becomes 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the upper member and the lower member in the same figure, the screws also dampen the vibration, so the vibration can be damped more than when the two different members are joined.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Further, since the lower member includes a substantially right-angled shape, when the vibration is transmitted through the lower member, the vibration cannot be transmitted in a straight line, and the vibration is more attenuated than when it can be transmitted in a straight line, and the displacement of the vibration in the handle becomes 0.15 cm.

Thus, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the performance button to the handle, the displacement of vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed from the performance button to the handle.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is possible to create a game machine that hardly affects the player's shooting operation and that the strength of the handle is hardly changed by the execution of the button presentation.

In FIG. 71, the parts connecting the effect buttons and the handle operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, lower member), and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws.
When viewed from the front of the pachinko game machine, in the straight line from the performance button to the handle, the upper plate and the upper member do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes, and the lower member includes a substantially curved shape.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the upper plate which is a member different from the production button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper plate becomes 0.9 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member becomes 0.7 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Furthermore, since the upper member and the lower member are connected with screws, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the lower member becomes 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the upper member and the lower member in the same figure, the screws also dampen the vibration, so the vibration can be damped more than when the two different members are joined.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, so that the vibration is transmitted between different parts, and furthermore, since the lower member includes a substantially curved shape, the vibration is damped more than the case where the substantially curved shape is not included, and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.12 cm.

Thus, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the performance button to the handle, the displacement of vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed from the performance button to the handle.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is possible to create a game machine that hardly affects the player's shooting operation and that the strength of the handle is hardly changed by the execution of the button presentation.

In addition, although other configurations for damping vibration (damping displacement of vibration) are not shown, vibration is further damped when parts made of different materials (such as metal) are provided between the performance button and the handle operated by the player. As an example, the effect button vibrates, and the vibration transmitted to the handle is weaker when the effect button is connected to the handle by plastic, metal, or plastic parts than when the effect button is connected to the handle by plastic, plastic, or plastic parts. That is, by forming one or more of the plurality of different parts from different materials such as metal, the vibration transmitted to the handle can be further damped. Furthermore, by making one or a plurality of parts between the performance button and the handle metal, electromagnetic waves can be prevented, and the influence of electromagnetic waves on various substrates can be reduced.

Vibration is transmitted to the handle during the performance of vibrating the performance button, and if the strength of the handle fluctuates, the ball to be hit will be shaken and the player will be disadvantaged.
Although it is possible to attach a vibration absorbing device to a device that vibrates the effect button, the cost is high and the structure may be large.
In the present invention, the structure of the performance button is not enlarged, the vibration is hardly transmitted to the handle, and the maximum performance is achieved without giving disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 72 is a table summarizing values of vibration displacement when one or a plurality of configurations capable of damping transmission of vibration displacement are employed. The values of vibration displacement are shown in the figure, and the following configurations are conceivable as a method of damping the transmission of vibration displacement, and these may be combined as appropriate in consideration of the desired shape, design, cost, etc. of the gaming machine.

<Configuration for Damping Vibration Displacement>
(1) The shape of the joint part: Screwing, fitting (2) Increasing the number of parts from the production button to the handle (3) The shape of the member: Partially approximately right angle, partially approximately curved (4) Using members made of materials such as metal <Seventh embodiment>

Next, a description will be given of a mechanism for transmitting vibration generated from a vibrating device provided in the performance button of the slot machine.

In the sixth embodiment, the structure of the pachinko game machine capable of executing the effect A involving the vibration of the effect button as the button effect has been described in detail. Here, the button effect in the reel-type gaming machine is to display an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the effect button at a predetermined timing during reel rotation or when the reel is stopped, and perform a predetermined operation on the effect button during the button effective period during which the operation prompting image is displayed (a single press operation that turns ON → OFF within 0.3 seconds, a long press operation that turns ON → OFF for 0.3 seconds or more, a repeated operation that turns ON → OFF multiple times within 0.3 seconds, etc.). A series of effects in which a series of effects are called a button effect, such as effects suggesting the degree of expectation such as winning a bonus, executing an AT, and executing an ART by means of the contents of lines and the color of characters. When the button effective period ends without executing a predetermined operation for the effect button during the button effective period (for example, when the stop button operation, the bet button operation, or the start lever operation is accepted), the post-operation effect may not be executed, or the post-operation effect may be executed at the end timing of the button effective period. Further, the button valid period may be set even during the period in which the operation prompting image is not displayed (a button effect in which the operation prompting image is not displayed may be executed).

Here, the predetermined button effect described in detail in this example is a effect mode in which the effect button vibrates while the operation prompting image is being displayed (or during the button valid period) to notify the player that the operation of the effect button is valid. Incidentally, the predetermined button effect is referred to as effect A in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, even if the operation of the effect button is accepted, the vibration of the effect button continues for a certain period of time. The magnitude of vibration is determined by the magnitude of vibration displacement (displacement width), the speed of vibration, the acceleration of vibration displacement, etc. However, in this embodiment, only the extent to which the magnitude of vibration displacement is transmitted between different members will be referred to. Note that the magnitude of displacement is, for example, the width between the highest position and the lowest position when the presentation A is executed and the presentation button vibrates up and down. Note that the direction of vibration is not limited to the vertical direction, and the maximum width in any linear direction may be taken as the magnitude of displacement.

In this embodiment, the effect button vibrates when the effect A is executed, and the displacement of the vibration of the effect button is 1 cm.

When playing a game on the reel-type game machine, the player operates a stop button to stop the reels. In addition, since the stop position of the reel can differ depending on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is accepted, if the displacement of the vibration of the performance button is transmitted to the stop button without being damped, the stop operation of the player is affected, the operation of the stop button is accepted at an unintended timing, and there is a possibility of suffering an unexpected loss. Note that any stop button may be used as the stop button in the configuration illustrated below, but the configuration of the left stop button will be exemplified as an example.

In FIG. 73, the part that connects the effect button and the stop button operated by the player is connected by one part (front mask).
Furthermore, when the reel-type game machine is viewed from the front, in the straight line from the performance button to the stop button, the place where the performance button of the front mask is connected and the place where the stop button is connected do not include either substantially right angle or substantially curved shape, and vibration can be transmitted in a straight line.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the performance button at this time is 1 cm as described above.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the front mask, which is a member different from the production button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask becomes 0.9 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button, which is a member different from the front mask. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button becomes 0.8 cm.
In this way, when the vibration of the effect button passes through only one component from the effect button to the stop button, a large vibration is transmitted. Therefore, in this example, the configuration of the gaming machine in which the vibration generated in the effect button is difficult to be transmitted to the stop button will be described in detail below.

In FIG. 74, the parts that connect the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, front mask middle, stop button unit), and the control panel and front mask middle are connected with screws.
When the reel-type game machine is viewed from the front, the control panel, the inside of the front mask, and the stop button unit do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes in the straight line from the performance button to the stop button.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the performance button to the control panel which is a member different from the performance button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the control panel becomes 0.9 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Furthermore, since the control panel and the inside of the front mask are connected with screws, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask becomes 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the front mask middle and the stop button unit in the same figure, the screws also attenuate the vibration, so the vibration can be damped more than when two different members are joined. It should be noted that, unless a method of connecting two different members is mentioned, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joining portion.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the inside of the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a member different from the inside of the front mask. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the stop button unit becomes 0.6 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button becomes 0.5 cm.

Thus, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the performance button to the stop button, the displacement of vibration transmitted to the stop button can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed from the performance button to the stop button.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the stop operation of the player is hardly affected, and the timing of accepting the stop operation of the stop button is hardly shifted due to the execution of the button performance, and thus the game machine can be created.

In FIG. 75, the parts that connect the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, front mask middle, stop button unit), and the control panel and front mask middle are connected by fitting. The snap-in type means that at least a part of the joined members is snap-fitted so that the joining of two different members is not released even if a force is applied in one direction, as described in the dotted circle in the figure.
When the reel-type game machine is viewed from the front, the control panel, the inside of the front mask, and the stop button unit do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes in the straight line from the performance button to the stop button.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the performance button to the control panel which is a member different from the performance button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the control panel becomes 0.9 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the inside of the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Furthermore, since the control panel and the inside of the front mask are connected by fitting, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration inside the front mask becomes 0.65 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by a snap-in type, as in the control panel and the front mask in the same figure, vibrations are damped more by the snap-in joint than by a straight joint, so vibration can be damped more than when two different members are joined (the joint is on a straight line).

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the inside of the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a member different from the inside of the front mask. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the stop button unit becomes 0.55 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button becomes 0.45 cm.

Thus, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the performance button to the stop button, the displacement of vibration transmitted to the stop button can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed from the performance button to the stop button.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the stop operation of the player is hardly affected, and the timing of accepting the stop operation of the stop button is hardly shifted due to the execution of the button performance, and thus the game machine can be created.

In FIG. 76, the parts connecting the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, front mask middle, stop button unit), and the control panel and front mask middle are connected with screws.
When the reel-type game machine is viewed from the front, in the straight line from the performance button to the stop button, the control panel and the front mask do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes, and the stop button unit includes a substantially right-angled shape.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the performance button to the control panel which is a member different from the performance button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the control panel becomes 0.9 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Furthermore, since the control panel and the inside of the front mask are connected with screws, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask becomes 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the front mask middle and the stop button unit in the same figure, the screws also attenuate the vibration, so the vibration can be damped more than when two different members are joined. It should be noted that, unless a method of connecting two different members is mentioned, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joining portion.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a member different from the front mask, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Further, since the front mask includes a substantially right-angled shape, when the vibration is transmitted through the front mask, it cannot be transmitted in a straight line.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button becomes 0.4 cm.

Thus, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the performance button to the stop button, the displacement of vibration transmitted to the stop button can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed from the performance button to the stop button.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the stop operation of the player is hardly affected, and the timing of accepting the stop operation of the stop button is hardly shifted due to the execution of the button performance, and thus the game machine can be created.

In FIG. 77, the parts that connect the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, front mask middle, stop button unit), and the control panel and front mask middle are connected with screws.
When the reel type game machine is viewed from the front, in the straight line from the performance button to the stop button, the control panel and the front mask do not include substantially rectangular or substantially curved shapes, and the stop button unit includes a substantially curved shape.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the performance button to the control panel which is a member different from the performance button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the control panel becomes 0.9 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Furthermore, since the control panel and the inside of the front mask are connected with screws, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask becomes 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the front mask middle and the stop button unit in the same figure, the screws also attenuate the vibration, so the vibration can be damped more than when two different members are joined. It should be noted that, unless a method of connecting two different members is mentioned, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joining portion.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the inside of the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a member different from the inside of the front mask, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Furthermore, since the inside of the front mask includes a substantially curved shape, the vibration is damped more than when it can be transmitted in a straight line, and the displacement of the vibration in the stop button unit becomes 0.48 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button becomes 0.38 cm.

Thus, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the performance button to the stop button, the displacement of vibration transmitted to the stop button can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed from the performance button to the stop button.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the stop operation of the player is hardly affected, and the timing of accepting the stop operation of the stop button is hardly shifted due to the execution of the button performance, and thus the game machine can be created.

In addition, although other configurations for damping vibration (damping vibration displacement) are not shown, vibration is further damped when parts made of different materials (such as metal) are provided between the effect button and the stop button operated by the player. As an example, the production button vibrates, and the vibration transmitted to the stop button is weaker when the production button is connected to the stop button by plastic, metal, or plastic parts than when the production button is connected to the stop button by plastic, plastic, or plastic parts. That is, by forming one or more of the plurality of different parts from different materials such as metal, the vibration transmitted to the handle can be further damped. Furthermore, by making one or a plurality of parts between the performance button and the handle metal, electromagnetic waves can be prevented, and the influence of electromagnetic waves on various substrates can be reduced.

Vibration is transmitted to the stop button at the time of vibrating the performance button by the performance, and if the pressing timing of the stop button is deviated, the stop position of the spinning drum is displaced and the player is disadvantaged.
Although it is possible to attach a vibration absorbing device to a device that vibrates the effect button, the cost is high and the structure may be large.
In the present application, the structure of the performance button is not enlarged, the vibration is hardly transmitted to the stop button, and the maximum performance is achieved without giving disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 78 is a table summarizing values of vibration displacement when one or a plurality of configurations capable of damping transmission of vibration displacement described above are employed. The values of vibration displacement are shown in the figure, and the following configurations are conceivable as a method of damping the transmission of vibration displacement, and these may be combined as appropriate in consideration of the desired shape, design, cost, etc. of the gaming machine.

<Configuration for Damping Vibration Displacement>
(1) The shape of the joint part: Screwing, fitting (2) Increasing the number of parts from the production button to the stop button (3) The shape of the member: Partly approximately right angle, partly approximately curved (4) Use a material such as metal

<Additional remarks in the sixth and seventh embodiments>
There is a technique for suppressing transmitted vibration by using a cushioning material such as a rubber washer in order to absorb vibration when assembling each member (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-29853). The more cushioning material is provided, the less the impact on the durability of each member. However, by providing new members that are not originally required for the game machine, the development cost of the game machine tends to increase.

According to the present invention, by suppressing the transmission of vibration based on the members constituting the game machine without providing a new member such as a cushioning material, it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine and efficiently suppress the transmission of vibration.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the low-active determination is used to determine the logic level when an input device used in a gaming machine that affects the outcome of a game is operated. Hereinafter, the start switch of a slot machine will be described as an example of the input device.

A representative function executed by operating a start switch in a slot machine will be described. First, a winning combination is determined (an internal lottery is conducted). The type of symbol combination that can be displayed is determined according to the combination, and the start switch affects the result of the game, such as the right to acquire game medals, replays, and bonus games. Secondly, it is possible to fix the set value by operating the start switch while the setting change device is in operation (during the setting change mode). More specifically, in the setting change mode, the setting switch is operated to select a setting value candidate, and the start switch is operated to confirm the selected setting value. Note that the set value is designed such that the player plays the game a plurality of times, and the medal acquisition expected value of the payout number of game medals is generally determined from the number of game medals inserted in the game. For example, a gaming machine is generally designed to have a negative expected medal acquisition value (that is, decrease) at the setting value 1, and is designed to have a positive (that is, increase) value at the setting value 6.

As described above, the start switch is an input device that affects the outcome of the game, and is an input device of high importance to the gaming machine.

Here, the high-active determination, low-active determination, and chattering described in this embodiment will be described.

High-active determination is also called positive logic, in which a high voltage level is associated with 1 and a low voltage level is associated with 0. Low active determination is also referred to as negative logic, and refers to a method in which a low voltage level is associated with 1 and a high voltage level is associated with 0. It is intuitively easier to understand using the high active determination.

Chattering, which is also called noise, is a phenomenon in which contact and non-contact are repeatedly turned on and off at high speed in a short time at the moment when separated contacts are brought into contact when a mechanical switch is operated. In this embodiment, by operating the mechanical switch in the mechanism of the start switch, when the detection piece inside the mechanism passes through the sensor light, contact and non-contact are repeated instantaneously at high speed.

Here, the mechanism for detecting whether or not the start switch has been turned on will be briefly described. When the start switch is operated and a winning combination is determined, a change in the light receiving or blocking state of the sensor occurs (FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b)), and in order to determine that the state change of the sensor is constantly occurring, it is determined that the start switch has been operated when the voltage level crosses over the determination threshold value (in this embodiment, it exceeds 60 for high active determination and falls below 40 for low active determination), and data indicating that the start switch has been operated is stored in a specific area of the RAM (FIG. 79 (c). )). In a general sensor detection structure, the detection piece detects that the start switch is turned on by shielding the sensor light from the sensor light receiving portion.

Here, chattering may occur when the detection piece starts to change the light receiving state of the sensor light receiving portion. A possible problem when chattering occurs is that there is a possibility that a uniform lottery result cannot be obtained when a winning combination is determined by operating the start switch. When selling a game machine, it is a rule that a mechanism that causes a bias in the appearance of the winning combination cannot be sold, and the player cannot play the game with peace of mind. In addition, there is a risk that the appearance frequency of the role may become unstable due to the occurrence of chattering.

In this example, in order to reduce the frequency of erroneous detection due to chattering, low active determination is adopted as the logic level determination used for detecting the start switch.

FIG. 80 and FIG. 81 are comparison diagrams of the case of adopting the high-active determination and the case of adopting the low-active determination.

When the high-active determination shown in FIG. 80 is adopted, the voltage level is increased by the light-shielding state of the sensor light-receiving section. It is determined that the start switch has been input when the voltage level exceeds 60, which is set as a threshold value, when the sensor light-receiving portion is in a light-shielded state. Here, although the threshold is set to 60, the threshold of the voltage level may be appropriately changed depending on the design. When the voltage level changes, mechanical design may cause chattering. In particular, when the light receiving state changes to the light blocking state, the chattering amplitude tends to increase, and the number of times the determination threshold value is exceeded tends to increase. If the threshold is unintentionally crossed multiple times due to the influence of chattering, the possibility of the timing of determining the winning combination becoming uncertain increases. Specifically, one hand is determined by the hand determination means based on exceeding 60, which is the determination threshold value for the high active determination. However, when the condition for exceeding the determination threshold value is satisfied multiple times due to the occurrence of chattering, there is a possibility that a result that is clearly different from the hand determination at the timing when the player operates the start switch and the detection piece passes the sensor due to multiple hand determinations is generated, and a uniform lottery result cannot be provided.

On the other hand, when the low-active determination shown in FIG. 81 is employed, the voltage level is lowered as the sensor light receiving portion enters the light receiving state. When the sensor light-receiving portion enters the light-receiving state and the voltage level becomes less than 40 set as a threshold value, it is determined that the start switch has been input. Here, the threshold is set to 40, but the threshold of the voltage level may be appropriately changed depending on the design. When the voltage level changes, there is a possibility that chattering occurs due to the mechanical design, but when changing from the light shielding state to the light receiving state, the chattering amplitude tends to be smaller than when the high active determination is performed, and the number of times the determination threshold is exceeded tends to decrease.

From the above, the input device (for example, the above-described start switch) that affects the result of the game such as the determination of the role can derive a stable result by adopting the low active determination. Therefore, in this example, the low active determination is adopted.

In the above description, the start switch of the slot machine was taken as an example, but the low-active determination may also be applied to input devices related to errors, setting key switches, and the like. Also, in a pachinko game machine, it is desirable to employ an input device that affects the outcome of a game, such as an RWM clear switch. In other words, both in slot machines and pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to employ low-active determination for input devices that affect the results of games.

<Additional remarks in the eighth embodiment>
As an example of filtering processing when chattering occurs, there is a technique of discarding data or copying previous data if the stored pattern is not normal (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-62317). Although the prior art describes positive logic (high-active determination), it does not describe the advantages of adopting low-active. In this embodiment, the input device that adopts negative logic (low-active determination) is adopted as an input device that affects the progress of the game, thereby reducing the influence of chattering and reducing the blurring of the results that affect the game such as winning lottery.

<<Structure of the back of the lower ball plate>>
The pachinko game machine according to this example has the lower ball tray P342 as described above, and the configuration applicable to this example as the structure behind the lower ball tray P342 will be described in detail below. Note that the back side of the lower ball tray P342 is the bottom side as seen from the player. Also, the back surface of the lower ball plate P342 is referred to as the back surface of the lower ball plate.

First, FIG. 82 is a bottom view of the gaming machine as viewed from below by the player. The back side of the lower ball tray P342 has a lower ball tray rear surface UR, and the lower ball tray rear surface UR is provided with a discharge shutter ST that can take an open state in which the game balls stored in the lower ball tray P342 can be discharged downward and a closed state in which the game balls stored in the lower ball tray cannot be discharged downward.

When the back side of the lower ball plate P342 is composed of one surface, the one surface is the lower ball plate back surface UR, and when the back side of the lower ball plate P342 is composed of a plurality of surfaces or is bent or curved, the entire back surface of the lower ball plate P342 may be called the lower ball plate back surface UR, and the surface on which the discharge shutter ST is provided may be called the lower ball plate back surface UR.

Further, the lower ball plate back surface UR has a recessed screw BS1 whose screw head is at a position (lower position) recessed than the lower ball plate rear surface UR in a fixed state, a protruding screw BS2 whose screw head is at a position (higher position) than the lower ball plate rear surface UR when fixed, and a projection part DP projecting from the lower ball plate rear surface UR. The recessed screw BS1, the projecting screw BS2, and the projecting portion DP may be provided on the same surface or may be provided on different surfaces. Moreover, it is not necessary to have all of these, and it is applicable to the configuration of this example as long as it has any one or more.

In the figure, a configuration in which screws are fixed like a recessed screw BS1 and a protruded screw BS2 is exemplified, but it is not limited to this, and in addition to the case of attaching by screwing members such as screws and bolts, it may be configured to use members such as detachable rivets, for example, push rivets.

In addition, it is supplemented that the configurations described above and the configurations described later in this example can be combined in any way, and it is possible to combine a plurality of configurations.

Next, FIG. 83 is an enlarged view of the back surface UR of the lower ball plate applicable to this example. Note that the positional relationship between the recessed screw BS1, the protrusion DP, and the ejection shutter ST shown in FIG. 82 is merely an example.

In the figure, game balls are stored in a lower ball tray P342, and a box (sometimes referred to as a dollar box) in which game balls are stored is placed below the lower ball tray P342. As shown in the figure, game balls are fully stored in the dollar box (game balls are stored above the opening surface of the dollar box).

<About AA>
As shown in the lower left part of the figure, AA, which is the height of the projection DP (the height of the projection DP from the back surface UR of the lower ball tray), is less than half the diameter b of the game ball (AA≤b/2). By structuring in this way, when a full dollar box is replaced with an empty dollar box, even if the full dollar box is dragged, it is possible to make it difficult for the game balls to get caught on the projecting part DP, and it is possible to make it difficult for the game balls to fall out due to being caught by the projecting part DP. It should be noted that the height of the protruding screw BS2 is less than half of b, which is the diameter of the game ball, similarly to the protruding part DP.

In addition, the above-described configuration prevents the game balls from falling out due to dents or projections when the game balls are fully stored in the cash box, so that the projection screw BS2 which is higher than half of the diameter b of the game balls does not have to be present. That is, even in a configuration in which the projecting screw BS2 is not provided on the back surface UR of the lower ball plate, the same effect as the configuration described above can be created, and even in such a case, it is said that (AA≤b/2) holds.

<About AB>
As shown in the lower right part of the figure, AB, which is the depth of the recessed screw BS1 (the depth from the bottom surface UR of the lower ball tray to the recessed screw BS1), is less than half the height b, which is the diameter of the game ball (AB≤b/2). By constructing in this way, even when the full dollar box is dragged when the full dollar box is replaced with an empty dollar box, it is possible to make it difficult for the game balls to get caught in the dents to which the dent screws BS1 are fixed, and to make it difficult for the game balls to be caught in the dents to which the dent screws BS1 are fixed and to prevent the game balls from falling out. In the figure, AB is the length from the back surface UR of the lower spherical dish to the lowest part of the head of the recessed screw BS1, but AB may be the length from the back surface UR of the lower spherical dish to the top of the head of the recessed screw BS1 (apex of the head). As for the recessed screw BS1, similar to the protruding screw BS2, even when the recessed screw BS1 is not provided on the back surface UR of the lower ball plate, the same effect as the above-described configuration can be created.

<About AC>
As shown in the upper part of the figure, AC, which is the depth of the discharge shutter ST (the depth from the lower ball tray back surface UR to the discharge shutter ST), is greater than or equal to b, which is the diameter of the game ball (AC≧b). By structuring in this way, when the full dollar box is replaced with an empty dollar box, even if the full dollar box is dragged, the whole game balls are caught in the depression of the ejection shutter ST, thereby making it difficult to push out the other game balls, and it is possible to make it difficult to cause such a phenomenon that the other game balls are pushed out and spilled. In addition, even when the dollar box is full, the discharge shutter ST can be easily opened and closed.

Next, FIG. 84 is an enlarged view of the back surface UR of the lower ball plate applicable to this example. The configuration in the figure is different from that in FIG. 83, and AD, which is the depth of the discharge shutter ST (the depth from the lower ball tray back surface UR to the discharge shutter ST), is less than half the diameter b of the game ball (AD≦b/2). By structuring in this way, even when the full dollar box is dragged when the full dollar box is replaced with an empty dollar box, it is possible to make it difficult for the game balls to be caught in the depression of the discharge shutter ST and spill out, and to prevent the game balls from falling out by being caught in the depression of the discharge shutter ST. In addition, even when the dollar box is full, the discharge shutter ST can be easily opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, by configuring the length (depth or height) of the recesses and protrusions on the back surface of the lower ball tray UR to be half or less of the game balls, the game balls stored in the dollar box are less likely to get caught and the game balls stored in the dollar box are less likely to spill out. Further, by configuring the length (depth or height) of the recesses and protrusions on the back surface UR of the lower ball tray to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, even when the game ball stored in the dollar box is caught, other game balls can be hardly pushed out, and all the game balls stored in the dollar box can be prevented from spilling out.

Although the configuration of the lower ball tray back surface UR has been described in detail, the above configuration can also be applied to gaming machines that do not have a lower ball tray. As an example, in a game machine in which game balls are not discharged outside the game machine (sometimes referred to as an enclosed game machine), the above configuration may be applied as the shape of the back side (lower side) of the member on the lower side of the game machine (the member provided near the position where the above-described lower ball tray is provided). With such a configuration, the space under the gaming machine can be widened, and the space can be effectively used, for example, by placing the player's belongings.

It should be noted that there is no problem in combining the configuration related to the configuration of the back surface UR of the lower ball plate described above with any of the configurations of this example.

<<Structure of the back of the game machine>>
The configuration of the buttons provided on the back of the game machine applicable to the pachinko game machine according to this example will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 85, it has a RAM clear button RB that can clear the RAM when pressed when the power is turned on, and an error cancellation button EB for canceling an error when a predetermined error occurs. Note that the error release button EB is merely an example, and any button other than the RAM clear button RB provided on the back of the gaming machine may be used (the same applies hereinafter). Also, the back surface of the game machine may be replaced with the back surface of the front door to form a reel-type game machine.

Next, FIG. 86 is an enlarged view of the RAM clear button RB and error release button EB applicable to this example. The initial positions are shown for both the RAM clear button RB and the error cancel button EB.

<RAM clear button>
First, the RAM clear button RB will be described in detail. The RAM clear button RB slides within the RAM clear button frame portion RBW when the RAM clear button operation surface RBS is pressed, and is configured to be able to detect the operation (ON) of the button. Also, the RAM clear button RB that has been pressed is configured to return to the initial position by an urging force.

BA is the height (of the projecting portion) at the initial position of the RAM clear button RB. BB is the length of the long side of the RAM clear button operation surface RBS. BC is the distance between the RAM clear button RB and the side surface of the RAM clear button frame portion RBW (this distance is sometimes referred to as play).

<Error reset button>
Next, the error cancellation button EB will be described in detail. The error canceling button EB slides within the error canceling button frame portion EBW by pressing the error canceling button operation surface EBS, and is configured to be able to detect the operation (ON) of the button. Also, the pressed error release button EB is configured to return to the initial position by a biasing force.

BD is the height (of the projected portion) at the initial position of the error cancel button EB. BE is the length of the long side of the error reset button operation surface EBS. BF is the distance between the error release button EB and the side surface of the error release button frame EBW (this distance is sometimes referred to as play).

Here, the relationship between the RAM clear button and the error release button in this example is configured as follows.
(1) BA and BD lengths differ (2) BB and BF lengths differ (3) BC and BG lengths differ desirable. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine according to the present example, by making the shape of the operation member (for example, error cancel button) on the back side of the game machine different from the shape of the RAM clear button as described above, the RAM clear button can be operated without being mistaken for other buttons.

Note that the BD may be shorter than the BA, or the BD may be longer than the BA. Alternatively, the BF may be shorter than the BB, or the BF may be longer than the BB. Alternatively, the BG may be shorter than the BC, or the BG may be longer than the BC.

Next, the button stroke will be described in detail with reference to FIG. BH is the stroke of the RAM clear button. Here, the stroke is the distance from the initial position to the position where the depression is detected (the position from OFF to ON) when the button is pressed from the initial position and the gaming machine detects the pressing of the button. BJ is the stroke of the error release button.

In the figure, the distance from the initial position to the position where the depression is detected (the position where the button is turned on) from the initial position is compared as the stroke, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement distance from the initial position when the button is pushed from the initial position and cannot be pushed any more may be compared.

Here, the relationship between the RAM clear button and the error release button in this example is configured as follows.
(1) Different lengths of BH and BJ In this way, by making the strokes of the RAM clear button and other buttons on the back side of the game machine (for example, the error cancel button) different, the manager of the game parlor can grasp that the RAM clear button has been operated even when the RAM clear button is not visible, and can perform the RAM clear smoothly.

It should be noted that BJ may be shorter than BH, or BJ may be longer than BH.

Further, the differences between the RAM clear button and other buttons (for example, error cancel button) on the back side of the gaming machine may be configured as follows.
(1) RAM clear button operating surface RBS and error clear button operating surface EBS have different shapes (2) RAM clear button operating surface RBS and error clear button operating surface EBS have different surface areas (3) RAM clear button operating surface RBS and error clear button operating surface EBS have different short side lengths (4) RAM clear button RB and error clear button EB differ in material (5) RAM clear button RB and error clear button EB differ in volume

Although the case of comparing the RAM clear button and the other button on the back side of the gaming machine has been described above, it is not limited to this, and the above configuration may be applied when comparing the other button on the front side of the gaming machine and the RAM clear button. As an example, the above configuration may be applied to the sub-input buttons and the RAM clear button controlled by the sub-control board provided on the front side of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, the shape of the RAM clear button is different from all the other buttons provided in the gaming machine, so that the shape of the RAM clear button can be easily memorized.

The above-described configuration regarding the shape of the RAM clear button can also be applied to a reel-type gaming machine. As an example, the reset switch (the switch that may be operated in the setting change mode) provided on the back side of the front door (the inside of the housing when the front door is closed) and other buttons (eg, stop button, sub-input button, Max bet button, etc.) may be configured to have different shapes as described above. Note that the reset switch may not be provided on the back side of the front door.

It should be noted that the configuration related to the shape of the RAM clear button described above can be combined with any configuration of this example without any problem.

<<Structure of the bottom>>
Next, the configuration of the bottom portion of the pachinko game machine according to this example will be described in detail below.

FIG. 88 is a side view of the right side as seen from the player of the pachinko game machine. In the figure, only the lower side of the pachinko game machine is illustrated. The pachinko game machine according to this example has a shape in which the bottom portion TB protrudes toward the rear side (rearward when viewed from the player). Note that the bottom portion TB is made of wood. The payout control board P43 installed on the back side of the game machine is accommodated in a payout control board case HC made of transparent resin, and a heat radiation port HN is provided below the payout control board case HC. The heat generated by the payout control board P43 is radiated to the outside from the heat dissipation port HN, and by providing the heat dissipation port HN in the payout control board case HC, it is possible to prevent the payout control board P43 from malfunctioning due to the heat remaining in the payout control board case HC.

Further, as indicated by arrows in the figure, the bottom portion TB is not positioned vertically below the heat dissipation port HN. As shown, the heat radiation port HN is provided on the lower surface of the payout control board case HC, and the heat generated by the payout control board P43 is radiated downward from the heat radiation port HN. Here, by arranging the bottom portion TB not to be positioned vertically below the heat radiation port HN, the bottom portion TB made of wood is less likely to be damaged (damaged) by the heat emitted from the heat radiation port HN.

Next, FIG. 89 is an enlarged view of the heat radiation port HN of the payout control board case HC. As shown, the heat radiation port HN is rectangular, and the short side length CA is shorter than the diameter b of the game ball. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent game balls from entering the payout control board case HC from the heat radiation port HN, and to prevent the payout control board P43 from being damaged by the collision of the game balls.

Although a plurality of heat dissipation holes HN are provided as shown in the drawing, CA is the shortest short side length among the short side lengths of the plurality of heat dissipation holes HN provided on the lower side of the payout control board case HC. In other words, it is constructed such that a game ball cannot pass through any of the plurality of heat radiation openings HN.

Next, FIG. 90 is an image diagram illustrating how a game ball bounces off the upper surface of the bottom portion TB. When a game machine is operated in a game arcade, there is a possibility that a game ball will fall toward the back of the game machine because the game ball exists on the back side of the game machine. As an example, game balls ejected from an outlet or used as prize balls for players are moving on the back side of the game machine, and if a device for moving the game balls is damaged, the game balls may fall toward the back of the game machine.

This figure illustrates a case where a game ball falls from outside the gaming machine toward the bottom TB on the back side of the gaming machine and collides with the upper surface of the bottom TB, such as the case described above. It should be noted that this example exemplifies the case of colliding with the upper surface of the bottom portion TB, not the case of colliding with the side surface or the corner of the bottom portion TB.

The pachinko game machine according to this example is provided with the payout control board case HC on the back side of the game machine as described above, and the payout control board case HC protrudes to the back side of the game machine (rear side as seen from the player). Further, as described above, the bottom portion TB is not positioned vertically below the heat dissipation port HN, in other words, the payout control board case HC protrudes from the bottom portion TB to the rear side of the gaming machine (rear as viewed from the player).

Also, as shown in the figure, the game ball falling toward the upper surface of the bottom portion TB is configured to collide with the upper surface of the bottom portion TB, rebound, and then collide with the back surface portion HB. In other words, the game ball falling toward the upper surface of the bottom part TB is configured not to directly collide with the payout control board case HC after colliding with the upper surface of the bottom part TB and rebounding, and is configured so as not to collide with the payout control board case HC or collide with the back part HB and then collide with the payout control board case HC. That is, the pachinko game machine according to this example is designed with the bottom portion TB, the back portion HB, and the payout control board case HC so as to satisfy the above configuration.

Incidentally, if the game ball falls from above the trajectory of the game ball shown, the game ball collides with the payout control board case HC and does not reach the bottom portion TB.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent damage to the payout control board case HC housing the payout control board P43 that affects the progress of the game due to the collision of the game balls.

It should be noted that there is no problem in combining the configuration of the bottom portion TB described above with any configuration of this example.

<Speaker configuration>
It is a configuration related to a speaker that can be applied to the pachinko game machine according to the present example. The upper part of the figure is a top view, and the lower part of the figure is a front view. The pachinko game machine shown in the figure has two upper speakers P370 on the left and right sides and two lower speakers P141 on the left and right sides as speakers. Further, as shown in the top view, the lower speaker P141 is directed toward the front of the gaming machine (toward the player), and the sound output from the lower speaker P141 is also output to the front of the gaming machine (toward the player). On the other hand, the upper speaker P370 faces outward from the front direction of the game machine (not facing the player), and the sound output from the upper speaker P370 is also output outward from the front direction of the game machine (direction deviated from the player direction).

Further, the upper speaker P370 and the lower speaker P141 are configured to be capable of outputting the same sound at the same time, and also capable of outputting different sounds at the same time. As an example, when an abnormal start-up winning prize is detected as a predetermined error, an upper speaker P370 repeatedly outputs ``beep-beep-beep'' as a sound effect corresponding to the start-up winning abnormality, and a lower speaker P141 repeatedly outputs a voice saying ``anomaly in winning a prize''. With this configuration, the lower speaker P141 facing the player outputs a sound so that the player can easily recognize what kind of situation it is, and the upper speaker P370 not facing the player outputs a sound effect that can be easily heard (distinguished from other sounds) by a manager who has a lot of experience in responding to the occurrence of an error.

It should be noted that the configuration of the speaker described above can be combined with any configuration of this example without any problem.

As described above, the technical contents described in the modes for carrying out the invention may be appropriately combined.

P: pachinko machine,
P1: outer frame,
P2: front frame,
P3: glass frame,
P4: back set unit,
P5: game board,
P40: main control board,
P41: production control board,
P42: Image control board,
P43: payout control board,
P44: power board,
P47: Power switch,
P48: Ram clear switch,
P49: Setting key switch,
P50: main control display,
P51: First special symbol display device,
P52: Second special symbol display device,
P80: production display device,
P81: production operation means (P380: production operation unit, P381: production button, P382: lever, P383: cross key),
P82: production lamp (P350: frame lamp, P550: board lamp),
P83: Speaker (P141 panel speaker, P371 upper speaker)
P560: production accessories,
P710: first start winning device,
P720: Second start winning device,
P730: general winning device,
P740: Normal map operation gate device,
P750: Large winning mouth device P755: Special electric accessory,
P770: Normal electric accessory 1: Slot machine 2: Front panel 3: Cabinet 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Middle reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Middle stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 2 0: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24a: Left operation instruction lamp 24b: Middle operation instruction lamp 24c: Right operation instruction lamp 25: Bet number display lamp 26: Credit number display device 27: Winning number display device 28: Receiving tray 29: Cigarette ashtray 30: Seal storage unit 32: Display device 34: Medal selector 35: Medal flow channel 37: Setting key switch 38: Setting Switch 39 : Power supply 40 : Power switch 41 : Main control board unit 42 : Sub control board unit 43 : Medal payout port 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal payout unit 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal board 48 : Door open detection switch 52 : Main ROM
53: Sub ROM
56: Main RAM
57: Sub RAM
60: Stop switching switch 62: Automatic adjustment switch 64: 7-segment display 66: Stepping motor 72: Movable object 100: Main control board 105: Main CPU
110 : voltage monitoring circuit 112 : setting change means 114 : crystal oscillator 120 : role lottery means 122 : random number generator 124 : random number extraction means 126 : random number generation means 128 : random number determination means 130 : reel control means 132 : rotation control means 134 : stop control means 138 : operation order detection means 140 : prize determination means 142 : payout means 144 : Power supply interruption means 146 : Special role carry-over means 148 : Winning flag control means 151 : Special game control means 156 : Hopper motor drive means 158 : Betting number setting means 1000 : Sub control board 1002 : Effect output control means 1004 : Rights control means 1005 : Sub CPU
1006: notification output control means 1008: sub-input switch operation means 1010: movable object control means 1014: image control board 1018: BL board 1101: sub-control means 1110: performance control means 1120: game state notification means 1130: AT lottery means 1140: AT management means 1150: AT game number counting means 1160: notification means 117 0 : Lottery means 1180 : AT notification means S : Speaker UR : Bottom surface of lower ball tray ST : Ejection shutter BS1 : Recessed screw BS2 : Projection screw DP : Projection RB : RAM clear button RBS : RAM clear button operation surface RBW : RAM clear button frame EB : Error release button EBS : Error release button operation surface EBW : Error release button frame TB : Bottom HN : Radiation port P370 : Upper speaker P 141: lower speaker

Claims (1)

a frame bottom;
a predetermined substrate;
a substrate case covering the predetermined substrate;
with
The board case has a predetermined heat dissipation port,
A gaming machine, wherein the frame bottom portion is not positioned vertically below the predetermined heat radiation port.

Images